Welcome

Navigate your way through the tabs below.

Book Parts

Case Abstracts

Part One Case: Does This Milkshake Taste Funny?

Abstract


George Stein, a college student employed for the summer by Eastern Dairy, must decide if he is going to remove the filters from the plant's piping and, thus, allow the current production run of milkshake mix to be contaminated with maggots. This course of action will save the company money, at least in the short run, and allow George's shift to go home on time. George is disturbed, however, by the thought of children drinking those milkshakes. The workforce is unionized and George is feeling pressure from some of his co-workers to cut corners. The night shift is staffed by a self-managed team and no members of management are on duty.


Instructions: This case is in your textbook on the pages noted in the Table of Contents.

Part Two Case: Nordstrom

Abstract


Nordstrom has been one of the most successful retailers in recent years based on its tradition of outstanding customer service. This case describes the management practices that have shaped the customer-oriented culture of Nordstrom and contributed to its success. The human resource management activities that produce its highly motivated sales force are particularly emphasized. Yet, not all employees at Nordstrom have reacted positively to its management practices. A number of employees have viewed the company as being unfair and unethical in its dealings with them. Dissatisfied employees have even organized a unionization campaign. An interesting feature of the case is the positive and negative perceptions of current and former employees to "The Nordstrom Way".


Instructions: This case is in your textbook on the pages noted in the Table of Contents.

Part Three Case: Contract Negotiations in Western Africa: A Case of Mistaken Identity

Abstract


This case presents a number of difficult situations encountered by a contract negotiating team in a West African country. The cultural differences between doing business in West Africa and Peter Janes' expectations are explored. In addition, the situation leads Mr. Janes to question his basic values and presuppositions about his identity and integrity, through a rather bizarre incident. Finally, the question of the effectiveness of company policy is raised, particularly in relation to the structure of the negotiating teams and the relationship between headquarters and the team.


Instructions: This case is in your textbook on the pages noted in the Table of Contents.

Part Four Case: Motor Parts Corporation

Abstract


Bob Marvin, president of Motor Parts Corporation (MPC), feels a great deal of conflict and frustration about how to deal with the behavior of one of his vice presidents, Al Shepherd. Al's wife, Ruth, has recently had a recurrence of a malignant brain tumor, and Al is spending more and more time away from work to be with her. Bob believes that Al's increasing absence from work and his preoccupation with his wife's problem is causing Al's performance to suffer. In addition, Bob thinks Al's behavior is beginning to affect the morale and performance of others who work with Al. Bob is even beginning to question Al's commitment to the organization.
Bob has chosen not to confront Al directly because he does not want to seem insensitive. Instead, he has asked Mike Jones, a management professor and planning consultant to MPC, as well as a good friend to both Al and Bob, to speak with Al. Al was quite open about his feelings with Bob. Al believed that he was performing his job duties adequately and expressed his loyalty to the company.


When Mike Jones reports the results of his conversation with Al, Bob becomes more puzzled about what to do. Later, when Bob finds out that Al is in Detroit at his mother's house (who is ill), he becomes really frustrated. (What Bob does not know is that Al is in Detroit closing the deal on a major account for MPC.) Mike asks Bob to talk to Al in a more straightforward way.


Instructions: This case is in your textbook on the pages noted in the Table of Contents.

Part Five Case: Using Leadership to Promote TQM

Abstract


The general manager of the production division of a Latin American export company is considering what to do about cross-functional teams and the quality council, both central to the implementation of total quality management (TQM). The company is the Tropical Export Company that produces LITEP—an acronym that refers to the labor intensive tropical export product grown in Playa Negra and exported by the company. The company is a U.S.-based multinational corporation with ­extensive production operations in Latin America that produces LITEP for industrialized markets, mainly North America and Europe. Several production divisions are located in the Central American country of Morazan. Each employs approximately 5,500 to 6,500 employees of whom around 500 to 550 are salaried; the rest are union members. The divisions are focused on exported volume of high quality LITEP. Quality is vital to the customer and volume is the key to lowering costs and increasing productivity.


Instructions: This case is in your textbook on the pages noted in the Table of Contents.

Case Descriptions

Part One, "Introduction: The Context of Modern Organizational Behavior and Management," introduces you to organizations and discusses some major issues that form the context of modern organizational behavior and management. It also discusses ethics, organizational behavior, and organizational culture.

Chapter 1, "Introduction and Historical Background," introduces you to the world of organizations. This chapter defines an organization and introduces you to theories and concepts. The chapter also describes the historical background of modern thinking about organizations and management.

Chapter 2, "The Context of Modern Organizations (Diversity, Quality, Technology, International)," focuses on four major issues that can affect modern organizations and their management. Those issues are workforce diversity, managing for quality, technology, and the global environment of organizations. Projected changes in the demographic makeup of the domestic civilian workforce will make the workforce of the future more diverse, presenting managers with both opportunities and problems. Managing for quality helps organizations become more competitive and meet the needs of increasingly demanding consumers. The third issue, technology, will have sweeping effects on organizations and their managers well into the future. The global environment of organizations adds still another dimension of diversity, opportunity, and problems. Today's managers can no longer assume their markets and competitors are only within their home country's boundary.

Much behavior and many decisions in organizations involve ethical issues. Chapter 3, "Ethics and Behavior in Organizations," examines ethics and ethical behavior in detail. The chapter first considers the social responsibility of modern organizations and then compares ethical and unethical behavior in organizations. It next describes the sources of ethics for both societies and individuals and reviews several theories of ethics. Finally, the chapter addresses how managers can promote ethical behavior and considers the implications the increasingly global environment of ­organizations has on ethical behavior.

Chapter 4, "Organizational Culture," describes many aspects of organizational culture and its effects on organization members. The chapter offers several ways of viewing organizational cultures. It describes the functions and dysfunctions of ­cultures, explains how to diagnose an organization's culture, and discusses the relationship between an organization's culture and its performance. The chapter discusses some international aspects of organizational culture and several ethical issues.

Part Two, “Individual Processes in Organizations,”  introduces you to some major individual processes in organizations. The main topics are perception, attitudes, and personality; organizational socialization; motivation and rewards; and the effects of job design on motivation. Each chapter discusses international aspects of the topics and the ethical issues they raise.

Chapter 5, “Perception, Attitudes, and Personality,” starts with a description of human perceptual processes and distinguishes between self-perception (a view of self) and social perception (a view of others). The chapter next addresses such topics as how attitudes form, change, and affect behavior. Finally, personality and its development are discussed from a social and a biological perspective. The chapter ­describes several personality characteristics and types that are of interest to organizations and management. It also discusses the role of emotions in human behavior and emotional intelligence as a personality-like quality.

Chapter 6, “Organizational Socialization,” describes an organizational process you experience after joining a new organization. The chapter opens with a description of roles, role behavior, and the transitions people make as they move through organizational roles. It then focuses on the three stages of organizational socialization: anticipatory socialization, entry/encounter, and metamorphosis.

Chapter 7, “Motivation: Need Theories,” and Chapter 8, “Motivation: Cognitive and Behavioral Theories and Techniques,” focus on major theories of human motivation. Chapter 7 describes the major need theories, the hierarchy of needs theory, existence-relatedness-growth theory, and McClelland’s achievement motivation theory. Chapter 8 describes cognitive and behavioral theories of motivation. The three cognitive theories are expectancy theory, equity theory, and goal setting theory. Expectancy theory and equity theory combine to form an analytical tool for understanding motivational issues in organizations. Goal setting theory describes how specific, challenging, reachable goals, which are accepted by a person, lead to higher performance than goals that are “fuzzy,” unchallenging, not reachable, or not accepted. The chapter then describes behavior modification, a theory that shows how to shape people’s behavior.

Chapter 9, “Intrinsic Rewards and Job Design,” explains how job design affects people’s experience of internal rewards. The chapter develops the job characteristics theory of work motivation, a well-researched theory that can guide the design of motivating jobs.

Part Three, “Group and Interpersonal Processes in Organizations,” introduces you to group dynamics and interpersonal processes in organizations. The main topics include behavior in and between groups, conflict in organizations, and leadership and management. Each chapter discusses international aspects of the topics and the ethical issues they raise.

The first chapter in this part, Chapter 10, “Groups and Intergroup Processes,” describes groups and intergroup processes in organizations. It begins by distinguishing between formal and informal groups in organizations and then lays a basic conceptual foundation. The chapter offers various perspectives on groups in organizations. The chapter builds a model of group formation that should help you understand how and why cohesive groups form in organizations. Chapter 10 features sections on virtual groups, self-managing teams, workgroup socialization, the effects of workforce diversity on group dynamics, and factors that affect group effectiveness. The chapter also examines the functions and dysfunctions of groups.

Chapter 11, “Conflict in Organizations,” focuses on conflict and conflict management in organizations. It begins by defining conflict and discussing functional conflict, dysfunctional conflict, and different levels of conflict. Conflict episodes and the dynamics of conflict behavior are then discussed. The episodic feature of conflict in organizations is a key point. A section on conflict frames and orientations notes their effects on a conflict episode. The chapter develops a model of conflict management that can guide you in choosing when to reduce conflict and when to increase conflict. The model can also help you diagnose conflict in an organization.

The third chapter in this part, Chapter 12, “Leadership and Management,” describes leadership processes and organizations. It views leadership as an influence process that affects other people’s behavior. Several approaches to the study of leadership have evolved over the years. Trait approaches looked for personal qualities that distinguished effective from ineffective leaders or leaders from followers. Behavioral approaches focused on leader behavior and leader effectiveness. Contingency approaches studied the effects of different behaviors in different situations. The chapter also describes several alternative views of leadership.

Part Four, “Organizational Processes,” describes the organizational processes of communication, power, politics, decision making, and stress. Each chapter discusses international aspects of the topics and the ethical issues they raise.

Chapter 13, “Communication Processes,” describes communication processes in organizations. The basic communication process has a sender, a receiver, and a message sent over a communication channel. Noise surrounding the process can distort messages. Communication in organizations occurs in networks of various forms. Verbal communication includes oral, written, electronic, and video communication. Nonverbal communication includes gestures, facial expressions, and the sender’s voice. The meaning of nonverbal communication varies across cultures.

Chapter 14, “Decision-Making and Problem-Solving Processes,” describes decision processes in organizations and presents several decision-making models that have different assumptions and limitations. The various models apply to different decision types and decision situations. Individuals do well with some types of decisions while groups are better for other types of decisions. Cohesive decision-making groups often suffer from a major dysfunction called groupthink. The chapter also discusses methods of improving decision making, some of which can help avoid groupthink.

Power and political behavior are major processes that can affect the behavior of all employees in organizations (see Chapter 15, “Power and Political Behavior”). People’s sources of power include charisma, important work activities, and their political network. Attribution processes can affect a person’s perception of someone else’s power, even when the other party has little power. Political maneuvering in organizations includes political strategy and political tactics. Strategy is a person’s political plan, which often focuses on career development or resource allocation decisions. Tactics are individual steps in carrying out a plan, such as controlling a meeting agenda or building coalitions with important people or groups. Doing a political diagnosis of an organization lets a person see her political position compared to others in the system. Sadly, political behavior has a dark side—deception, lying, and intimidation.

The part closes with Chapter 16, “Stress in Organizations,” which presents an integrated model of stress. This model should help guide your understanding of how factors in a person’s environment can lead to either positive or negative stress. Individuals and organizations can manage stress in several ways, including stress reduction, stress resilience, and stress recuperation.

Part Five, “Organizational Design and Organizational Change,” closes the book with two chapters that discuss organizational design and organizational change.

Chapter 17, “Organizational Design,” describes the contingency view, which states that an organization’s strategy, external environment, technical process, and size affect its design. The chapter discusses several generic forms of organizational design. Each form features different degrees of hierarchy and different management behaviors.

The chapter continues with descriptions of several specific forms of organizational design. They include the common and widely used functional, divisional, and hybrid designs; a complex form called matrix; and several evolving forms. Organizational design by function collects major activities of an organization into almost homogeneous groups. Organizational design by division divides the organization’s activities according to customers served, operating locations, and the like. Some organizational designs feature a combination of the functional and divisional forms.

Organizational design by matrix is a complex form that aligns an organization along two dimensions. One dimension focuses on the organization’s functional activities. The other dimension focuses on projects that serve the organization’s customers.

Several evolving forms of organizational design are growing in use. Self-managing work teams let managers build an organization around decentralized teams. Process organizational design moves away from a hierarchical view and says organizations are a series of interconnected processes. Virtual organizations use networks to build connections between the host organization and many other organizations.

Chapter 18, “Organizational Change and Development,” describes the forces for and against change and the difference between planned and unplanned change. Two models of planned organizational change exist. The evolutionary model sees change happening incrementally over time. The revolutionary model views change as unfolding over periods of stability followed by bursts of change activity. Chapter 18 then describes organizational development, a systematic, phased approach to planned change that uses much knowledge from the social and behavioral sciences.

Quiz

Chapter Resources

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 1.

Authority and Responsibility

In the theory of administration (Fayol), authority is the right to give orders and the power to exact obedience; responsibility or accountability is a corollary of authority.

Bureaucracy

An administrative structure with well-defined offices or functions and hierarchical impersonal relationships; clearly defined duties and responsibilities without regard for who will hold the office.

Centralization

Refers to whether an organization's decision authority is concentrated at the upper levels (centralization) or extends down to the lower levels (decentralization).

Compromise

In Follett's view of conflict, one of three ways of dealing with conflict; each side gives up something to settle the issue, but the reason for the conflict remains; a lose-lose method of conflict reduction.

concepts

Explanations of parts of the phenomena to which a theory applies; useful tools for understanding behavioral phenomena in organizations.

conflict

In Follett's view of conflict, defined as differences in opinions or interests, not warfare.

contributions

Activities and work behavior asked of a person in exchange for the inducements (salary and fringe benefits) offered by an organization.

delegation of authority

Moving decision authority to positions below a manager in an organization.

division of labor

Partitioning the total tasks, duties, and responsibilities of an organization among its members; from Adam Smith.

dominance

In Follett's view of conflict, one of three ways of dealing with conflict; the conflict is resolved with one party winning over the other, but the basic reason for the conflict remains.

dysfunctional consequences

The results of behavior that are negative for an organization and restrict its adjustment and adaptation.

functional analysis

An analytical tool borrowed from anthropology; focuses on whether the consequences of behavior are manifest or latent and whether they are functional or dysfunctional for an organization.

functional consequences

The results of behavior that are good for an organization and help its adjustment and adaptation.

functions of management, five

In the theory of administration (Fayol); includes planning, organizing, command, coordination, and control.

Hawthorne Studies

Large research program done at the Hawthorne Plant of the Western Electric Company, late 1920s to mid-1930s; impetus to developing understanding of organizational behavior.

inducements

What an organization offers a person in exchange for the person's contributions such as work activities and behavior. Includes salary and fringe benefits.

inducements-contributions balance

In Barnard's theory, the relationship between salary and fringe benefits (inducements) and the job done (contributions); people join organizations when the inducements slightly exceed the contributions.

integration of desires

In Follett's view of conflict, one of three ways of dealing with conflict; the parties find a solution that fully meets each party's goals so that neither has to give up anything.

latent consequences

The unintended results of an individual's actions.

latent dysfunctional consequences

Behavioral results that have unintended negative effects on an organization.

leadership

In Follett's view of leadership, defined as having many positive qualities; includes vision, focuses people's energies toward that purpose, and understands total situation.

legal or rational authority

In the analysis of bureaucracy (Weber), the form of authority that is inherent in a bureaucratic office or function.

lenses

A photographic metaphor for using theories and concepts to view behavior in organizations; wide-angle or refined, narrow views from different concepts.

management by objectives and self-control (MBO)

Each manager's goals become a source of self-control; derived from more senior manager's goals; active participation in goal setting; from Peter Drucker.

manifest consequences

The intended results of an individual's actions.

manifest functional consequences

Intended behavioral results that are good for an organization.

motivation to participate

In Barnard's theory, an individual's motivation to join and stay with an organization and perform at a minimally acceptable level.

motivation to perform

In Barnard's theory, the individual's motivation to achieve performance levels higher than the minimum.

organization

A system of two or more persons, engaged in cooperative action, trying to reach some purpose.

organizational behavior

The actions, attitudes, and performance of people in organizations.

organizational theory

Focuses on the design and structure of organizations.

power-over

In Follett's view of leadership, dominance or coercion; control based on force.

power-with

In Follett's view of leadership, a jointly developed power that is co-active not coercive.

purpose plus limitations

In The Functions of the Executive (Barnard), the reason organizations form; an individual has a purpose but also has limitations, and must therefore cooperate with others to reach that purpose.

scientific management

Frederick W. Taylor's approach based on carefully designed jobs, carefully trained workers, cooperation between managers and workers to ensure the use of standard procedures, and a division of labor between management and workers.

sense of proportion

In the theory of administration (Fayol), a combination of tact and experience that lets managers tailor the application of management principles to specific circumstances.

strategy

Describes an organization's long-term goals and the way it plans to reach those goals (Drucker).

theories and concepts as lenses

The use of theories and concepts to examine organizational phenomena from different perspectives, focusing on a broad view or on a small part of it.

theory

A plausible explanation of a phenomenon; also describes relationships among its concepts.

Theory X

Based on their assumptions about workers, Theory X managers give their workers little latitude, closely supervise them, punish poor performance, use few rewards, and typically give only negative feedback.

Theory Y

Based on their assumptions about workers, Theory Y managers have a positive view of people, believe they have much hidden potential and that people will work toward organizational goals, give workers more job responsibility, and rely on self-motivation more than coercion.

unity of command

In Fayol's theory, the principle that an employee should receive orders from one superior only.

unity of direction

In Fayol's theory, the principle that a department or unit should have a single head and a single goal.

zone of indifference

In Barnard's theory, a concept that describes how people respond to orders and directives from others; people act on orders falling within the zone without much thought, but question and may not act on orders outside it.

Chapter Outline

Introduction

  1. Successful modern organizations
    1. Typically involving systems featuring simultaneous pressures for change and stability. Appear paradoxical to many organizational members
    2. Constantly evolving systems that thrive on change. Must repeatedly innovate to stay competitive
    3. Many organizations will extensively use technology
      1. Intranet: internal interactions
      2. Internet: external interactions
  2. Global focus
  3. Technology will change aspects of organizational forms and functioning
    1. Electronic groups
    2. Virtual organizations
  4. Strategic changes. Electronic business (e-commerce) and bricks and mortar. Manager will face complex decisions about integrating these approaches
  5. Welcome to our modern organizational world. This book discusses all the topics mentioned and gives you well-grounded information to help you function successfully in this new future environment

What Is an Organization?

  1. Definition: “A system of two or more persons, engaged in cooperative action, trying to reach a purpose”
  2. Bounded systems of structured social interaction
  3. Usually have a hierarchical form
  4. Examples: hospitals, colleges, and businesses

Organizational Behavior and Organizational Theory

  1. Organizational behavior focuses on behavior of people in organizations
  2. Organizational theory focuses on the structure and design of organizations

Theories and Concepts

  1. Analogy: set of camera lenses
  2. A conceptual tool kit you can use to improve your ability to analyze and diagnose behavioral phenomena in organizations
  3. Definition: “A theory is a plausible explanation of a phenomenon”

Functional Analysis

  1. Background
  2. Manifest and latent consequences of behavior
  3. Functional and dysfunctional consequences of behavior
  4. Jointly consider manifest-latent and functional-dysfunctional consequences of human behavior

Historical Foundations

  1. Division of labor: Adam Smith (1776)
  2. Scientific management: Frederick W. Taylor (1911)
  3. Toward a theory of administration: Henri Fayol (1919)
  4. Bureaucracy: Max Weber (1922)
  5. Mary Parker Follett's observations on organizations and management (1925)
  6. The functions of the executive: Chester Barnard (1934)
  7. The Hawthorne Studies (1939)
  8. Theory X and Theory Y: Douglas McGregor (1960)
  9. Management guru: Peter F. Drucker (1995)

Chapter Overview

This introductory chapter outlines the goals of the book and how it presents material. It describes organizations and the roles they play in our lives. The chapter describes the nature of organizational behavior and organizational theory and the relationships between these two fields of knowledge. A discussion of theory, and concepts within theory, follows. This chapter uses a camera lens metaphor to show how theories and concepts offer different perspectives or views of organizations.

Chapter 1 also develops functional analysis, because it is used throughout the book as an analytical tool. The chapter describes the analytical utility of theory and functional analysis and illustrates it with examples.

The chapter presents the historical foundations of organizations, organizational behavior, and management. It summarizes the work of Smith, Taylor, Fayol, Weber, Follett, Mayo, and Barnard. Chapter 1 ends with a description of some Peter Drucker thinking.

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

Describe the concept of an organization.

Distinguish between organizational behavior and organizational theory.

Explain the role of theory and concepts in analyzing behavioral issues and problems.

Analyze the consequences of behavior in organizations.

Discuss the historical foundations of modern organizational behavior and management.


Personal Management Implications

The chapter's lens metaphor for using theories and concepts will help you understand behavioral issues and problems in organizations. Each textbook chapter builds a collection of “lenses” that you can use analytically. These concepts will help you understand behavioral phenomena you experience in organizations or help you manage such phenomena.

Several parts of the “Historical Foundations” section will serve you well as an individual or a manager. Although most of them date to the early part of the twentieth century, they stand as foundations to understanding human behavior in organizations.

Adam Smith's discussion of the division of labor lays a foundation for understanding organizational behavior. It is followed by a description of Frederick Taylor's system of scientific management, which had the simple goal of efficiency. Smoothing out work processes continues as an important implication for managing organizations, appearing again in text Chapter 2, “The Context of Modern Organizations,” as quality management.

Henri Fayol's administrative theory has many concepts that inform you as an individual or manager. They are inescapable parts of modern organizations and management although written almost 100 years ago. Watch for them as you experience organizations or manage in them. They will give you insights into central parts of organizational structure and management.

Max Weber's observations on bureaucracies endure into modern times. Sadly, most of us experience the negative side of bureaucracies — inflexibility in response to customers and clients. Remember what Weber always intended: an efficient organizational form with clear goals that can include continuous improvement in customer service.

Mary Parker Follett's observations carry many implications for you as an individual or manager. Power is a key part of organizational life, a topic pursued fully in text Chapter 15, “Power and Political Behavior.” Conflict can have positive effects, an unusual view of conflict that you should carefully consider. Text Chapter 11, “Conflict in Organizations,” fully develops conflict and conflict management, including conflict's positive effects.

Chester Barnard's observations from his book The Functions of the Executive carry several implications. Perhaps the most important ones come from his observations on motivation to participate and the inducements-contributions balance. Organizations will ask you, as an individual, for your contributions in exchange for some inducements. You likely will not join the organization if the two are not about equal. For managers, the implication clearly points to the importance of managing motivation to participate through the inducements-contributions balance.

Douglas McGregor's Theory X and Theory Y observations remain as enduring observations of individual behavior and management style. Think about yourself. Which set of assumptions best fits you? Which set do you often experience in organizations? The text emphasized the widespread Theory X view among modern managers, which could affect you in your work career.

Note Peter Drucker's observations for the future. They likely will have profound effects on your organizational life as either an individual or a manager.


Chapter Summary

An organization is a system of two or more persons, engaged in cooperative action, trying to reach some purpose. Organizational behavior and organizational theory are both disciplines within the social and behavioral sciences that specialize in studying organizations. Theories and concepts let you view organizational issues or problems from different perspectives. They act much like camera lenses by letting you observe a behavioral scene from different angles.

Functional analysis divides the results of a person's behavior into manifest and latent consequences. Manifest consequences are the intended results of the person's action. Latent consequences are the unintended results of the same action. Functional analysis further divides behavior into functional and dysfunctional consequences. Functional consequences are the results of behavior that is good for the organization. Dysfunctional consequences are the results of behavior that is bad for the organization.

The historical foundations of modern organizational behavior and management underlie all the remaining chapters of this book. Each historical figure mentioned here offered basic insights into organizations and management.

Theory and Organizational Issues and Problems

What is theory? Discuss its role in analyzing and diagnosing organization issues and problems.

Functional Analysis

What are the differences between manifest functional consequences and latent dysfunctional consequences? How are these concepts useful in analyzing and diagnosing organizations?

Henri Fayol's Theory of Administration

Henri Fayol developed the beginning of a theory of administration. Review the major concepts from his theory. What are the relationships among the concepts?

Mary Parker Follett on Reducing Conflict

Discuss the differences among dominance, compromise, and integration as approaches to reducing conflict. Mary Parker Follett described these approaches to conflict reduction. Does integration of desires impress you as a feasible approach to conflict reduction?

Mary Parker Follett's View of Leadership

Review the characteristics of leadership described by Follett. Have you ever worked for an individual with those qualities? Discuss why those qualities contribute to effective leadership.

Chester I. Barnard's Concepts

Review Chester I. Barnard's concepts. Discuss the relationships among them. Have you seen these concepts in your experiences with organizations?

The Hawthorne Studies

What important contributions did the Hawthorne Studies make to our understanding of organizations?

Antz (1998)

Z (voiced by Woody Allen), a member of a massive ant colony, leads a largely insignificant life. He pursues Princess Bala (voiced by Sharon Stone) while trying to finds his life role. Z's life goes to unexpected new places because of General Mandible (voiced by Gene Hackman) and a major termite war.

These scenes begin after the opening credits in DVD Chapter 1, “Insignificantz,” Start: 0:00:49. Z says, “All my life I've lived and worked in the big city.” The scenes end as Colonel Cutter (voiced by Christopher Walken) and General Mandible leave for a meeting with the queen (Stop: 0:07:59).

While viewing these scenes, note and assess the type of work, worker relationships, and supervisory behavior. Which concepts discussed in this chapter's “Historical Foundations” section appear in the scenes? Draw specific examples from the scenes to support your observations.

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Office Space (1999)1

This biting satire looks at modern American corporate life through the eyes of three computer programmers. Peter Gibbons (Ron Livingston) is a computer programmer with less than positive feelings about his company, Initech. He and his coworkers develop a way of getting back at the company. This film is director Mike Judge's live-action debut. He is the creator of the television series Beavis and Butthead.2

Office Space features a red Swingline® stapler, a favorite of the character Milton (Stephen Root). At the time of the film's making, Swingline did not manufacture a red stapler. A prop designer custom-painted a stapler for the film, leading to an almost cult-like following for that color. Early in 2002, Swingline introduced its Rio Red stapler3, but only through its Web sites. A defining moment for Milton's relationship with his beloved stapler appears early in the film (DVD Chapter 11, The Red Stapler).

This sequence begins the film following the black title screen, “Twentieth Century Fox Presents” (DVD Chapter 1, “Road Rage,” Start 0:00:25 to DVD Chapter 3, “A Case of the Mondays,” Stop 0:08:11). It starts with a shot of a crowded highway during morning rush hour traffic. It ends after Peggy (Barbara George-Reiss) says, “Uh-oh. Sounds like somebody's got a case of the Mondays.” Peter stares at Samir (Ajay Naidu) and Michael (David Herman). The film cuts to the three programmers having coffee at Chotchkie's. Some R-rated language occurs early in these scenes.

Here are some questions to guide your viewing of these scenes: Does Peter have negative attitudes about working at Initech? Why? How do you characterize his relationship with his supervisor(s)? Is there evidence of Initech functioning as a bureaucracy? Give some examples.

Notes

1. From CHAMPOUX. At the Movies: Human Resource Management, 1E. © 2004 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission. www.cengage.com/permissions

2. Craddock, J., ed. 2009. VideoHound's Golden Movie Retriever. Farmington Hills, MI: Gale, Cengage Learning, p. 735.

3. Fowler, G. A. 2002. Hollywood Ending: Stapler Becomes a Star. Wall Street Journal (2 July): B1, B4.

From CHAMPOUX. At the Movies: Human Resource Management 1E. © 2004 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc. Reproduced by permission. www.cengage.com/permissions

Organizations and Management

Descriptions of organizations and management typically have more complexity in Part II than in Part I. The cooperative aspect of organizations often does not appear in the Part I descriptions, but usually appears in the Part II descriptions. Both descriptions refer to goals that organizations try to reach.

Descriptions of management have more complexity partly because of the different management views described in this chapter’s “Historical Foundations” section. Each writer—from Adam Smith to Peter Drucker—gives you a different management perspective.

Part I descriptions also often characterize organizations negatively as bureaucracies. Perhaps you also were surprised by the positive tone of the description of bureaucracy derived from Max Weber’s work.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise Part 1 Downlaod Exercise Part 2

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 2.

cultural dimensions

From cross-cultural research programs; five dimensions that imply management and organizational differences in different cultures; include power distance, uncertainty avoidance, individualism, masculinity, and long-term orientation.

dimensions of workforce diversity

Factors that lead to variations in the composition of the workforce; include age, gender, ethnicity, race, education, religion, union status, sexual orientation, family status, physical ability, and part-time or full time work.

global environment

The international environment of modern organizations; will become increasingly important in the future.

individualism

From cross-cultural research programs; one of five cultural dimensions that are useful for an initial understanding of cultural differences in management behavior; emphasizes the value placed on individual behavior, acting alone and not as part of a group.

long-term orientation

From cross-cultural research programs; one of five cultural dimensions that are useful for an initial understanding of cultural differences in management behavior; emphasizes the value placed on persistence, status, and thrift.

managerial roles

With employees working in scattered locations (telecommuting), technology acts as a coordinating mechanism more than manager's behavior.

managing diversity

The process of creating an environment that harnesses the potential of all sources of difference within an organization's workforce.

managing for diversity/p>

The process of creating an environment that harnesses the potential of all sources of difference within an organization's workforce; directs it toward organizational goals.

masculinity

From cross-cultural research programs; one of five cultural dimensions that are useful for an initial understanding of cultural differences in management behavior; emphasizes the value placed on decisiveness, assertiveness, independence, and individual achievement.

power distance

From cross-cultural research programs; one of five cultural dimensions that are useful for an initial understanding of cultural differences in management behavior; emphasizes the degree of inequality among people that a culture considers normal.

quality management (QM)

A philosophy and system of management that includes all programs of quality management and continuous quality improvement.

technology

Massive changes in computing power, computer features, and communication technology have revolutionized much of what organizations do now and into the future.

tools and techniques of QM

Tools and techniques that help organizations manage for quality in services, products, and processes; include checksheets, flowcharts, control charts, benchmarking, and quality function deployment.

uncertainty avoidance

From cross-cultural research programs; one of five cultural dimensions that are useful for an initial understanding of cultural differences in management behavior; emphasizes the value placed on predictability, structure, and stability

value diversity

Aggressively embrace diversity; actively try to build a diverse workforce.

workforce diversity

Variations in the composition of the workforce based on personal and background factors of employees or potential employees.

Example

An example of something

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Overview
      1. Dominant issues facing organizations and their management
        1. Work force diversity
        2. Quality management
        3. Technology, organizations, and management
        4. Global environment
      2. Sets a context
        1. for your behavior in an organization and
        2. for managing behavior in an organization
  2. Workforce Diversity
    1. Dimensions of workforce diversity (Textbook Figure 2.1)
      1. Age
      2. Gender
      3. Ethnicity
      4. Race
      5. Eduction
      6. Religion
      7. Union status
      8. Physical ability
      9. Sexual orientation
      10. Family status (single parents, dual-career couples, child care, and elder care responsibilites
      11. Retired people working part time
      12. Other part-time employees
      13. Country of origin
    2. Profile of the workforce
      1. Now
      2. Future
    3. Implications of the profile
      1. Differences in values because of culture and social background
      2. Differences in perceptions (worldview) from culture, social background, language
    4. Is diversity a new issue for U.S. managers?
    5. Forces that have built a diverse workforce
    6. Managing diversity
      1. Definition: Not only ethnicity, race, or gender. Includes all factors that distinguish one person from another in the work force. Includes sexual orientation, single-parents, people who wish to pursue career and family, people with unique needs because of physical disabilities, or the need to care for children and elderly relatives.
      2. Forces us to focus on differences in values, abilities, expectations, limitations, and needs of different people in the work force.
      3. Distinguished from affirmative action. That is a program for attracting people of diverse backgrounds to an organization.
      4. Viewing diversity as a strategic issue. Managers should now start to think strategically about diversity, not view it as required by law (Affirmative Action). Many changes surrounding organizations today and well into the future compel a strategic view of workforce diversity.
        1. Service economy and growing need in all organizations to provide service and know customer expectations
          1. Service organizations
          2. Manufacturing organizations
        2. Global competition for markets and customers. A diverse work force offers important resources to learn about culturally diverse markets.
    7. Challenges to managent
      1. Potential new ideas from diverse people. Tapping the potentialities of that diverse work force.
      2. Managing the potential conflict that can easily happen among diverse people
      3. Managing fairness among diverse members of the work force
      4. Planned organization change to harness the potential of this work force. In the past, managers hoped the diverse work force would adapt to the existing organization and change to fit the organization's culture.
      5. Organization policies and practices. Work schedules, paternal leave, job sharing, and the like.
      6. Training: skills, including languages. Offering basic education that employees lack.
  3. Quality Management
    1. Introduction
      1. What it is
      2. Many names for quality management, but they all point in the same direction
      3. Its major features
    2. Breif history
      1. United States: Shewhart, Deming, Juran
      2. Japan: Ishikawa, Taguchi
      3. Worldwide phenomenon
      4. Quality awards
    3. Elements of its philosphy
    4. Tools and techniques of managing for quality and continuous improvement
    5. Successes and failures
      1. Sucesses
      2. Failures
        1. Florida Power and Light
        2. The Wallace Company
  4. Technology, Organizations, and Management
    1. Computers: size, power, storage, modem, networks, satellite connection
    2. Communication
      1. Internet: commerce, competitors, strategy
      2. Intranet: connecting people quickly
      3. Cellular communication
      4. Satellites
    3. Effects on Organizations and management
      1. Telecommuting
      2. Virtual Organizations
  5. The Global Environment of Organizations
    1. Overview
    2. Transnational Organizations
    3. Cultural differences in space and time orientations
    4. Cultural differences in acceptable management behavior and organizational forms

Chapter Overview

Chapter 2 discusses four issues that likely will affect modern management: workforce diversity, quality management, technology, and the global environment of organizations. These topics receive detailed treatment to give students a full understanding of the issues. They are then woven into other chapters as appropriate.

The chapter describes the global focus demanded of modern managers and presents a way of thinking about cross-cultural differences and similarities. It compares countries by using a figure that shows the location of several countries on Hofstede's uncertainty avoidance and power distance dimensions. This section of Chapter 2 gives some basic knowledge that grounds discussions of cross-cultural issues presented in other parts of the book.


Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Explain workforce diversity.
  • Describe several diversity dimensions.
  • Discuss workforce diversity effects on organizations and management.
  • Describe the direction in which many organizations are headed in managing for quality.
  • Discuss quality management and its history.
  • Explain the likely effects of quality management on an organization.
  • Outline how technological changes will affect modern organizations and their management.
  • List the effects of specific technologies on modern organizations.
  • Discuss some issues and implications of managing organizations in an increasingly global environment.
  • Identify some dimensions of country cultures that distinguish one culture from another.

Personal and Management Implications

An implication of increased workforce diversity is the highly varying worldviews held by people with different backgrounds. These varying perceptions can affect the quality of social interaction in an organization, but also offer big chances for creative problem solving.

An organization with a diverse workforce will have potentially many subcultures defined by the backgrounds of its employees. Employees who share a common language other than English, or a common religion, for example, may form a subculture. Such subcultures can offer support, especially to minority members of the organization or those who have emigrated from another country.

Conflict potential is likely high in an organization with a diverse workforce for many reasons. The subcultures just described can develop different values and norms. The naturally different perspectives of people of diverse backgrounds are also potential sources of interpersonal conflict. Managers have the important task of managing that conflict so it is constructively focused. Properly managed conflict can help provide creative solutions to complex problems (see textbook Chapter 11, “Conflict in Organizations”).

A diverse workforce is a major resource for managers with the insight to harness that diversity to pursue the organization's goals. By deliberately diversifying the membership of problem-solving and decision-making groups, managers can ensure that a group brings many different views to problems. This diversity increases the group's potential for finding innovative solutions. Such groups are a central feature of managing for quality.

Quality management's (QM) emphasis on continuous improvement through process analysis has several implications for both managers and nonmanagers. Cross-functional teams who do process analysis often include members who typically have not interacted with each other in the past. Such teams go through a series of well-understood stages of development and often experience high levels of conflict while looking at a process from many different views. You will find the text's chapters on groups (Chapter 10, “Groups and Intergroup Processes”) and conflict management (Chapter 11) especially useful in understanding the behavioral processes that often unfold in quality-oriented organizations.

Managers who try to shift their organization to a quality and continuous improvement culture must provide strong leadership and help employees adjust to the change. Organizations that have successfully moved toward QM have had managers who could lead the organization through the necessary but wrenching changes. Such change often meets with resistance from those who do not understand the reason for the change or who think QM is only a management fad. Later text chapters will give you insights about organizational culture, leadership, and organization change (Chapter 4, “Organizational Culture,” Chapter 12, “Leadership and Management,” and Chapter 18, “Organizational Change and Development”).

The technological changes present several personal and management implications. E-mail, and other forms of communication over the Internet, will affect human interaction. New organizational forms will emerge, such as virtual teams (see textbook Chapter 10) and virtual organizations (see textbook Chapter 17, “Organizational Design”). You will likely experience working with people in scattered locations, interacting only electronically. Managers will need to adjust in the future to managing teams of widely scattered people.

The global environment of modern organizations is another source of diversity. If you work in a globally based organization, you may be assigned to different countries, serve customers from diverse cultures, or have coworkers from different countries. The effects of global diversity are similar to those of domestic workforce diversity. Interpersonal interactions can become strained by the need to talk in multiple languages or listen to English spoken with many different accents. Conflict potential will also be high because of the diverse backgrounds and viewpoints of people from many cultures. Managers will face the especially strong challenge of managing workgroups with high conflict potential.


Chapter Summary

This chapter introduced you to four topics that are at the center of managing modern organizations: workforce diversity, quality management, technology, and the global environment of organizations.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics' projections show the workforce becoming increasingly diverse. A diverse workforce presents managers with major opportunities to harness diverse talents in the pursuit of organizational goals. That same diverse workforce presents managers with the challenge of managing conflict that can come from diversity in a functional way.

Quality management (QM) is a system of management built upon work dating to the 1920s. QM has its roots in manufacturing, but it can help bring major improvements to any organization. It applies to managing all types of organizations and their internal processes. Those with QM training have a strong customer focus and a passion for continuous improvement in meeting customer wants and needs.

Massive changes in computing power and computer features, combined with communication technology, have revolutionized much of what organizations and managers now do and will continue to do into the future. People in organizations often interact using computer and Internet technology. The combined effects of all technologies have changed managers' roles and the design of many organizations.

Modern technology and increasingly freer trade areas demand an unprecedented international view from modern managers. Organizations that want to expand their markets and profitability require managers with a global view. Managers can now regard the entire world as a source of labor, materials, customers, and places of production. Such a global view implies the need to understand different cultures, different views, and different ways of doing an organization's work.

Future U.S. Workforce Composition

Discuss the predicted future changes in the composition of the U.S. workforce. Compare that workforce profile to your work experiences. What issues have you faced or will you face in a highly diverse organization?

Workforce Diversity and Affirmative Action

Workforce diversity has its roots in affirmative action and equal employment opportunity (EEO). Discuss whether managing for diversity is the same as those programs. Does managing for diversity require a different view of people with varying characteristics and backgrounds?

Quality Management

Discuss the major features of quality management. How does it differ from an inspection-based, quality control system? What values does quality management ask all employees of an organization to accept?

Quality Management and Organizational Change

Moving to quality management is a major organizational change for most organizations. Discuss some factors that could impede such a move. Would organizations that do not move to quality management suffer competitively in the global marketplace?

Technological Changes

Reflect on the technological changes discussed earlier. Discuss the specific technological changes that will affect you in your work role.

Global Orientation of Managers

Discuss the issues that a global orientation raises for managers. Are those issues problems or opportunities for modern managers? How do you expect those issues to affect you in your work career?

Global View of Markets

Reflect on the types of businesses that are prominent in your area. Would any of them benefit from having a global view of their markets? Is it realistic for managers in those companies to look beyond domestic borders to find opportunities elsewhere?

TAKE FIVE: OB ALIVE: THE SECOND BEST EXOTIC MARIGOLD HOTEL(2015)

These scenes highlight some aspects of India’s culture. They are primarily physical aspects such as the music, dancing, and clothing. Men are wearing typical Western attire; women, in contrast, are wearing more traditional attire.

Diversity Dimensions: An Assessment of Your Workplace

Two factors can affect the distribution of percentages for each diversity dimension. Regional factors such as the racial distribution in your workplace’s region of your country can affect the distributions. Other regional differences can affect age and work status if there is a large retired population that has chosen to return to work. Family status also can have regional effects if local cultural values support marriage instead of people living with a partner. You can compare your assessment to what you observe for each dimension in your workplace’s region of your country.

Company policies and its philosophy about workforce diversity also can affect the pattern among the dimensions. If your company has historically hired people of a certain gender, race, or age for specific types of jobs, the results of your assessment should show that pattern. If your company has not tried to help people with varying physical abilities, then this diversity dimension should show little variation.

Assessments done in companies that value diversity, and actively try to increase its workforce diversity, should show the results of those policy emphases. Check your assessment to see whether it shows the effects of recent efforts or shows overall effects of a broad effort of valuing diversity.

Your instructor might emphasize diversity dimensions other than those discussed here. Examples of such dimensions include cultural heritage or cultural origin, religion, and sexual orientation. These diversity dimensions typically generate wide-ranging discussion and opinion differences about recognizing them as a basis of diversity.

Did you note any aspects of conflict that could follow from the diversity dimensions that charac¬terize your workplace? Increased diversity in an organization typically increases conflict potential.

Organizations vary widely in whether they offer diversity training to their employees. If you have had such training, you could have more positive feelings about participating in a diverse workforce. You also should have learned how to constructively manage the conflict that can occur because of differences in worldviews.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 3.

act utilitarianism

Form of utilitarianism that asks a person to assess the effects of all actions according to their greatest net benefit to all affected

Convention on Combating Bribery of Foreign Public Officials in International Business Transactions (OECD Convention)

Twenty-nine members and five nonmembers of the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development signed an ethics treaty. The treaty has strong sanctions for bribery. The signatories represented economies in the major world regions.

Conventional

One of three stages of moral development in the ethic of justice theory; attributed mainly to men; characterizes most adolescents and adults. Features a growing awareness of the expectations important to other people and the internalization of the moral norms of the person's group or society.

cultural relativism

An approach to international ethics that considers differences in ethical values among cultures and takes a normative ethical view based on the premise that each society's predominant ethical values decide what is right and wrong.

difference principle

Societies will have inequalities, but must help the disadvantaged (sick, disabled, etc.).

egoism

Ethical system that has two forms: individual (individuals judge their actions only by the effects on their own interests) and universal (individuals include others' interests when assessing the effects of their actions).

ethic of care

A theory of stages of moral development of individuals; attributed mainly to women. Three stages of moral development: self-focused (concerned with survival); focus on others (considers feelings, emotions, and situation); reflective understanding of caring for others (focus on others but has a balanced view of self in moral decisions).

ethic of justice

A theory of stages of moral development of individuals; attributed mainly to men. Three stages of moral development: preconventional (self-centered, obeys rules to avoid punishment); conventional (growing social awareness and less focused on self-interest); principled (behavior guided by freely chosen moral principles).

ethical absolutism

Holds that an ethical system applies to all people, everywhere, and always; based on an authority such as a religion, custom, or written code.

ethical behavior

Behavior judged as good, just, right, and honorable based on principles, rules, or guides from a specific ethics theory, character traits, or social values; may vary from person to person or country to country.

ethical realism

Holds that morality does not apply to international activities, behavior, and transactions.

ethical relativism

Holds that ethical behavior is based on personal feelings or opinions and is whatever a person or society says is ethical; rejects the view that moral judgments have objective validity.

focus on others

One of three stages of moral development in the ethic of care theory; attributed mainly to women. Consider actions moral that take into account other people involved in the situation; focus on feelings, emotions, and the unique qualities of the situation in which the act happens.

focus on self

One of three stages of moral development in the ethic of care theory; attributed mainly to women. Features a strong focus on self with the intent of ensuring survival; women often engage in self-criticism for being selfish.

Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA)

A U.S. statute enacted in 1977 that prohibits a company from using bribes to get business in another country or prevent the restriction of its business; allows small payments that are part of the ordinary course of doing business in another country.

individual ethical egoist

Judges a person's actions based only on their effects on self-interests. Because this form of egoism never considers other people's interests, moral philosophers usually reject it as a defensible basis of ethics.

“It's good business”

The assumption that doing business ethically is beneficial for organizations, especially in the long term.

justice

An approach to ethics that uses a comparative process that looks at the balance of benefits and burdens that are distributed among group members or that result from applying laws, rules, and policies.

legal right

A person's just claims or entitlements defined by the legal system.

managing for ethical behavior

Involves three steps: understanding the present culture of the organization, acting to improve that culture, and sustaining ethical behavior so it becomes embedded in the organization.

moral right

A person's just claims or entitlements that exist because of ethical standards.

negative rights

A person's duty not to interfere with another person's rights.

objectively ethical

A person acts according to a rule or law.

positive rights

A person's duty to help others freely pursue an interest to which they have a right.

preconventional

One of three stages of moral development in the ethic of justice theory; attributed mainly to men. In the early period of this stage, the person is self-centered, does not consider anyone else's viewpoint, and obeys rules because they are backed by authority. In the later period of this stage, the person becomes aware of the interests of others and the conflicts that arise among multiple interests.

principle of equal liberty

Each person's basic liberties must equal those of others. Those liberties must also be protected from attack by others.

principle of fair equality of opportunity

Everyone must have the same chance to gain the best positions offered by society.

principled

One of three stages of moral development in the ethic of justice theory; attributed mainly to men. Features the development of moral principles that guide the behavior of those who reach this stage.

reflective understanding of caring for others

One of three stages of moral development in the ethic of care theory; attributed mainly to women. Features a strong focus on caring for others as the basis of moral action and a balanced view of the self in moral decisions.

rights

A person's just claims or entitlements; can be legal (defined by the legal system) or moral (universal rights that exist because of ethical standards).

rule utilitarianism

Form of utilitarianism in which a person assesses actions according to a set of rules designed to yield the greatest net benefit to all affected.

stages of moral development

Stages in which people shift from an individual understanding of morality to a societal one and then to a universal view. Some persons do not progress through all three stages, and the stages may differ for men and women.

subjectively ethical

A person believes he or she acted ethically.

theory of distributive justice

Theory proposed by John Rawls that is based on three principles: equal liberty for all persons, difference (society should care for its most needy while using its resources as efficiently as possible), and fair equality and opportunity for all.

unethical behavior

Behavior judged as wrong, unjust, dishonorable, or failing to meet an obligation.

universal ethical egoism

Universal ethical egoism, although controversial, can include the interests of others when assessing one's actions. Asks a person to weigh the effects of his or her actions on his or her interests with the assessment based on pursuing pleasure and avoiding pain.

utilitarianism

An approach to ethics that asks people to examine the effects of an action to decide whether its total net benefits exceed the total net benefits of any other action.

Chapter Outline

Introduction

  1. Contemporary ethical issues according to the business press. U.S., Europe, Japan
  2. Attitudes, opinions, and values about ethical behavior in organizations
    1. Managers in business and government
    2. Gallup's annual honesty and ethics polls. General public's view of business executives and many other occupations. Wording of interview questions. Trend over many years

Ethical and Unethical Behavior

  1. Ethical behavior
  2. Unethical behavior
  3. Subjective and objective morality

“It's Good Business”
Ethical Issues in Organizational Behavior
Ethics: The Study of Moral Philosophy

  1. Centuries of examining the basic question of how people should live their lives
  2. Some specific questions
  3. Some of the essence of ethics and moral philosophy is its reflective quality — sitting back and looking at the ways things are customarily done and asking what is the way they ought to be done. Socrates' question: “What we are talking about is how one should live” (as reported by Plato)
  4. Ethical absolutism and ethical relativism. Only you can decide

Ethical Values of Societies and Individuals

  1. Ethical values of societies
    1. Variations and similarities among societies
    2. Functions of societal ethical values
    3. Dynamics of societal ethical values
  2. Ethical values of individuals
    1. Built from societal-level values
    2. Learned from family, including religious training, peers, education, and life experiences
    3. Dynamics of individual ethical values
    4. Levels of moral judgment

Ethics Theories

  1. Introduction. Describes each theory, its expected results, and objections to the theory
  2. Theories
    1. Utilitarianism
    2. Rights
    3. Justice
    4. Egoism

Managing for Ethical Behavior

  1. Want to change an organization's culture organization. Decisions not made by organizations. They are made by people in them, who are guided by their personal ethical values and their perception of the organization culture's ethical values about such matters
  2. Codes of ethics
  3. Policies. Based upon the ethics theories described earlier. Specify what the organization wants included in decision-making processes. Increasing the information used to include information tied to the ethical implications of the decision
    1. Employees' right of dissent (whistle blowing)
    2. Guidelines for employee privacy
    3. Environmental effects
  4. Procedures. Both information and members of decision-making groups
  5. Standards of ethical performance
  6. Ethics training and education
  7. Reinforcing ethical behavior. Rewards, motivation, standards of behavior
  8. Peer reporting (whistle blowing)

International Aspects of Ethics

  1. Interest in ethics in different countries
  2. Legal views
    1. Convention on Combating Bribery of Foreign Public Officials in International Business Transactions (OECD)
    2. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA)
  3. Ethical views
    1. Cultural relativism
    2. Ethical realism

Chapter Overview

Chapter 3 is a detailed treatment of ethics and behavior in organizations. The early placement of this chapter emphasizes the importance of ethical behavior and lets other chapters consider ethical issues. It discusses the value of behaving ethically in organizational transactions. The chapter then describes the development of ethical systems at the societal and individual level. This chapter presents four major Western ethics theories: utilitarianism, rights, justice, and egoism. Each theory gives a different view of ethical behavior and allows analysis of ethical behavior in organizations. The chapter has a major section devoted to managing for ethical behavior in an organization. Each chapter after Chapter 3 has a separate section that discusses the ethical implications of the chapter's topics.

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Define ethical and unethical behavior.
  • Discuss why some scholars believe “It's good business”to do business ethically.
  • Know the functions of ethical values and standards for individuals and societies.
  • Describe the various ethics theories and the guidelines each offers.
  • Explain how to manage for ethical behavior in an organization.
  • Identify some international aspects of ethical behavior in organizations.

Personal and Management Implications

An overarching implication of this chapter for managers and nonmanagers is the need to understand your system of ethics. Pause and reflect on what you now know about ethics and the implications for your behavior in organizations. For managers, the implications focus on including ethical considerations in decision-making processes. For nonmanagers, the implications focus on potential clashes between one's ethics, one's manager's ethics, and the ethics of the organization's culture.

Consider how you would respond to a request from your employer for you to behave unethically. If your ethical system differs from your supervisor's, you will experience high conflict. Also, if your organization does not have an ethically based culture, you can expect ethical clashes. Such conflicts can expose you to significant stress, especially if your organization does not have procedures for handling ethical disputes.

Managing for ethical behavior in organizations carries implications for both managers and nonmanagers. For managers, the implications center on assuring that employees within their areas of responsibility behave ethically. That job is easier if the organization has an ethically based culture, procedures to ensure ethical decisions, and policies that encourage whistle blowing. If the organization has none of these features, managers must assume responsibility for their subordinates' ethical behavior. Without organization-level help, managers need to develop their own procedures for managing toward ethical behavior.

The personal implications of the discussion about managing for ethical behavior include peer pressure for ethical behavior and reporting unethical behavior. You could feel peer pressure to behave ethically or unethically. In the latter case, you will experience high internal conflict between your ethical values and those held by your peers. Pressure to behave ethically can create conflicts for you if your personal values do not support doing so.

Reporting unethical behavior will be easier for you if your employing organization supports such reporting as described earlier in the chapter. You will feel high social pressure from your peers to avoid reporting (whistle blowing) if your workgroup's norms do not support reporting. That pressure will add to any other ethical conflicts you experience, but can be especially intense because you are in daily contact with your peers.

These implications become more intense for people working in a multinational organization outside their home country. The ethical conflicts you face in that situation may often be intensified by large differences between your ethical system and that of the host country.


Chapter Summary

Ethical behavior is behavior judged as good, right, just, honorable, and praiseworthy. Unethical behavior is behavior judged as wrong, dishonorable, or failing to meet an obligation. The judgment of behavior as ethical or unethical is based on principles, rules, or guides that come from an ethics theory, character traits, or social values. Some ethics scholars have argued that doing business ethically is simply good business.

The four ethics theories that can act as guides to ethical behavior are utilitarianism, rights, justice, and egoism. Utilitarianism asks a person to examine the effects of his actions to decide whether these actions are morally correct under utilitarian guidelines. An action is morally right if its total net benefit exceeds the total net benefit of any other action. A right is a person's just claim or entitlement. The right can focus on what that person does or on the action of other people toward him. Justice-based ethics theories use a comparative process, which looks at the balance of benefits and burdens among members of a group or resulting from the application of laws, rules, and policies. Egoism focuses on a person's self-interests, but can also include the interests of others.

Modern managers are feeling increasing pressure to promote ethical behavior in their organizations, causing them to look for ways of managing for ethical behavior. Managers can follow three steps to manage for ethical behavior in their organizations:

  1. Understand the composition of the present ethical culture of their organizations.
  2. Improve that ethical culture.
  3. Sustain ethical behavior so that it becomes embedded in their organizations.

The section on “International Aspects of Ethics” described some legal views, including the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA) and its implications for managers of multinational organizations. Besides the legal views, ethical views exist, such as cultural relativism and ethical realism.

Ethical Issues in Organizational Behavior

Review the discussion of ethical issues in organizational behavior. Discuss the areas of organizational behavior in which ethical issues have occurred in your work experiences.

Ethics Theories

Review the ethics theories described in the chapter. What are the implications for managing behavior in an organization of people with different ethical systems?

“It's Good Business”

Discuss the implications of the argument that behaving ethically makes good business sense. How common is that view in contemporary organizations? Reflect on your work experience. Are there instances of ethical behavior having the positive effects noted in the chapter?

Ethical Absolutism and Ethical Relativism

Review the discussion about ethical absolutism and ethical relativism. Discuss the views of each position. Which position applies to modern ethical issues?

Ethical Values of Individuals and Societies

Review the sections describing ethical values of individuals and societies. Discuss the ways both societies and individuals form those values. Which view best fits your moral development?

Managing for Ethical Behavior

The chapter had an extended discussion about managing for ethical behavior in organizations. Discuss the implications of managing for ethical behavior. What effects do you expect for yourself in the future?

Ethics and Multinational Organizations

The chapter discussed two ethical views that apply to international affairs and multinational organizations. Which of those views do you hold? What are the implications of the different views for behavior in a multinational organization?

Prime (2005)

Rafi (Rafael) Gardet (Uma Thurman) tries to bounce back from a nasty divorce by seeking the help of her therapist, Dr. Lisa Metzger (Meryl Streep). Young aspiring painter David Bloomberg (Bryan Greenberg) enters her life, leading to a fast developing romantic and intimate relationship. Rafi's therapy sessions include detailed descriptions of her relationship with David. Unknown to Rafi, David is Metzger's only son.

This scene begins DVD Chapter 13, “Need to Talk.” Rafi's voiceover says, “I was married to a man who couldn't love me.” The scene ends after Metzger says, “Up until a few weeks ago, I didn't even think my son had a penis.” She sighs. The film cuts to Rafi and David discussing these incidents.

Assess the ethical implications of Lisa Metzger's justification for her behavior. Do those reasons change the ethical or unethical quality of her behavior? Why or why not? This chapter described four ethics theories. What does each ethics theory reveal about the behavior?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Grumpier Old Men (1995)

This sequel to Grumpy Old Men (1993) features the same two grumps: Max Goldman (Walter Matthau) and John Gustafson (Jack Lemmon). It is a light-hearted comedy showing the lifelong relationship of two next-door neighbors. They constantly argue and insult each other but are actually good friends, especially when fishing. Their lifelong goal: catch the biggest, most elusive catfish in the lake, Catfish Hunter.

These scenes start with an outside shot of John's house (DVD Chapter 26, “Something Fishy”). They follow Max's marriage proposal to Maria (Sophia Loren). Everyone is preparing for the wedding. The scenes end on the lake as Max realizes he and John are late for the wedding. Max races the boat to shore and they drive to the church. Max sings a verse from “Get Me to the Church on Time” (Stop DVD Chapter 27, “Where He Belongs,” 1:30:15).

Here are some questions to consider while viewing the scenes: Do they behave ethically or unethically? Do Max and John face ethical dilemmas? How many? What ethical theories (guidelines) do they use to decide a course of action?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resources, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc. Reproduced by permission. www.cengage.com/permissions

Ethics and Ethical Dilemmas

The following describes typical responses of people who have completed this eExercise. Compare your responses to each scenario.

Scenario 1: Whistle Blowing  The typical responses to turning in Aunt Emma range widely. Some people who complete this exercise emphatically say they would turn her in to store management. Others say they would talk to her first, because she is the person’s aunt. These people continue with the observation that they hope Aunt Emma would stop stealing without any further activity by the observer. Occasionally, a person will say that because she is Aunt Emma, the observer would ignore her behavior.

Scenario 2: Your Neighbor’s New Hair Style  The “Your Neighbor’s New Hair Style” scenario sparks lively observations by those who complete the exercise. Most people do not want to comment or will simply lie about their true feelings. This scenario is a common social event that many people do not value as highly important. Some observers note that if the neighbor were a close friend, they likely would find a tactful way of noting Cheryl’s hairstyle.

Scenario 3: Music Sharing over the Internet  The music-sharing scenario is a controversial one, because of the discussion about its legality and efforts by some music companies to stop Internet music sharing. This exercise scenario results in large amounts of rationalization or justification for sharing. Some observers note that because music CDs are so expensive, the companies deserve to lose some money. Others say that they do not like all the other music pieces in a compilation and only want to have a single piece of music. Rarely does an observer note that he will not share the music on the Internet because it is equal to theft. As more legal and widely accepted methods of Internet music sharing grow in use, the importance of this ethical dilemma will likely subside.

Scenario 4: Finding Money in a Parking Lot  The exercise deliberately presented you with a sharp difference between the two situations. Those who complete the exercise are typically about equally divided between leaving the $1 bill on the ground and taking it. One dollar does not loom as important in most people’s minds nor do they have any ethical questions or dilemmas.
Finding $10,000 in a wallet with identification typically results in trying to find the owner of the wallet. Some observers will turn it in to a lost and found department at the shopping center. Others prefer to locate the owner themselves. Almost no one chooses to keep the money.
Think about the two situations. Is there a difference? In both situations, the money belongs to someone other than you.

Scenario 5: Parking Your Grandmother’s Car in a Handicapped Parking Space  Most people who complete this scenario say they would not park in a handicapped parking space. They have seen such behavior before and do not like it. They feel it is wrong (unethical) to behave in that way. Others justify their use of the handicapped parking space by noting that other people always do it.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 4.

action symbols

Behaviors that have meaning beyond the obvious aspects of the behavior. For example, all managers dine together, but the female managers eat separately from the males, sending the added message of not valuing diversity.

adaptability

One of four organizational culture traits that the traits theory of organizational culture and organizational performance links to organizational performance; organization's capability to respond to external changes with internal changes.

artifacts

The most visible level of organizational culture; e.g., architecture, layout of interior space, and formality of working relationships.

basic assumptions

The least visible level of organizational culture; e.g., beliefs about behavior that develop over time and guide decision making without being consciously articulated.

changing organizational culture

Involves breaking from some features of the old culture and creating new features.

competitive advantage theory of organizational culture and organizational performance

A theory of organizational culture and organizational performance; emphasizes the value, rarity, and lack of ease of imitation of a culture as giving it a competitive advantage.

Consistency

One of four organizational culture traits that the traits theory of organizational culture and organizational performance links to organizational performance; degree of agreement among organization members about important values and basic assumptions.

creating organizational culture

Involves a deliberate effort to build a specific type of organizational culture.

cultural symbolism

A system of symbols that have meaning only to an organization's members and reflect its culture; can include action, verbal, and material symbols.

diagnosing organizational culture

Studying an organization's culture in order to understand it; can be done as an outsider before joining an organization or as an insider.

differentiation perspective

Focuses on the various subcultures dispersed throughout an organization's culture.

dimensions of organizational culture

Ways of examining and understanding an organization's culture; includes the levels, pervasiveness, implicitness, imprinting, political, plurality, and interdependency dimensions.

dysfunctions of organizational culture

Potential negative consequences of an organization's culture; include communication failures, conflict from differing views, resistance to change, and difficulties of merging incompatible cultures.

environment-culture congruence

A theory of organizational culture and organizational performance; explains the culture-performance link by noting the agreement between an organization's culture and its environmental characteristics. For example, high-ambiguity environments require cohesive organization cultures for best organizational performance.

espoused values

The values that an organization claims to follow.

fragmentation perspective

The perspective on organizational culture that focuses on the ambiguity present in organizations.

functions of organizational culture

Positive roles of an organization's culture; e.g., defining rewards and sanctions, defining group boundaries, and developing a consensus about the organization's mission, goals, and means of reaching those goals.

Implicitness

A dimension of organizational culture; refers to how veteran employees often take the core values of the organization's culture for granted and unconsciously behave according to those values.

Imprinting

A dimension of organizational culture; suggests organizational cultures often have deep roots in an organization's history. Also suggests the strong effects organizational cultures can have on members.

integration perspective

The perspective on organizational culture that emphasizes the consensus on values and basic assumptions among an organization's members and consistency in its artifacts and in the actions of its members.

Interdependency

A dimension of organizational culture; suggests interconnections within an organization's culture and ways cultures relate to other parts of an organization.

in-use values

The values that actually guide the behavior of organization members as opposed to the “espoused values” that the organization claims to follow.

Involvement

One of four organizational culture traits that the traits theory of organizational culture and organizational performance links to organizational performance; degree of employee participation in organizational decisions.

Levels

A dimension of organizational culture; describes organizational culture as having different degrees of visibility.

levels of organizational culture

Consist of three aspects that vary in their visibility to an outsider: artifacts, values, and basic assumptions.

maintaining organizational culture

Involves keeping the good part of an organization's culture while helping the organization adapt to new challenges.

material symbols

Found in the physical features of an organization's culture, including architecture, interior decor, and types of clothing.

Mission

One of four organizational culture traits that the traits theory of organizational culture and organizational performance links to organizational performance; core purposes of the organization that keep members focused on what is important to the organization.

not easily imitated

One of three qualities of an organization's culture in the competitive advantage theory of organizational culture and organizational performance; hard for competitors to change their cultures to get the same advantages.

organizational culture

The shared values, standards, customs, rituals, and norms in an organization; what a new employee needs to learn to be accepted as a member of the organization.

organizational culture and organizational performance

A dimension of organizational culture; views culture as widely dispersed in an organization.

Pervasiveness

A dimension of organizational culture; views culture as widely dispersed in an organization.

Plurality

A dimension of organizational culture; emphasizes the existence of subcultures in most organizational cultures.

Political

A dimension of organizational culture; sees culture as connected to systems of power in an organization.

Rarity

One of three qualities of an organization's culture in the competitive advantage theory of organizational culture and organizational performance; features of a culture that are not common among competing organizations.

Subcultures

Smaller, distinct cultures within an organization's culture.

traits theory of organizational culture and organizational performance

Emphasizes the role of four traits in the link between organizational culture and organizational performance; include involvement, consistency, adaptability, and mission.

Value

One of three qualities of an organization's culture in the competitive advantage theory of organizational culture and organizational performance; derives from the guidance the culture gives to direct people's behavior toward higher performance.

Values

The level of organizational culture that has medium visibility; e.g., rules that guide behavior in an organization.

verbal symbols

Stories, slogans, sagas, legends, and jargon that both distinguish people in a culture and carry special meaning for them.

Chapter Outline

Introduction

  1. Definition and description of organizational culture
  2. Subcultures within the same organization
    1. Decentralized organizations, different locations, different subcultures
    2. Occupational cultures: managerial, engineering, and financial
    3. Effect of workforce diversity
    4. Effect of global operations

Dimensions of Organizational Culture

  1. Levels
  2. Pervasiveness
  3. Implicitness
  4. Imprinting
  5. Political
  6. Plurality
  7. Interdependency

Levels of Organizational Culture

  1. Artifacts
  2. Values
    1. Espoused values
    2. In-use values
  3. Basic assumptions

Perspectives on Organizational Culture

  1. Integration perspective
  2. Differentiation perspective
  3. Fragmentation perspective

Cultural Symbolism

  1. View organizational culture as having symbols with meaning only for those who are members of the culture. That meaning can be shared widely or narrowly, or have varying meaning depending on the observer. This view of organizational culture looks at artifacts as described earlier, but also includes anything within the culture that has symbolic meaning to its members. Emphasizes the emotional element of many cultural objects and phenomena
  2. Characteristics of symbols. Represent something more than the symbol alone. Can capture emotional, cognitive, ethical, and aesthetic meanings. Symbols efficiently summarize those meanings to organization members. They have the important cultural function of bringing order to otherwise complex events and processes, especially those that are repeated
  3. Symbols fall into these categories: action symbols, verbal symbols, and material symbols. Action symbols are sets of behaviors that have meaning beyond the obvious aspects of the behavior. For example, all managers dine together but the female managers eat separately from the males, sending the added message of not valuing diversity. Verbal symbols refer to stories, slogans, sagas, legends, and jargon that both distinguish people in a culture and carry special meanings for them. Material symbols are found in the physical features of an organization's culture. They include architecture, interior decor, and types of clothing
  4. Symbols vary in complexity.
  5. Viewing symbols from the three perspectives
    1. Integration perspective
    2. Differentiation perspective
    3. Fragmentation perspective

Functions of Organizational Culture

  1. Consensus about organization's mission
  2. Present consistent external image
  3. Agree about performance measurement and corrective actions
  4. Define rewards and sanctions
  5. Integrate subsystems and processes
  6. Define rules of power and social status
  7. Develop and communicate the organization's ideology

Dysfunctions of Organizational Culture

  1. Constrain strategy change
  2. Constrain diversification, acquisitions, and mergers
  3. Restrict new technology introduction
  4. Negative interactions among subculture members
  5. Communication failures between members of different subcultures

Diagnosing Organizational Culture

  1. As an outsider
  2. As an insider

Organizational Culture and Organization Performance

  1. Some theories of organizational culture and organization performance
    1. Three conditions for culture to give an organization a strategic advantage
    2. Environment–culture congruence: variations in organizational environments
    3. Culture traits and performance: involvement, consistency, adaptability, mission
  2. Growing empirical support for a link between organizational culture and performance

Creating, Maintaining, and Changing Organizational Culture

  1. Creating organizational culture
    1. Deliberate effort to build a specific type of organizational cultur
    2. Happens when an entrepreneur forms an organization to pursue a vision or when managers of an existing organization form a new operating unit. Refer to the person who forms the new organization or unit as the founder
    3. The new culture needs a core ideology that is understandable, convincing, and talked about widely in the new organization. The core ideology is a key way that organization members develop commitment to the founder's vision
    4. Recruit and select people who already share in key parts of the ideology or who can easily develop commitment to it. Formal socialization practices play key roles in building an identity with the ideology. It is more difficult the greater the distance between the individual's values on entry and the values and beliefs of the ideology
    5. Recognize that subcultures are likely to form around demographic patterns, occupations, and technical specializations. Those subcultures also affect the socialization of new recruits. Anticipate both the manifest functions and latent dysfunctions of the likely subcultures
    6. Build cultural symbols that are fully consistent with the ideology
    7. The environment can shift in ways that present management with problems and opportunities not anticipated at the time of founding. Management will need some strong attachment to flexibility to manage its evolving organizational culture
    8. Leadership plays a key role in developing the new organization's culture
    9. Founder also should plan for leader succession if she wants the culture to continue into the future
  2. Maintaining organizational culture
    1. Not a passive management response. Requires managers to have an awareness of what organizational culture is and how it manifests itself in their organization. Requires knowing the existing organizational cultur
    2. Role of culture diagnosis
    3. A management dilemma: (a) holding to the values you believe are right for the organization because they have proved successful in the past and (b) questioning whether those values are right for the environment the organization now faces
    4. The goal is to maintain commitment of the members of the organization to its key parts, which includes strengthening key values
    5. Hold to the good parts of the organization's culture but help the organization adapt to its newest challenges
    6. Actively look for and fix cultural contradictions. Those contradictions appear in the form of differences between espoused values and actual behavior. They also appear in the form of cultural symbols that are inconsistent with expressed values
    7. Training programs, socialization processes, new organization practices. Comparing the introduction of new practices to the organization's ideology
    8. Continuity and reexamination of socialization
  3. Changing organizational culture
    1. Break from some features of the old culture and create new features. Size and depth of the change will vary
    2. Long-term, planned change; taking many years to reach the new culture state (more in Chapter 18, “Organizational Change and Development”)
    3. Managing the change process
      1. Building on moments that look right for culture change or clearly demand it; often the first is based on poor past performance with clear threats to the organization's viability. The second can come from the need to pursue favorable new markets that require changes in the organization's culture
      2. Managers should not assume that everyone in the organization will share their view of the need to change
      3. The change effort can focus on many pieces of the organization's culture, such as ideology, values, and symbols. Know your roots and keep some continuity with the past that is valued widely in the organization. Example: the value of continuous improvement in an organization like the FBI, which has a culture emphasizing itself as the premier law enforcement agency in the world. Also, good management of change lets managers say what will not change as a way of offering familiarity and security to veteran employees. Can help reduce resistance to proposed changes
      4. Recognize that it is not realistic to believe you can remove all aspects of an older culture
      5. Managers will need to move forward with confidence, persistence, and optimism about the new culture

International Aspects of Organizational Culture

  1. Multinational organizations operate in many countries and face varying local cultures. Those local cultures can shape the subcultures of globally dispersed units which are shaped by national culture, local business norms, and needs of local customers
  2. Disagreement about whether culture bound or culture free. A major issue faced by managers of multinational organizations is the set of values they want their globally dispersed operations to have. Do they want the values of the home country to be dominant or do they want to adopt those of the local national culture? Organizations that want their international units to hold values of the home country place managers from the home country or socialize locally hired people. This has been the practice of Hewlett-Packard for its worldwide operations so that managers, no matter what their national origin and no matter the country in which they work, will know the “HP Way”
  3. Effects on people from different cultures working for multinational organizations. Organization determinism versus national determinism
  4. Cultural synergy. Related, at the international level, to the valuing diversity philosophy described in Chapter 2, “The Context of Modern Organizations.” Contrast with more parochial or ethnocentric views

Ethical Issues in Organizational Culture

  1. Manipulation or exploitation of human beings through changes in an organization's culture or the creation of a new organization and its culture. Usually no disagreement that organizational culture affects human behavior. The issue pivots on what is the moral action that management can take. Different views from utilitarianism and rights ethics theories
  2. Managing and changing organizational cultures must be a visible process following clear ethical rules
  3. Diagnosing organizational cultures: the ethics of doing such research
  4. The moral dimension of organizational culture; focuses on the questions of whether individuals are forced to subordinate their personal values to those of their organization's culture

Chapter Overview

Chapter 4 describes organizational culture. It is included in Part 1 because of its close connection with the emerging issues described in Chapter 2 and the emphasis on ethical values in Chapter 3. Together, the issues covered in Part 1 form the context of modern organizational behavior and management.

The chapter describes the major parts of organizational culture, ways to understand it, and its functions and dysfunctions. Readers also learn how to diagnose an organization's culture. Current examples drawn from press reports show the importance of culture in modern organizations.

The chapter shows how an organization's socialization process helps maintain an organization's culture and the implications organizational culture has for a person considering an organization for employment. Chapter 6 fully treats organizational socialization, which this chapter briefly introduces.

Chapter 4 includes sections that discuss the international and ethical issues surrounding the chapter's content. This feature continues in all other chapters of the book.

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Discuss the concept of organizational culture.
  • Understand organizational culture effects on you as an individual.
  • Distinguish different dimensions of organizational culture.
  • Describe the different levels at which we experience an organization's culture.
  • Analyze organizational culture from three perspectives.
  • Understand cultural symbolism.
  • Discuss the functions and dysfunctions of organizational culture.
  • Diagnose an organization's culture.
  • Describe the relationship between organizational culture and organizational performance.
  • Explain the issues involved in creating, maintaining, and changing organizational culture.
  • Appreciate some international and ethical issues raised by organizational cultures.

Personal and Management Implications

Organizational cultures often have multiple sets of values among their subcultures. Those values can be contradictory, unclear, and ambiguous. Such features of cultures imply that you may encounter difficulties in your socialization to a new culture as a new employee. For managers, those features imply difficulty in doing a clear and unambiguous diagnosis to understand and manage culture.

As a veteran member of an organization, you should be alert to certain pitfalls when doing a culture diagnosis of your employing organization1. Objectivity in the diagnosis is important but hard to get when you have been involved in an organization's culture for many years. The emphasis of a culture and its values and basic assumptions are subtle and not easy to see. You will need to exert some effort to reveal the content of the culture and what it does for your organization.

Managing an organization's culture requires you to first discover the basic assumptions underlying the culture through a diagnosis, as suggested earlier. Identifying the symbols of the culture and communicating them to new employees are important elements of managing a culture. Veteran organization members can have difficulty here because some symbols simply are not obvious to them.

Managers of modern organizations will feel increasing pressure to include a moral dimension in their organizational cultures. This will include developing a code of ethics, talking about that code, and prominently displaying it throughout the organization. It will be more difficult for managers to change their existing organizational cultures to make that moral dimension part of the cultural fabric. Nonmanagement employees will also feel this pressure. One key implication for all of us is the growing emphasis on employees' rights to speak out freely in their organizations. That right includes “blowing the whistle” on any unethical behavior they see.2

Notes

1. Deal, T. E., and A. A. Kennedy. 1982. Corporate Cultures: The Rites and Rituals of Corporate Life. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley. pp. 133–35.
2. Ewing, D. W. 1978. Civil Liberties in the Corporation. New York State Bar Journal 50: 188–229; Near, J. P., and M. P. Miceli. 1996. Whistle-Blowing: Myth and Reality. Journal of Management 22: 507–26.


Chapter Summary

Organizational cultures include the values, norms, rites, rituals, symbols, ceremonies, heroes, and scoundrels in the history of the organization. Organizational cultures define what a new employee needs to learn for acceptance as an organizational member. Cultures are functional when they help an organization adapt to its external environment and coordinate internal activities. They are dysfunctional when they are the basis of resistance to change or create culture clashes when two different cultures merge.

Organizational cultures are pervasive in organizations, but are often taken for granted by veteran employees. Cultures have strong imprints from their historical roots, become highly interdependent with other organization processes, and can have many subcultures. Organizational cultures also have a political dimension and are often interlocked with the organization's power systems.

The levels at which you see organizational cultures vary from visible to almost invisible. Artifacts and other cultural symbols usually are visible to even the newest employee. Basic assumptions — a set of implicit values — are almost invisible to new employees and are learned only after a period of socialization and acceptance. Espoused values and in-use values have midlevel visibility.

Three perspectives view an organizational culture in different ways. An integration perspective sees organizational cultures as widely shared values among organization members. The differentiation perspective says subcultures form within an organization's culture. A fragmentation perspective sees ambiguity in organizations that prevents agreement on values.

Organizational cultures have systems of symbols that have meaning only to members of that culture. This view of organizational cultures looks at artifacts and examines anything with symbolic meaning to its members. Symbols can be action, verbal, or material.

Diagnosing an organization's culture is an important way for a potential employee to get information about the organization. It also is an important way for a manager to learn about the culture of the organization. An outsider's diagnosis usually cannot go beyond artifacts and values. The insider not only sees artifacts and values but, with much work, can also uncover basic assumptions.

Managers maintain an existing organizational culture because they believe it is right for the environments they face. They also can try to change their culture to a new set of values, basic assumptions, and ideologies. Those new values can focus on diversity, quality, global competitiveness, or ethical behavior in the organization. Managers can try to create a new culture, usually in a separate work unit or in a new organization. The new culture needs a core ideology that is understandable, convincing, and widely discussed.

International cultural diversity can lead to subcultures forming around national heritage. The “culture synergy” view argued for embracing this cultural diversity to give the organization a strategic advantage.

The major ethical issues center on free and informed choice by employees and freedom to express their views. An organization's culture can have a conscious moral dimension to guide management decision making.

Subculture Formation

Why do subcultures form within organizational cultures? What implications do subcultures have for new employees? Give some examples from your employment experience. What effects would you expect the increasingly more global environment of modern organizations to have on subcultures?

Perspectives and Cultural Symbolism

Review the sections “Perspectives on Organizational Culture” and “Cultural Symbolism.” What elements of organizational culture do these views emphasize? Discuss the insights each view gives about an organization's culture. Use examples from your experience in the discussion.

Functions and Dysfunctions of Organizational Culture

What are the functions and dysfunctions of organizational culture? What role do basic assumptions play in those functions and dysfunctions?

Culture Diagnosis and Ethical Issues

Discuss the procedures for diagnosing an organization's culture. What are the major ethical issues you need to consider when making such a diagnosis?

Organizational Culture and Organizational Performance

Review the discussion of organizational culture and organizational performance. Discuss the three theoretical views of this link. What can you now conclude about organizational culture and organizational performance?

Major Effects on Organizational Culture

Review the expected effects on organizational culture of workforce diversity, quality management, a global environment, and an increasing emphasis on ethical behavior. Discuss the ways in which those effects could change the cultures of modern organizations.

Major Effects on Organizational Culture Continued

Continue with the preceding question, but consider the discussion in the section “Creating, Maintaining, and Changing Organizational Culture.” Discuss the implications for the observations in that section that follow from the effects mentioned in the previous question.

The Godfather (1972)

Don Vito Corleone (Marlon Brando) leads a powerful Mafia family. This intense film, based on Mario Puzo's novel, shows organized crime's violent side. It offers stunning parallels between managing any type of organization and managing a gangster organization.

This scene begins the film and follows some opening titles (DVD Chapter 1, “I Believe In America,” Start: 0:00:49). It starts with Bonasera (Salvatore Corsitto) the undertaker's voiceover, “I believe in America.” He continues to speak as the film opens on his face. The scene ends after Don Corleone says “I mean, we're not murderers … in spite of what this undertaker says.”

Consider the following questions while watching this scene: What organizational culture levels does the scene show? Does it show any basic assumptions or values that guide behavior? Do you perceive this culture as functional or dysfunctional for Don Corleone's organization?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Top Gun (1986)

This action-based film simply screams with aspects of U.S. naval aviation culture. Part of the film focuses on the relationships between Lt. Pete Mitchell (call sign Maverick, Tom Cruise) and sultry civilian instructor Charlotte Blackwood (call sign Charlie, Kelly McGillis). Many scenes throughout the film show several aspects of naval aviation culture in action. The use of real U.S. Navy people and equipment at various places gives a strong sense of reality.

This sequence begins with the Paramount logo and background music followed by the opening title credits (DVD Chapter 1, “Opening Credits” to DVD Chapter 2, “Danger Zone,” 0:04:01). Closely watch the action behind the credits. The scenes behind the credits were shot on a U.S. Navy aircraft carrier using U.S. Navy people, not actors and actresses. This sequence ends as the camera pans right across the deck. The film cuts to a shot of an airplane landing. The text on the screen reads, “Indian Ocean. Present Day.”

Here are some questions that can guide your viewing of these scenes. What artifacts or physical characteristics of U.S. naval aviation culture do the scenes show? Are any subcultures shown in the scenes? If yes, what defines the subcultures? What values do you infer from the scenes?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Organizational Culture Diagnosis

People who complete this exercise easily note the visible artifacts of the organizational culture they diagnose. Most physical characteristics and interpersonal behavior listed in the exercise appear in their diagnoses. Especially noteworthy in some analyses are the roles of stories, heroes, and heroines that make important observations on the culture’s history and its important values. Some cultures have rites and rituals such as graduation from a management training program, retirement, or celebration of a promotion.
Oral behavior can play an important role in many ¬organizational cultures. Jargon often appears in subcultures formed around professional occupations or technical jobs. Military organizations often use formal language and rely on titles when addressing each other. Hospitals and other types of medical organizations can do the same.
An organization’s public documents often say much about the organization’s culture. Do your organization’s documents, including the Web site, emphasize profit, product, and service, or do they also note the importance of people? As with all physical artifacts, you need to infer from what you examine. Photographs in these documents are especially important sources of information about an organization’s values.
The invisible artifacts also appear in most diagnoses with values emerging easier than basic assumptions. Often, there are striking differences between ¬espoused and in-use values. In other instances, these two values converge. Basic assumptions are always difficult to identify, even by a veteran employee. If you had difficulty with this part of the exercise, you could discuss possible basic assumptions with several veteran employees of the organization you ¬diagnosed.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 5.

affective

Part of an attitude; refers to a person's feeling of like or dislike for the object of the attitude.

agreeableness

A Big Five personality dimension; extent to which the person is cooperative, trusting, and courteous.

attitude

A learned predisposition to respond in a consistently favorable or unfavorable manner with respect to a given object.

attitude change

A shift in an attitude; can be due to persuasion, to the norms of a social group important to the person holding the attitude, or to the person becoming uncomfortable with some aspects of the attitude.

attitude formation

The shaping of attitudes based on a person's beliefs, both positive and negative, about an object and on the amount and type of information available about the object.

attribution process

The process by which people explain the behavior they see in others. Attributions can be personal (based on the observed person's personal qualities) or situational (based on the context of the behavior).

behavior genetics

A biological theory of personality development; sees personality developing as a series of interactions between genetically based predispositions and environmental influences.

behavioral intentions

Part of an attitude; how the person holding the attitude wants to behave and what the person says about their behavior toward the object of the attitude; may differ from observed behavior.

Big Five personality dimensions

Dimensions that many personality psychologists use to describe human personality: agreeableness, conscientiousness, emotional stability, extroversion, and openness to experience.

biological theories

Dimensions that many personality psychologists use to describe human personality: agreeableness, conscientiousness, emotional stability, extroversion, and openness to experience.

biological theories

Holds that people genetically inherit some personality characteristics; includes ethological theory and behavior genetics.

cognitive

Part of an attitude; a person's perceptions and beliefs about the object of the attitude.

cognitive dissonance

Discrepancies among a person's cognitions or beliefs about the object of an attitude; leads to tension, which may motivate the person to change one or more cognitions to reduce the dissonance.

cognitive social-learning theory

A learning theory of personality development; accepts the role of reinforcement, but sees behavior as largely learned by observation. People learn by observing behavior and its consequences, not by directly responding to reinforcers.

cognitive theory

Holds that people develop their thinking patterns over time through a series of cognitive development stages; as people have varied experiences and interact with their environment, each person develops a unique personality.

conscientiousness

A Big Five personality dimension; extent to which the person is dependable, thorough, and hardworking.

consensus information

In attribution processes, information used to form a personal or situational attribution; observe other people in a similar situation. If other people show the same behavior as the target person, then the situation, not the person, caused the behavior. If other people behave differently from the target person, then the person caused her or his behavior.

consistency information

In attribution processes, information used to form a personal or situational attribution; observe the person in a similar situation, but at a different time. High consistency if the person's behavior is the same at both times and low if the behavior is different.

detection threshold

The point in the perceptual process at which a person notices that something has changed in the environment.

distinctiveness information

In attribution processes, information used to form a personal or situational attribution; observe the target person in a different situation. If the person responds differently to the new situation, the perceiver makes a situational attribution. If the response is the same, the perceiver makes a personal attribution.

emotion

A feeling, psychological state, and biological state that incline a person to act in a certain way. One's emotions quickly trigger behavior aimed at the emotion's stimulus. Basic emotions include anger, disgust, fear, and joy.

emotional intelligence

A mental process that includes:

  1. appraising and expressing emotions in self and others
  2. managing emotion in self and others
  3. adaptively using emotions to guide behavior and solve problems

emotional stability

A Big Five personality dimension; extent to which the person is calm, relaxed, and secure.

ethological theory

A biological theory of personality development; holds that behaviors that have helped humans survive become inborn characteristics.

extroversion

A Big Five personality dimension; extent to which the person is talkative, active, and sociable.

false consensus

An attribution error; the tendency to overestimate the degree to which other people agree with one's perceptions of another's behavior.

fundamental attribution error

The tendency to underestimate the situation and overestimate personal qualities as the cause of observed behavior; also, the tendency to overestimate the situation and underestimate personal qualities as the cause of one's own behavior.

learning theory

Holds that people learn behavior from social interaction and that each person develops a unique personality from their social experiences.

locus of control

A personality type. People differ in whether they feel they control the consequences of their actions or are controlled by external factors. External control personality types believe that luck, fate, or powerful external forces control their destiny. Internal control personality types believe they control what happens to them.

Machiavellianism

A personality type; holds cynical views of other people's motives, places little value on honesty, and approaches the world with manipulative intent. Machiavellians maintain distance between themselves and others and are emotionally detached from other people in their lives.

Myers-Briggs Type Indicator® (MBTI)

Popular personality assessment device; assigns people to one of 16 personality types based on four bipolar dimensions:

  • extroverted (E) ➔ introverted (I)
  • sensing (S) ➔ intuitive (I);
  • thinking (T) ➔ feeling (F);
  • perceiving (P) ➔ judging (J).

openness to experiences

A Big Five personality dimension; extent to which the person is curious, intelligent, and broadminded.

operant-learning theory

People learn behavior because external stimuli reinforce the behavior; reinforcement increases the likelihood of the behavior in the future. The proper application of reinforcers develops complete behavior patterns, which form an individual's personality.

perception

A cognitive process that lets a person make sense of stimuli from the environment. These stimuli affect all senses: sight, touch, taste, smell, and hearing. The stimuli can come from other people, events, physical objects, or ideas.

perceptual defense

A means by which people shield themselves from negatively valued stimuli; e.g., blocking out disturbing feedback.

perceptual errors

Consist of two major types: perceptual set (beliefs about a target based on previous experience with that target) and stereotyping (holding beliefs about a target based on the group to which the target belongs).

perceptual set

A set of beliefs based on previous experience with a target. These beliefs act like a set of instructions that process the information a person gets about the target.

personal attribution

In forming an attribution, a person uses personal characteristics, such as beliefs, disposition, or personality, and not situational characteristics, to explain the causes of the person's behavior.

personality

a set of traits, characteristics, and predispositions of a person.

personality types

Various characteristics and dispositions that can be helpful in understanding behavior; include extroversion and introversion, Type A and B personalities, Machiavellian personality, and external and internal control types.

persuasive communication

A common source of attitude change; various forms of advertising. Tries to change the cognitive part of an attitude and assumes the affective part will also change.

recognition threshold

The point in the perceptual process at which a person can identify the target or changes in some attribute of the target.

relationship management

An emotional intelligence dimension. Developing others through guidance and feedback, building relationships, cooperating, and managing conflict.

self-awareness

An emotional intelligence dimension. Knowing one's weaknesses, strengths, and limits; recognizing the effects of one's emotions.

self-concept

The set of beliefs people have about themselves.

self-esteem

The positive and negative judgments people have about themselves; the emotional dimension of self-perception.

self-management

An emotional intelligence dimension. Showing integrity and flexibility; controlling one's emotions.

self-perception

The process by which people develop a view of themselves; includes self-concept, self-esteem, and self-presentation.

self-presentation

The behavioral strategies people use to affect how others see them and how they think about themselves.

situational attribution

In forming an attribution, a person uses the context of the person's behavior to find its causes; assumes that aspects of the situation, not qualities of the person, cause the person's behavior.

social awareness

An emotional intelligence dimension. Sensing and understanding others' emotions, having empathy and an active interest in other people's concerns.

social perception

The process by which people come to know and understand each other.

stereotype

One form of perceptual error; a perceptual set that holds beliefs and perceived attributes of a target person based on the group to which the target person belongs.

target

The object of a person's perceptual process.

threshold

The minimum amount of information about, or stimulus from, the target for a person to notice its presence; includes the detection threshold and the recognition threshold.

Type A personality

A personality type; aggressive, can quickly become hostile, has a keen sense of time urgency, and focuses excessively on achievement. Such people continuously create new and more difficult goals or engage in more activities than time allows.

Type B personality

A personality type; has no sense of time urgency and often stops to review achievements and think about where they are headed in the future. They have high self-esteem, a characteristic that distinguishes them from Type A personalities.

Chapter Outline

Introduction

  1. Three related aspects of human psychology can strongly affect behavior in organizations
  2. Understanding perception, attitudes, and personality can help you understand behavior in organizations

Perception

  1. Introduction
    1. Cognitive process that lets a person make sense of stimuli from the environment
    2. Stimuli from objects: a physical object, an event, a sound, a person, an idea, or a concept
    3. Includes sight, smell, sounds, touch, etc.
  2. The perceptual process
    1. Target: object of a person's perceptual process, such as another person, a physical object, an event, a sound, an idea, or a concept
    2. Threshold: minimum amount of information about, or stimulus from, the target for a person to notice its presence
      1. Detection threshold: point at which a person notices that something has changed in the environment
      2. Recognition threshold: point at which a person can identify the target or changes in the target's attributes
  3. Perceptual defense: shields a person from negative stimuli. People can block out annoying sounds or disturbing and anxiety-provoking feedback
  4. Perceptual errors
    1. Perceptual set: beliefs based on previous experience with a target; act like a set of instructions that process information a person gets about the target
    2. Stereotype: beliefs and perceived attributes of a target person based on the group to which the target person belongs
  5. Self-perception: a view of self
    1. Self-concept
    2. Self-esteem
    3. Self-presentation
  6. Social perception: a view of others
    1. Elements of social perception
      1. Person
      2. Situation
      3. Behavior
      4. Attribution processes
        1. Personal attribution
        2. Situational attribution
        3. Consensus, distinctiveness, and consistency information
        4. Attribution errors
          • Fundamental attribution error
          • False consensus
        5. Integration of attributions

Attitudes

  1. Introduction
    1. Definition
      1. Many definitions used by social psychologists
      2. Definition: learned predisposition to respond in a consistently favorable or unfavorable manner toward an object
    2. Elements of an attitude
      1. Cognitive
      2. Affective
      3. Behavioral intentions
    3. Relationship to perception
  2. Attitude formation
  3. Attitude change
    1. Persuasive communication
    2. Social influence
    3. Cognitive dissonance

Personality

  1. Definition
  2. Personality theories
    1. Cognitive theory
    2. Learning theory
    3. Biological theory
  3. Emotions and emotional intelligence
    1. Background
      1. Emotion defined
      2. Contrast to rational, non-feeling approach
      3. Role of emotion: quick reactions; survival
      4. Different brain functions of emotional and rational
      5. Interaction between emotional and rational for effective decisions
    2. Basic emotions
      1. Anger
      2. Disgust
      3. Fear
      4. Joy
      5. Sadness
      6. Shame
      7. Surprise
    3. Emotional intelligence
      1. Definition
      2. Elements
      3. Functions
    4. Implications for decisions, behavior, and management
  4. The Big Five personality dimensions
    1. Extroversion
    2. Emotional stability
    3. Agreeableness
    4. Conscientiousness
    5. Openness to experience
  5. Personality types
    1. Locus of control
    2. Machiavellianism
    3. Type A and B personality

International Aspects of Perception, Attitudes, and Personality

  1. Attribution processes by foreigners in a new country; knowledge of culture before concluding whether the person or situation is the cause of observed behavior
  2. Differences in fundamental attribution errors among American and Asian Indian subjects
  3. Personality: different cultures emphasize different personality characteristics

Ethical Issues in Perception, Attitudes, and Personality

  1. Some speculation here because little empirical research exists
  2. Perception
    1. Perceptual errors and their effect on “seeing” unethical behavior or decisions
      1. Perceptual set: beliefs about what to expect from the target person. Could carry a belief that the person is ethical or unethical and interpret the person's behavior accordingly
      2. Stereotype. Especially of concern within a diverse workforce
    2. Attribution processes when observing behavior and actors
  3. Attitudes
    1. Limited valid and reliable research evidence about the ethical attitudes of students and managers; contextual quality of ethics and behavior in organizations
    2. Some evidence of impression management of ethical attitudes

Chapter Overview

Chapter 5's description of perception, attitudes, and personality gives some basic background for later chapters. The perception portion of the chapter describes self-perception, social perception, and the link between perception and behavior. Social perception includes an extended discussion of attribution processes.

The chapter's attitude section describes the three parts of attitude: cognitive, affective, and behavioral intentions. It then discusses how attitudes form, how they change, and their link to behavior.

Chapter 5 presents personality through three major classes of personality theory: cognitive theory, learning theory, and the potentially controversial biological theory. A discussion of emotions and emotional intelligence follows, with an emphasis on the behavioral effects of emotions. The chapter then develops the Big Five personality dimensions, which have seen increasing acceptance among personality psychologists. A separate section discusses some major personality types that have implications for organizational behavior, such as Type A and B personalities and extroversion and introversion.

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Assess human perceptual processes and how people form impressions of others.
  • Distinguish types of perceptual error and their effects on the information people get from their environment.
  • Explain attribution processes and their effects on perceptions and attitudes.
  • Discuss the nature of attitudes, how they form, and how they change.
  • List the different parts of an attitude.
  • Contrast different views of human personality development.
  • Understand emotions and their role in human behavior.
  • Discuss some dimensions of personality and several personality types.
  • Recognize the effects of different cultures on perception, attitudes, and personality.
  • Compare ethical issues that follow from stereotypes, attribution processes, and self-presentation.

Personal and Management Implications

The types of perceptual errors humans make have several implications. Two common errors come from perceptual sets and stereotyping. If either of these sources of perceptual error gives you an incorrect view of a situation or a person, you may behave inappropriately for that situation or person.

The fundamental attribution error is the tendency to underestimate the situation as a cause of another person's behavior. If you suffer from this type of error, you will overestimate the degree to which a person's characteristics explain his behavior. When explaining your own behavior, though, you will tend to ascribe its causes to the situation and not to your personal qualities. Such errors can affect the accuracy of your view about another's characteristics. Whatever the accuracy of your views, you will develop a false consensus, an overestimation of how much others agree with you.

Recall that, when people experience cognitive dissonance, they feel a state of tension and a need to reduce that tension. A common organization situation you could encounter involves a performance appraisal and the rewards you and others get because of that appraisal. Such appraisals are judgments by a manager about people's performance. You may feel your performance was rated lower than it should have been compared to the performance of a coworker. You will feel cognitive dissonance and a need to reduce it. Several ways of reducing the dissonance are available to you, such as quitting the organization or seeking a transfer.

A major management responsibility is assessing the performance of those who report to you. Many job situations will not let you directly measure a person's performance. Instead, you will assess or appraise performance based on your knowledge and observations of a person's behavior. Because you are observing the behavior of another person, many perceptual errors described in the text could affect your conclusions about that person's performance1. The result could be a performance appraisal that does not accord with what the person believes is just. Such feelings of unfairness can lead the person to engage in behaviors that are dysfunctional for your work unit.

The discussion of attribution processes earlier in the text chapter emphasized how people ascribe characteristics and qualities to other people. The attribution processes of those who work for you play an important role in whether they perceive you as a leader. People ascribe leadership qualities to others based on their implicit leadership theories2. Such theories act as perceptual filters and standards of comparison for the qualities people believe a leader should have. A person perceived as a good leader by one person may not be perceived that way by another.

Organizations will increasingly become multinational in both operation and membership3. Many managers in the future will find themselves working directly with managers from other countries. The cultural differences in management orientation described earlier suggest two implications. First, the conflict potential among managers from different countries is high. Second, to reduce that conflict potential, managers from all countries must understand the different orientations they bring to an organization. The text chapter touched only briefly on the international aspects of such issues. You will find much more detail in the citations for that discussion.

Notes

  1. Feldman, J. M. 1981. Beyond Attribution Theory: Cognitive Processes in Performance Appraisal. Journal of Applied Psychology 66: 127–48.
  2. Calder, B. J. 1977. An Attribution Theory of Leadership. In New Directions in Organizational Behavior, ed. B. M. Staw and G. R. Salancik. Chicago: St. Clair Press, pp. 179–204.
  3. Holstein, W. J. 1990. The Stateless Corporation: Forget Multinationals — Today's Giants Are Really Leaping Boundaries. Business Week (14 May): 98–105.

Chapter Summary

Perception is a selective cognitive process that lets a person make sense of stimuli from the environment. Perceptual errors include perceptual set and stereotyping. Self-perception (how you see yourself) has three parts: self-concept, self-esteem, and self-presentation. Social perception is the process of understanding another person using information from the person, from the situation, and from observed behavior. Social perception includes attribution processes, which explain the cause of other people's behavior. People make attribution errors that can lead to inaccurate perceptions and conclusions about another person.

Attitudes are favorable or unfavorable dispositions about an object. The three related parts of an attitude are cognitive, affective, and behavioral intention. Attitudes can change because something persuades the person to shift his attitudes, the norms of a social group affect his attitudes, or the person becomes cognitively uncomfortable (cognitive dissonance) with some aspects of his beliefs compared to others.

Personality is a set of traits, characteristics, and predispositions of a person. Three views of personality development came from cognitive theory, learning theories, and biological explanations of personality development. The Big Five personality dimensions are extroversion, emotional stability, agreeableness, conscientiousness, and openness to experience. Some personality types of interest are locus of control, Machiavellian, and Type A and B.

Emotions play a key role in human behavior, often without a person understanding why an emotion triggered a behavior. People with high emotional intelligence understand their emotions, those of others, and the role of emotions in determining behavior.

People often hold stereotypes about those from other cultures. These stereotypes can be inaccurate, leading to difficulties in interactions in other countries. Cultures also vary in the attitudes held about organizations, their management, and the types of personality characteristics considered important.

Several issues emerged in the ethics discussion earlier in this chapter. Stereotypes can affect one's perception of the ethical behavior of another person. People can also manage their self-presentations so that others perceive them as behaving ethically. Attribution processes can change whether one perceives the situation as causing unethical behavior or the person being responsible for the behavior.

Self-Perception

Self-concept, self-esteem, and self-presentation are the three parts of self-perception. How do you see yourself in each of these three areas? Compare your self-view with how some close friends see you. Be prepared for some surprises!

Social Perception

Review Chapter 5's description of social perception. What do you consider most when forming an impression of a person you have just met? What types of attribution error are you most likely to make? Discuss potential differences in attribution error among different people.

Attitude Change

Review the chapter's description of sources of attitude change. Which of the three causes you to change your attitudes about some object most quickly?

Personality Development

Which personality development theory is the most realistic explanation of this important process? Why?

Personality Dimensions and Types

Review Chapter 5's discussion of personality dimensions and types. Do you know people who fit these personality descriptions? Discuss your interactions with people of the different personality types.

Cultural Stereotypes

Review the stereotypes of people from different cultures in the international aspects section of Chapter 5. Are those stereotypes shared by other students in your class? If students from other countries are in your class, ask them about the stereotypes they hold about U.S. and Canadian people.

Perception and Ethics

The ethical issues section strongly implied that human perceptual processes can filter the information one gets about other people's actions. Such filtration affects the accuracy of one's judgment about ethical and unethical behavior. Fully discuss the implications of perceptual processes for ethical behavior in organizations.

The Breakfast Club (1985)

Strong personalities emerge in director John Hughes's study of teen high school culture: the Criminal, the Brain, the Princess, the Kook, and the Jock. They had not met before their Saturday detention, but quickly develop strong associations with each other.

This scene starts DVD Chapter 8, “Lunchtime.” Claire Standish (Molly Ringwald) assembles her lunch on the table. It ends after John Bender (Judd Nelson) mocks Brian Johnson (Anthony Michael Hall) and his family (Stop: 0:41:04).

The scene shows five characters: Claire Standish, John Bender, Andrew Clark (Emilio Estevez), Allison Reynolds (Ally Sheedy), and Brian Johnson. Assess these five personalities using the personality theories and types described in this chapter.

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Legally Blonde (2003)

Elle Woods's (Reese Witherspoon) boyfriend, Warner Huntington III (Matthew Davis), wants to go to Harvard Law School instead of keeping their relationship alive. Elle pursues him vigorously by applying to and being accepted by Harvard Law School. It is a charming comedy, dedicated to the worldwide population of blonde women. Stereotyping fills this film, giving it many delightful twists to its surprise conclusion.

These scenes start after the opening credits (DVD Chapter 2, “Dressing for Success”). Elle has received a card wishing her and Warner the best for their future as an engaged couple. The scenes begin with a panning shot of the party in the Delta Nu sorority house. They end after Elle and her friends admire her new dress in the boutique's mirror. Elle says, “Girls. This is it. In a few hours I'll be the future Mrs. Warner Huntington III.” The film cuts to Warner banging the sorority house doorknocker.

You can stop the scenes after Elle asks her friends to help her pick out the perfect wedding outfit (DVD 0:04:06). Think about your image of Elle. How do you perceive her? If you have seen the film before, try to recall your first impression on seeing the film or form your present social perception of Elle. Restart the film to see the conclusion of these scenes.

Consider the following questions while watching the scenes: Does the boutique salesclerk (Lisa Kushell) have a stereotype of blonde women? What is it? What does she assume about Elle because of her stereotype? Do you have a stereotype of Elle (assuming this is your first viewing of the scene and film)? Can people's stereotypes adversely affect their social interaction in potentially critical situations? Why and how?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Understanding Your Perceptual Process

Perception Images Description and Discussion

Each image in this exercise is a target of your perceptual process; a concept described earlier in this chapter. The following are some observations on each slide show image (target). These are typical reactions of viewers to the images, some of which you might have seen in earlier classes.

Horizontal Lines Illusion  The two horizontal lines are the same length. You can measure them on your monitor to verify that statement. Allow for some computer monitor distortion, especially with a curved screen. This illusion is the easiest of the four to see.
This is the classic Müller-Lyer illusion published in 1889.1 The arrowheads distort our perceptual process into believing that the upper horizontal line is longer than the lower horizontal line.

Vase-Face Illusion  You likely have seen this image in an earlier class. It is a popular one for psychology courses and some marketing courses that discuss perception and perceptual processes.
The image has both a vase and a face. You might need to view the image several times to see both parts of it. If you did not see both images, return to the eExercise and try again. Vary your position in front of your monitor to try to see the different images.
You now begin to experience some parts of the perceptual process described in Chapter 5. If you did not see both images, the one you did not see had not reached your recognition threshold—the point at which you can identify the target. If you eventually saw both images, you also experienced the detection threshold of your perceptual process—the point at which you noticed that the target changed.

Old Woman–Young Woman Illusion  Yes, there really is an old and young woman within the single image. The old woman image has a long chin and faces down from the center to screen left. The young woman has her face turned away to the right. Her necklace is the mouth of the old woman image.
You can experience with this image the same parts of the perceptual process described for the Vase-Face Illusion. Both your recognition and detection thresholds could have operated for this image.

Prongs Illusion  Viewers have the most difficulty with the Prongs Illusion. Your perceptual process shows a dynamic element by alternating between two and three prongs. Jumping from one version to the other is a natural part of human perceptual processes.
The Prongs Illusion also triggers the two thresholds of your perceptual process. If you saw alternating images, you experienced the movements between your detection and recognition thresholds.


1

F. C. Müller-Lyer. 1889. Optische Urteilstäuschungen. Archive fuer Anatomie and Physiologie, Supplement Volume, 263–70.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis


Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 6.

expectations

A person’s beliefs about becoming an organizational member; develop during the choice: anticipatory socialization stage.

role sender

Person or persons who define a focal person’s role during a role episode.

sent role

Pivotal or relevant role behavior defined by a role sender during a role episode.

focal person

Person in a role episode who receives the role behavior defined by a role sender. Enacts the behavior according to the focal person’s perception of it. See also received role.

received role

Focal person’s understanding of the sent role. Enacts the behavior according to the person’s perception of the sent role.

functional

Focal person’s understanding of the sent role. Enacts the behavior according to the person’s perception of the sent role.

functional

A dimension of a boundary transition; emphasizes the development of skills and abilities for doing a task.

hierarchical

A dimension of a boundary transition; moving upward in the organization into a position of more authority. Features inward movement. See also inclusionary.

inclusionary

A dimension of a boundary transition; works together with the functional and hierarchical dimensions. Emphasizes inward movement into the heart of the organization’s culture.

recruitment advertising

A socialization process during the anticipatory stage of socialization. Company advertising for its job openings.

company recruiter

A socialization process during the anticipatory stage of socialization. A person who represents a company that is trying to attract potential new employees; often comes to a college or university campus to interview students.

internship

A socialization process during the anticipatory stage of socialization; positions with a company that are usually temporary. Can help a person develop realistic expectations about future employment with that company./p>

screening and selection devices

A socialization process during the anticipatory stage of socialization. Includes written tests, oral interviews, and job simulations. Can improve the fit between the individual and the organization.

indoctrination programs

A socialization process during the entry/encounter stage of socialization. Such programs teach the organization’s formal rules and procedures. Organizations use such programs when they view rules and procedures as pivotal role behavior.

apprenticeship

A socialization process during the entry/encounter stage of socialization. Features the assignment of a new employee to a veteran employee. The veteran or mentor shows the new employee how to do the technical parts of the job and the nature of social relationships in the organization. Also referred to as mentoring.

mentoring

A socialization process during the entry/encounter stage of socialization. See also apprenticeship.

debasement experiences

A socialization process during the entry/encounter stage of socialization. Extremely easy or extremely difficult tasks during the early employment period; can cause a person to question his or her self-image, making the person ready for change by the organization. Also referred to as upending experiences.

upending experiences

A socialization process during the entry/encounter stage of socialization. See debasement experiences.

training programs

A socialization process during the entry/encounter stage of socialization. Used to develop skills that an organization views as important to a job; can also convey the values and norms of the organization.

unfreezing

The first of three steps in the process of creating a new self-image in a new employee. An organization wants a new employee to discard some or all aspects of the person’s old self-image.

changing

The second of three steps in the process of creating a new self-image in a new employee; changing to a new self-image that has the values and behaviors the organization wants.

refreezing

The last step in the process of creating a new self-image in a new employee. New employee has acquired the norms, values, and required behaviors that the organization considers important.

individual differences

Personal characteristics that prevent uniform reactions to socialization experiences; include needs, skills, abilities, self-efficacy beliefs, perception processes, and attribution processes.

boundary transitions

A person's movement into and within an organization; e.g., joining an organization; has three dimensions: functional, hierarchical, and inclusionary.

change: metamorphosis

The final stage of the socialization process in which the new employee begins to feel comfortable in her new role.

choice: anticipatory socialization

The first stage of the socialization process; occurs before the person joins an organization or takes a new position in it; builds expectations and prepares the person for the new situation. Includes the socialization processes of recruitment, internships, and the use of screening and selection devices.

content innovation

A response in the metamorphosis stage of the socialization process; the new employee changes or improves the knowledge base and process characteristics of the role.

culture shock

A psychological and physiological disorientation caused by large differences between a home country culture and a foreign country culture

custodial response

A possible result in the metamorphosis stage of the socialization process; the new employee accepts the new role and conforms to its requirements.

entry/encounter stage

The second stage of socialization; the new employee joins the organization and begins to learn its culture, acquires a new self-image, learns the norms of her immediate workgroup, and learns her duties and responsibilities. Includes the socialization processes of indoctrination programs, training programs, and debasement experiences.

expatriate

A person going to an assignment outside the home country; related to culture shock.

expatriate adjustment

Response of a person going to an assignment outside the home country; often associated with failure to adapt to the foreign assignment.

new self-image

A goal of the entry/encounter stage of socialization; achieved by unfreezing a new employee's old self-image, changing to a new self-image, and refreezing the new self-image in place.

organizational socialization

The process by which people learn the content of an organization's culture.

peripheral role behaviors

Behaviors that are neither necessary nor desirable for membership in an organization.

pivotal role behaviors

Behaviors an individual must accept to join and remain a member of an organization.

realistic expectations

A balanced view of what to expect from an organization based on both its positive and its negative qualities; can be created through Realistic Job Previews for new employees.

realistic job preview

A balanced description of the characteristics of a job and organization that includes sources of both satisfaction and dissatisfaction; given to potential employees.

rebellious response

A possible response to socialization in which the process fails; the new employee rejects all aspects of the role and leaves the organization or is terminated.

received role

A focal person's perception of the pivotal and relevant role behaviors in a sent role; occurs in a role episode.

relevant role behaviors

Behaviors that an organization considers desirable and good, but that are not essential for membership.

repatriate

A person returning from an assignment outside the home country; related to culture shock.

repatriate adjustment

Response of a person returning from an assignment outside the home country; can have difficulty adjusting to home country after a long foreign assignment; related to culture shock.

role

A set of activities, duties, responsibilities, and required behaviors that the organization wants an individual to acquire.

role episode

A means of communicating pivotal and relevant role behaviors. A role sender communicates information about a role behavior to a focal person, who then enacts the role behavior as he perceives it; the role sender perceives the behavior and responds with reinforcement or sanctions.

role innovation

A response to socialization in which the new employee rejects most aspects of the role and redefines it; the organization accepts the innovation.

self-efficacy beliefs

Associated with different responses to the socialization process. People with low self-¬efficacy adopt a custodial response. People high in self-efficacy adopt innovative ¬responses.

sent role

The pivotal and relevant role behaviors defined by a role sender; occurs in a role episode.

socialization processes

The methods organizations use to shape the values and behaviors they want their members to have.

socialization versus individualization

The interplay between the organization's efforts to induce members to conform to its values and the members' efforts to preserve their individuality.

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Socialization: a powerful process for shaping human behavior.
    2. The process by which people adjust to new jobs, new organizations, and new groups of people.
      1. Learn the right values, attitudes, and role behaviors
      2. Develop work skills and abilities
      3. Adjust to the norms and values of the immediate work group
      4. Learn about an organization's culture
      5. Question of individual-organization fit
  2. Roles and Role Behavior
    1. Role: a collection of repeated behaviors of an organizational position
    2. Role behavior
      1. Pivotal: behaviors a person must accept to remain a member of the organization
      2. Relevant: behaviors the organization considers desirable and good, but not essential to membership
      3. Peripheral: behaviors that are neither necessary nor desirable, but allowed by an organization
  3. Role Episodes
    1. Socialization process involves a series of role episodes
    2. A role epsiode
      1. Communicates pivitol and relevant role behavior
      2. Role sender and sent role
      3. Focal person and received role
      4. Reactions of role sender and focal person in a role episode
  4. Boundary Transitions
    1. Socialization process happens at boundary transitions
      1. Functional
      2. Hierarchical
      3. Inclusionary
    2. Process repeats many times as a person's careers unfolds and as person crosses different boundaries
    3. Early period following a boundary transition is highly important from both the individual's and the organization's perspective
    4. Highly salient to a person when taking a new job in the same or a different organization
  5. Individual and Organizational Perspectives on Socialization
    1. Two-way process
      1. Organization  Socialization
      2. Person  Individualization
    2. Individual perspective
      1. Need to preserve a unique identity
      2. Need to use unique skills and talents
      3. Need to satisfy a unique set of needs
      4. Also need acceptance by the new organization and its members so talents and abilities will be used
    3. Organizational perspective
      1. Need some degree of conformity to the organization’s values and behavior that are considered necessary for the organization’s survival.
      2. Uniformity in values and behavior decreases conflict potential
      3. Also needs the innovative behavior of its new members if it is to remain viable and survive in a changing environment.
      4. Dilemma: getting what it needs for effective role performance without over-specifying role behavior
    4. This is the dilemma of organizational socialization for both the person and organization. Let us now see how this drama unfolds for us as we begin the process of choosing a new job and entering a new organization.
  6. Stages of Organizational Socialization
    1. Choice: anticipatory socialization ("Getting In")
      1. Happens before joining the organization
      2. Make tentative then firm choice of organizations to join. Anticipate what life will be like in each organization—"anticipatory socialization."
      3. Issues
        1. Realism about the organization. Role requirements, culture's values and norms. In short, what is it like to work for this organization?
        2. Realism about the job: what are the job duties? Need to describe both the positive and negative side.
        3. Congruence of skills and abilities. What skills and abilities do you have as an individual; what skills and abilities does the organization need? Note the requirement to present accurate images on both sides. individual must know what he or she can do and not over- or under-sell self. Likewise for the organization.
        4. Congruence of needs and values: What needs are you trying to satisfy in the work setting? Can the organizations you are reviewing satisfy those needs?
      4. Outcome of the choice stage: expectations and an image of what it will be like to work for that organization. Anticipatory socialization is trying to convey realism and develop congruence between the person and the organization.
      5. Some examples of organizational practices in the choice stage
        1. Recruitment advertising
        2. Recruitment interviews; role of the company recruiter
        3. Internships
        4. Screening and selection-assessment centers; testing and selection
      6. Realistic Job Previews (RJPs). Try to build a realistic image of organization life
    2. Entry/Encounter ("Breaking In")
      1. Comparison of expectations to reality
      2. Readiness to be socialized
        1. Degree of motivation to join the organization
        2. Motivation of an individual to stay with the organization; inducements to cause an individual to stay
      3. Role episodes are a highly important part of this stage
      4. Issues not independent of each other
        1. Role clarification. Role in immediate work group. Includes both the organization and informal group definition of role requirements. Seeking role clarification both within the organization and the informal group.
        2. Learning new tasks. Learning duties, tasks, responsibilities. Evaluation of progress in meeting the demands of the job and the organization.
        3. Learning about the work group. Interpersonal relations with group members. Learning group norms.
        4. Learning to manage various role conflicts
          1. Intragroup
          2. Intergroup
          3. Work-nonwork
      5. Multiple sources of organizational socialization
        1. Organization. Formal rules, policies, procedures; both written and unwritten
        2. Immediate supervisor; performance feedback
        3. Immediate work group
        4. The job itself: level of job challenge
      6. Examples of some organization practices in the entry-encounter stage
        1. Apprenticeship
        2. Training programs
        3. Indoctrination programs
        4. Debasement or upending experiences
    3. Change: Metamorphosis ("Settling In")
      1. Change to new self-image
      2. Knows the requirements of the job
      3. Has successfully adjusted to socialization demands from many sources
      4. Possible socialization outcomes
        1. Rebellion, custodial, innovation
        2. Content innovation versus role innovation
    4. The stages repeat throughout careers. Degree of socialization may be less as a person encounters each career change. Issue: expectations of the new role will be based partly on what the person has already experienced. Way the person behaves in the new situation will be based partly on how she behaved in the old situation.
  7. Individual Differences and Organizational Socialization
    1. Skills and abilities
    2. Self-efficacy beliefs
    3. Selective perception
    4. Attribution processes
    5. Needs
  8. International Aspects of Organizational Socialization
    1. International role transitions and socialization. Features common to both expatriate and repatriate role transitions
      1. Moving to and from roles. Referred to as expatriate and repatriate adjustment. Experience the stages of socialization as in domestic job changes but with some special issues associated with each stage
      2. Both forms of adjustment carry elements of culture shock. Expatriate adjustment is clearly a move from one's home country to a foreign country. Repatriate adjustment follows the return to the person's home country. If the foreign assignment was for the typical three to four years, the home country could have changed in ways unknown to the expatriate. The return presents the person with a culture shock experience, making the adjustment almost as difficult as expatriate adjustment.
      3. Dimensions of cross-cultural adjustment
        1. Adjustment to the job and work environment
        2. Adjustment to interacting with local nationals
        3. Adjustment to the culture of the country
      4. Training, as part of the organization's formal socialization process, can help smooth the transitions
    2. Issues in expatriate adjustment
      1. High interest in successful expatriate adjustment because of high incidence of failures
      2. Some special difficulties in expatriate adjustment
        1. Difficulty crossing the inclusionary boundary in the foreign assignment
        2. More dramatic changes, contrasts, and surprises
        3. Need more preparation for international assignments so that the transitions will be less disruptive
      3. Selection of expatriates. Typically selected based on successful performance in domestic roles. Success in Des Moines Iowa does not guarantee success in New Delhi. Now recommended that criteria other than successful domestic performance be used. Those criteria include past experience in a foreign assignment, an openness to differences among people, and a willingness to learn about another culture. The same aspects of a spouse and other family members also should be considered in the selection decision.
      4. Socialization of expatriates. Formal training of those who will go to foreign operations. Although the research evidence shows cross-cultural training is effective in smoothing the transition, only about 30% of expatriates get such training before departing from their home country. The training that is offered is not comprehensive. Usually an orientation to the culture of the foreign assignment and the physical environment. Spouses are often not included in such training although it is becoming clear that their adaptation plays a key role in successful expatriate adjustment.
      5. Culture-toughness dimension. Some countries are harder to adjust to than others. Distance of foreign culture from the home culture. Some research says India, Pakistan, Liberia, for example, are especially tough for U.S. employees. Women also face special issues in cultures with male-dominated norms and values.
      6. Career development programs and policies by organizations as ways of smoothing the transitions. Career value of the international assignment.
    3. Issues in repatriate adjustment
      1. Repatriates who have been gone for several years will not necessarily have an accurate image of their home culture. During the anticipatory stage before leaving their foreign assignment, the repatriate can develop inaccurate expectations of life back home. Can maintain accurate expectations if the expatriate has had home leave or required visits to the home office
      2. Required interactions with people in the home office because of task interdependence. Interactions by any communication media help here. Includes telephone, facsimile, international teleconferences, direct computer connection.
      3. Easier adaptation if expatriate had a sponsor in the home office whose responsibility was to inform the expatriate of major policy and strategic changes back home.
      4. The degree of adaptation of the expatriate to the foreign culture can affect adaptation to the home culture.
      5. Expatriation salary differentials, housing allowances, culture novelty, and time in assignments can inhibit repatriation adjustment. Can have a downward shift in perceived status.
      6. Predeparture training rarely is done. Training on return could also help. Make it part of the organization's formal socialization of the repatriate.
  9. Ethical Issues in Organizational Socialization
    1. Shaping a person's values and behavior
    2. Not revealing socialization goals of company training programs. A question of full disclosure of intent
    3. Using debasement experiences
    4. Knowingly withholding from potential employees negative information about working for the company. Can happen in recruitment advertising or during the recruitment interview. At what point does an organization move into the unethical arena.
    5. A potential employee knowingly withholding information about self that could affect her performance

Chapter Overview

Chapter 6 describes organizational socialization and is closely linked to Chapter 4's description of organizational culture. The chapter opens with a discussion of roles, role behavior, and how role episodes define a person's expected behavior in an organization. It includes a discussion of the boundary transitions a person experiences as one moves through an organization and career. Socialization is presented as a series of stages each of which has its own socialization processes and results.
This chapter's purpose is to inform the reader of what to expect when first considering an organization as an employer and the dynamics of the socialization process over time. The chapter also describes some limited aspects of careers because different aspects of socialization are experienced as one's career unfolds. The chapter pursues the topics from an individual perspective ("What will happen to me in this process?") and a manager’s ("What do I do with this process?") trying to manage an effective socialization process.

learning goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Explain organizational socialization as a process that communicates an organization's culture.
  • Distinguish amongf roles, role behaviors, and boundary transitions.
  • Discuss role episodes and their importance in organizational socialization.
  • Describe each boundary transition and its role in the socialization process.
  • Explain the stages of organizational socialization and how they repeat during a work career.
  • Discuss individual differences in organizational socialization.
  • Compare the socialization issues in expatriate and repatriate adjustment.
  • Analyze the ethical issues in organizational socialization.

Personal and Management implications

The anticipatory stage of socialization has an especially important implication for everyone. Get as much information as you can about the organizations that interest you. Examine existing documents for clues about the organization's culture. Useful sources include annual reports and press accounts about an organization’s activities. You also can gather information from an organization's website and other Internet sources. If possible, contact existing employees of the organization to get some idea about the organization's culture from an informed insider. The accuracy of your image of the organization and its culture will make your adaptation to the organization much easier. Getting accurate information at this stage is highly important for taking an assignment in another country. The latter will feature much that is new about the external culture surrounding the organization.

Be accurate and candid in the way you present yourself. Know your values, skills, abilities, and limits. You play a key role in the other side of a realistic job preview. There also is a strong need for a "realistic employee preview". You may need to temper your presentation's accuracy with your knowledge of the target organization's culture. Some organization recruiters would react adversely to a candid self-presentation, especially if their organization's culture supports and values deception.

The importance of a realistic job preview to new employee retention and performance cannot be overemphasized. Managers should let potential new employees know both the good and bad points about working for the organization. Such accurate information becomes highly important for new employees taking an assignment in another country. Include information about the local culture in the realistic job preview. You will find the socialization process much easier if newcomers have such a preview.

Managers play a potent role in the socialization process. Your behavior as a manager sends signals and cues about important values in the culture. For example, if the organizational culture highly values punctuality, your behavior should reflect your acceptance of this value. If it values ethical behavior in all organization actions, you must behave in ways that show you accept that value.

The performance appraisals you do with a newcomer are also an important way of giving feedback about how the person sees and interprets the organization. Tell her the meaning you see in events that have happened to her and show her the events are part of the routine life of the organization. The latter is especially true for events newcomers might interpret as "goofy" but are highly valued by you and the organization.


Chapter Summary

Organizational socialization is a powerful process that affects an individual’s behavior and helps shape and maintain an organization’s culture. It usually is the first behavioral process a person experiences after joining an organization. Part of the socialization process happens before joining an organization. Other parts happen after joining.

Organizations ask employees to take on specific roles that have behavioral requirements. The three types of role behavior are pivotal (required), relevant (desired), and peripheral (tolerated). Those role behaviors are learned in a series of role episodes that unfold during socialization. The socialization process is continuous throughout a person’s association with an organization, but it is most intense before and after boundary transitions. Boundary transitions have three dimensions: functional (job), hierarchical (promotion), and inclusionary (inward movement).

The anticipatory stage of socialization creates expectations about life in the organization before a person enters the organization. The person compares those expectations to the reality experienced in the entry/encounter stage. The entry/encounter stage happens after the person crosses the organization’s boundary and begins the first day of employment. After successful adaptation to socialization demands, the employee passes through the metamorphosis stage. In this stage, the employee experiences the final adaptation to the organization’s demands.

Organizations operating in an international context face special socialization issues. People moving to other countries (expatriates) experience the same stages of socialization as they do in domestic job changes. On return to their home country, repatriates can experience culture shock while readapting to their home culture.

Several ethical issues center on whether there is a need for informed consent about an organization’s goal of shaping a person’s values and behavior by its socialization processes. The broad ethical question is: “Should the organization tell potential and existing employees about the goals of its socialization process?”

Types of Role Behavior

Which of the three types of role behavior is the most important for an organization? Why?

Stages of Socialization

Describe the three stages of organizational socialization. What are the relationships among the stages? Which socialization processes happen within each stage?

Anticipatory Stage Dysfunctions

What dysfunctions likely happen in the anticipatory stage of socialization? How can an organization reduce those dysfunctions?

Socialization Responses

Discuss the responses people can have to organizational socialization. Which of those responses is most likely to be yours?

Realism of Self, Realism of Organization

Discuss the responsibilities of both the individual and the organization to present an accurate image of themselves. Why is accuracy important to both parties? What ethical issues surround the presentation of an accurate image?

Expatriate and Repatriate Adjustment

Discuss the socialization issues that surround international job changes. Which of these is likely to have its strongest effects on you if you take an international assignment?

Ethical Issues in Organizational Socialization

Discuss the ethical issues raised by organizational socialization. Are they real issues that managers should address, or are organizations justified in proceeding as they have in the past?

TAKE FIVE: OB ALIVE: TOWER HEIST (2011)

The scenes begin with Josh Kovaks (Ben Stiller) describing his plan for stealing Arthur Shaw’s (Alan Alda) 20 million dollars. All except Mr. Fitzhugh (Mathew Broderick) quickly yield to Kovaks’ socialization effort. Mr. Fitzhugh eventually comes around after considering all aspect of the plan.

Slide (Eddie Murphy) becomes the next focus of Kovaks’ efforts. By referring to their early childhood experiences, Kovaks recruits Slide to join in his plan. The final step in the group’s socialization effort involves satisficing Slide’s order to steal merchandize from the mall.

Your Socialization Experiences: Stages of Socialization

This exercise focused you on the socialization stages of a recent socialization experience. Its design systematically presented you with each stage and checklists of concepts, events, and experiences that could have occurred in each stage. The usual effect of this presentation is a more detailed recall of the events and often some surprises about what you recall.

Typical reactions to the exercise results include surprise at the complexity of socialization experiences. Such complexity is a real part of our socialization experience, but it likely passes by fast as we enter a new job and a new organizational situation. The implication is clear: now you are prepared for future socialization experiences as highly complex events where you need to attend to many facets.

Other reactions include a heightened sensitivity and understanding of the socialization stages. If the end of your entry/encounter stage included a ceremony, then you had a clear separation between that stage and the change: metamorphosis stage. More likely there was no ceremony, so the stages flowed and blended.

Students also surprise themselves with their recall of what they knew at the choice: anticipatory stage. The surprises include feelings of deception because they now remember learning little about their potential employer that matched reality. Another surprise comes from recalling how accurately the organization portrayed itself, making the entry/encounter transition much smoother.

Discuss your results with other students in your class or with friends whom you ask to complete the exercise. The similarities and contrasts you can find will both surprise and inform you about organizational socialization processes.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 7.

achievement motivation theory (McClelland)

Focuses on the need for achievement, the need for power, and the need for affiliation; each need is associated with different behaviors.

behavior theory

In hierarchy of needs theory (Maslow), a person’s desire to give and receive affection and to be in the company of others.

cognitive theories

Theories of motivation that use internal psychological states to explain human motivation.

deficiency cycle

In E.R.G. theory, the condition when an individual cannot satisfy existence needs and comes to desire them ever more strongly.

dissatisfiers

See hygiene factors.

E.R.G. theory

An extension of hierarchy of needs theory (Maslow) that focuses on three groups of needs that form a hierarchy: existence, relatedness, and growth. A need does not have to be fully satisfied for upward movement to occur; downward movement can occur when a need is frustrated.

enrichment cycle

In E.R.G. theory, the condition when a person satisfies growth needs and comes to desire ever more growth.

esteem needs

In Maslow's theory, a person's desire to be valued by others and the desire to have a feeling of self-worth.

existence needs

In E.R.G. theory, a person's physical and material wants.

frustration-regression

A form of movement in E.R.G. theory in which behavior focuses on lower level needs when a person is frustrated in satisfying a higher level need.

growth needs

In E.R.G. theory, the desires to be creative and productive, to use one's skills, and to develop additional capabilities.

hierarchy of needs theory (Maslow)

hygiene factors (dissatisfiers)

In Herzberg's theory, factors in the work context that can lead to high levels of dissatisfaction; improving them leads only to less dissatisfaction, not to higher satisfaction.

motivator-hygiene theory (Herzberg)

Distinguishes factors in the job (motivators) from those in the work context (hygiene factors). The motivators contribute directly to motivation; the hygiene factors can lead to dissatisfaction but not to motivation.

motivators (satisfiers)

In Herzberg's theory, factors in the job or an individual's personal response to job and work experiences that can lead to satisfaction.

Murray's theory of human personality

A motivation theory that holds that both internal factors (physical or psychological needs) and factors in the external environment govern human behavior; allows for a complex collection of needs that often serve as multiple bases of behavior.

need

Latent internal characteristic activated by stimuli or objects a person experiences. The person tries to behave in a way that satisfies an activated need.

need for achievement

In McClelland's theory, the desire to solve problems, achieve goals, and overcome obstacles.

need for affiliation

In McClelland's theory, the desire to establish, maintain, and restore positive affective relations with others.

need for power

In McClelland's theory, the desire to control the means of affecting the behavior of another person.

need hierarchy

In Maslow's theory, the order in which people must satisfy needs; once lower-level needs are satisfied, the needs on the next level become the focus of behavior. From the bottom, the needs are physiological needs, safety needs, belongingness and love needs, esteem needs, and self-actualization needs.

need theories

Motivation theories that use personal characteristics or attributes to explain motivation. See also Murray, Maslow, and McClelland theories.

physical needs

In Murray's theory of human personality, concerned with satisfaction of basic human physical processes; e.g., needs for food, air, and water.

physiological needs

In Maslow's theory, the basic requirements of the human body; e.g., food, water, sleep, and sex.

prepotency

In Maslow's theory, the idea that lower level needs, e.g., physiological and safety needs, dominate human behavior when all needs are unsatisfied.

psychological needs

In Murray's theory of human personality, needs that focus on emotional and mental satisfaction; e.g., need for social interaction and a need to reach difficult goals.

relatedness needs

In E.R.G. theory, the desires to have interpersonal relationships and to develop intimate relationships.

safety needs

In Maslow's theory, a person's desire to be protected from physical or economic harm.

satisfaction progression

In E.R.G. theory, a form of movement in which a person's behavior focuses on the next higher level of needs as one level is satisfied.

satisfiers.

See motivators.

self-actualization needs

In Maslow's theory, the desire for self-fulfillment.


Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Enhancing and sustaining employee motivation is a major management function
    2. Psychologists have developed many theories of motivation to explain why people ¬behave one way and not another
    3. Assumptions underlying the theories
    4. Definition: Motivation is a psychological process that causes the arousal, direction, and persistence of voluntary goal directed behavior.
    5. Importance of understanding motivation
      1. Develop an overall understanding of human motivation and behavior
      2. Applies to your work and nonwork life (e.g., behavior in your family, informal social behavior among friends).
      3. Develop an understanding of your behavior as an employee. Managers have a wide range of choices in shaping and affecting behavior. Helpful for you to understand what a manager may try on you.
      4. You as a manager. What is available to you to shape and affect the behavior of those working for you.
  2. Overview of Where We are Headed
    1. Two groups of motivation theories
      1. Need theories: this chapter
      2. Cognitive theories: Chapter 8, “Motivation: Cognitive and Behavioral Theoriesand Techniques”
    2. Need theories use personal characteristics or attributes to explain motivation
      1. Murray’s theory of human personality
      2. Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory
      3. E.R.G. theory
      4. McClelland’s achievement motivation theory
    3. Herzberg’s motivator-hygiene theory: as a transition between the need and cognitive theories
    4. Cognitive and behavioral theories use psychological processes or external events to explain motivation
      1. Expectancy theory describes the decision process people use in choosing among courses of action
      2. Equity theory describes how and why people react to feelings of unfairness
      3. Goal setting theory explains how goals affect people’s performance
      4. Behavior modification emphasizes the role of external results in shaping human behavior
  3. Murray's Theory of Human Personality: The Concept of Needs
    1. Description
      1. Many needs
        1. Viscerogenic needs (physiological needs)
        2. Psychogenic needs (psychological needs)
      2. Needs are leanred. The psychological needs
      3. No hierarchy. More than one need can activate behavior
    2. Characteristics of needs
      1. Needs are latent until made manifest by cues from the environment
      2. Environment changes throughout the day, meaning a person may satisfy many different needs
    3. Implications of the theory for behavior in organizations
  4. Maslow's Hierarchy of Needs Theory
    1. Description. Categories of the above needs. Basic need categories for all persons. All people have these categories of needs to some degree.
      1. Developed from his clinical work
      2. Needs
        1. Physiological
        2. Safety
        3. Belongingness and love
        4. Esteem
        5. Self-actualization
      3. Hierarchy of needs
        1. Satisfaction-progression
        2. One need at a time
  5. E.R.G. Theory
    1. Modification and extension of Maslow's theory
    2. Three levels to the hierarchy: existence, relatedness, and growth needs
    3. Movement through the need hierarchy
      1. Satisfaction-progression
      2. Frustration-regression (new); behavior will change
    4. Two conceptual extensions
      1. Deficiency cycle—related to existence needs
      2. Enrichment cycle—related to growth needs
  6. McClelland's Achievement Motivation Theory
    1. Background
    2. Definition and description
      1. Need for achievement
      2. Need for power
      3. Need for affiliation
    3. Need for achievement. Of greatest concern to McClelland and his colleagues.
    4. Need for achievement and behavior in organizations
      1. Role of money and its use as a reward for behavior
      2. Challenging work (job design)
      3. Need for achievement and entrepreneurial behavior
      4. Interactions among the three needs
        1. Need for achievement and need for power. Both lead to different types of assertive behavior. Management style.
        2. Need for power and need for affiliation. Interact to produce either totalitarian methods of control or more democratic (concern for people).
    5. Acquisition of need for achievement. Can be learned.
  7. Herzberg's Motivator-Hygiene Theory
    1. Widely known by practicing managers
    2. Brief history. Samples and satisfiers/dissatisfiers
    3. Two factors
    4. Motivator and hygiene factors
    5. Usefulness
      1. Extrinsic and intrinsic factors in motivation
      2. Distraction effect of dissatisfying hygiene factors
  8. International Aspects of the Need Theories of Motivation
    1. The need theories described in this chapter were all the work of U.S. scholars. A major issue centers on whether these theories are culture bound. Although the concept of needs holds across cultures, people with different cultural backgrounds can express and satisfy those needs differently. Each need theory described in this chapter has a different application from culture to culture
    2. Maslow's need hierarchy theory
      1. Different needs appear as a driving force in different countries
        1. U.S. and self-actualization
        2. Security and affiliation needs in Latin America
        3. Cooperative and affiliation orientation in New Zealand
        4. France and Germany high in security
      2. Hofstede's analysis says differences among the central values of different countries imply differences in saliency of the needs in the hierarchy. Suggests different needs at the top of the hierarchy for different cultures. Offers a motivational map of the world.
    3. McClelland's Need Theory
      1. Some cross-cultural research suggests it is robust.
      2. Hofstede questions that view. McClelland's achievement motive and the related theories are tied to U.S. values of desire for action and accomplishment. His quadrant 1 countries got high need for achievement scores in McClelland's research. An emphasis on need for achievement and self-actualization assumes cultural values of risk taking and performance. Argues that the word is almost untranslatable. He felt there were clear differences among countries in the value of achievement. An appropriate concept only for the Anglo-American countries, India, South Africa, the Philippines, and Hong Kong.
    4. Herzberg's two-factor theory. Because it is closely tied to the Maslow Hierarchy of Needs, many comments above apply here also. Some empirical research in different countries showed differences in motivators and hygiene factors.
    5. Summarize implications of above
  9. Ethical Issues and the Need Theories of Motivation
    1. Set of broad ethical issues created by our knowledge of human motivation. These issues will increasingly crystallize in the next two motivation chapters.
    2. A general ethical issue of directly affecting the behavior of employees without their informed consent.
      1. Utilitarian analysis would ask about the total effects
      2. Rights and justice would ask different questions
      3. Ethical egoism would say it is right for a manager to have that effect because it meets his interests, such as the performance of work unit and its effect on his career.
    3. People's needs and the design of work experiences. Is there an ethical requirement that organizations create work experiences and work environments that let people satisfy their needs? Such an argument was the centerpiece of much early normative management theory and the Quality of Working Life efforts started in the 1970s.
    4. The evidence presented for cultural differences in people's needs implies an ethical question of whether managers and their organizations are required to consider such differences in designing work experiences in their multinational operations. Should they consider such differences and manage those operations according to the needs of people in the host culture? Or should they manage those operations as if they were in their home culture? Both utilitarian and rights analyses point to yes. Managing for congruency with local people's needs could lead to high performance (utilitarian). A rights view suggests that people simply have the right of congruence with their needs in their work experiences.

Chapter Overview

Chapter 7 describes the need theories of motivation beginning with Henry Murray's theory of human personality. Murray's theory offers a clear understanding of the concept of need and its role in shaping behavior. The chapter discusses Maslow's classic hierarchy of needs followed by a more current view of a need hierarchy offered by E.R.G. theory. This chapter links the two theories to show the similarities and differences between them.

The chapter then presents some results of David McClelland's theory and research with achievement, power, and affiliation needs. This section makes strong connections between these three needs and behavior in organizations. Herzberg's motivator-hygiene theory closes the theory discussion in this chapter.

learning goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Discuss the role of needs in behavior in organizations.
  • Describe the major need theories of motivation.
  • Appreciate that the importance of individual needs varies from person to person.
  • Outline how a person can learn some needs.
  • Distinguish between motivator and hygiene factors in a person's environment.
  • Discuss the international and ethical issues in motivation.

Personal and Management Implications

A major management implication of the need theories derives from the theories' emphasis on variations in the needs people try to satisfy. The theories strongly suggest that managers will need to understand their subordinates' need structures. Such understanding is necessary if managers want to affect levels of motivation and performance, but it becomes more complex when managing in an international environment. The needs that are common in the manager's home environment will not always be widespread in another country. Managers also should remember that people often do not try to satisfy all their needs at work. Many seek their need satisfactions in activities away from work1.
How will you find out what your subordinates important needs are? Ask them. Think about their interests. Get to know them as people. To use a popular phrase, you will be asking "Where are you coming from?" If your subordinates cannot easily describe their needs, refer to the descriptions of behavior of people with different needs earlier in this chapter. Those descriptions will help you infer some needs from their behavior.
You may need to use a different management or leadership style for people with different needs. People with strong achievement needs will likely not require close supervision. Such people will respond to task assignments they can achieve alone. Strongly affiliative people, however, may not enjoy task assignments requiring them to work alone.
Which of McClelland's motivation types fits you? If you are strong in achievement motivation, you want to do tasks with some risk and want to be responsible for the outcomes of those tasks. These implications apply equally to management and nonmanagement people.
If you believe you are strong in power motivation, reflect upon which of McClelland's two types of power you represent. Power motivation expressed as persuasion and interpersonal influence is the type McClelland felt characterized effective leaders. He felt power motivation expressed as dominance was less effective. If you are now a manager, or aspire to a management career, reflect upon which type of power fits you more closely. The information in these motivation chapters gives you guidelines for shaping and affecting other people's behavior.
If you are strong in affiliation motivation, you like to be around other people and want to be liked by others. If your present job restricts your interactions with people, you probably are not highly motivated or satisfied by it. You also could enjoy being a manager because that job usually requires interaction with many people.
E.R.G. theory described an "enrichment cycle" as possible for those who satisfy growth needs and then desire them more strongly. This is a form of self-motivation that will be useful to you as a manager. A key issue here is how to cause an enrichment cycle in another person.


1. Champoux, J. E. 1981. A Sociological Perspective on Work Involvement. International Review of Applied Psychology 30: 65–86.


Chapter Summary

Murray’s theory of human personality is a broad and complex picture of needs and behavior. His theory allowed for a complex collection of needs that often served as multiple bases of behavior.

Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory and the changes made to it by E.R.G. theory suggest that some needs that can be a source of motivation are stronger than others. Those needs can dominate the attention of the person for some time.

McClelland’s achievement motivation theory gave much detail about the behavior associated with three needs, especially the need for achievement. The behaviors associated with the needs for achievement and power were both important for success in organizations, although for different reasons.

Herzberg’s motivator-hygiene theory distinguished factors in the job itself from those in the work context. Factors in the job were the motivators; those in the work context were the hygiene factors. The motivators directly added to motivation. Hygiene factors could lead to dissatisfaction, but improving them would not lead to motivation.

The international aspects of the need theories suggested that these theories are culture bound. Although the concept of needs holds across cultures, people with different cultural backgrounds can have different patterns of needs, motivators, and hygiene factors.

The discussion of ethical issues surrounding the need theories of motivation focused on broad ethical issues created by a manager’s knowledge of human motivation. Those issues will crystallize in the next two motivation chapters as we build more detailed theories of human motivation.

Hierarchy of Needs Theory (Maslow) and E.R.G. Theory

Discuss the similarities and differences between Maslow's hierarchy of needs theory and E.R.G. theory. What insight do you gain from each theory?

E.R.G. Theory: Satisfaction-Progression and Frus¬tration-Regression

Discuss the satisfaction-progression and ¬frus¬tration-regression principles from E.R.G. theory. Give examples of the functioning of each principle.

McClelland's Two Types of Need for Power

Discuss the different ways of expressing the need for power as described in McClelland's achievement motivation theory. Which of the two types of power do you respond to best? Why?

Herzberg’s Motivator-Hygiene Theory

Which parts of Herzberg’s motivator-hygiene theory made useful contributions to understanding motivation in organizations?

Money as a Motivator

What is the relationship between monetary rewards and different needs? How should managers view money as a motivator for people with different needs?

International Aspects of the Need Theories

Discuss the international aspects of the need ¬theories described in textbook Chapter 7.

Ethical Issues and the Need Theories of Motivation

Review the discussion of ethical issues and the need theories of motivation. Discuss those issues with the goal of taking a strong position on them.

The Odd Couple (1968)

Mismatched Oscar Madison (Walter Matthau) and Felix Ungar (Jack Lemmon) share Oscar's apartment. Sloppy and disorganized Oscar must contend with the tidy and controlled Felix. Many funny moments unfold as Oscar desires to live alone and Felix continues his controlling behavior.

These scenes start with DVD Chapter 4, “Impossible to Live With”. Oscar enters the room while saying, “Oh, Felix, Felix, Felix, Felix.” They end as Felix and Oscar leave a park bench (Stop: DVD Chapter 5, “Oscar's Proposal,” 0:40:28).

The following questions can guide your viewing of these scenes: Which needs discussed in this chapter best fit Oscar and Felix? Are their need patterns the same or do they differ?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Toy Story (1995)1

This captivating and emotionally deep story tells what we have always imagined. Toys have a life and social organization of their own when humans are not present.

Andy's (voiced by John Morris) favorite toy is Sheriff Woody (voiced by Tom Hanks). He receives a new toy as a birthday gift, Buzz Lightyear, Space Ranger (voiced by Tim Allen). Buzz's presence disrupts the established social order, especially Woody's senior status among the toys. Concern about continuing as Andy's favorite causes conflict between Woody, Buzz, and the other toys. The tension increases because Buzz thinks he is a real space ranger, not a toy. Watch for the early scene of Mr. Potato Head (voiced by Don Rickles) calling the hockey puck a hockey puck! This is the first computer-animated feature-length film.2

This scene starts with an outside shot of Sid's (voiced by Erik von Detten) house during a thunderstorm (DVD Chapter 23, “Buzz, I Can't Do This without You”). Woody is trapped under a box and needs Buzz's help to get out. Buzz had earlier seen a television commercial advertising him as a toy, his first sense of not being a real space ranger. The scene ends as Sid's alarm clock rings. It falls to the floor as Sid wakes up (Stop 1:00:33).

Consider the following questions while viewing this scene: Do Woody and Buzz need each other to solve the problem of getting out of Sid's room? What is Buzz's level of self-esteem at this point? How does Woody motivate Buzz? Does he improve Buzz's self-esteem? If yes, how?

Notes

1. From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resources, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc. Reproduced by permission. www.cengage.com/permissions

2. Champoux, J. E. 2001. Animated Film as a Teaching Resource. Journal of Management Education 25: 78–99.

Motivation: Your Profile of Needs

This exercise presented you with a list of needs derived from Murray’s theory of human personality. The list included needs that typically motivate behavior in work organizations. Many other needs exist; so do not conclude that these are the only ones motivating your behavior.

The results of the first part of the exercise show you which needs are the most important to you and which needs are the least important. Need for achievement often appears at the top of the ranking. Some people also have the need for order in the top part of their list. Need for affiliation varies in ranking, because of wide variations in people’s desires to interact with a wide range of other people. Still other people will have a high ranking for the need for nurturance, especially if they work in a helping occupation such as a nurse or a firefighter.

Do not be surprised or concerned that your ranking does not match any pattern just described. The need profile you derived from the exercise is for you, not anyone else. You can go back to a copy of the completed exercise and study your pattern. Compare it to this chapter’s description of the needs in the exercise table.

The E.R.G. theory portion of the exercise focused you on some dynamics in a possible hierarchy of needs. Most people do not now experience the deficiency cycle, although some report that they have in the past. The upward movement (satisfaction progression) and downward movement (frustration regression) appear for many people, after they have reflected on a series of motivational experiences. Each such result reinforces these dynamics of E.R.G. theory in your experiences.

Most people who complete this exercise report experiencing the enrichment cycle, but not in all situations or work experiences. The experiences that satisfy growth or achievement needs are the ones most likely to trigger an enrichment cycle. If you have had such an experience, you confirm this part of E.R.G theory for yourself.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 8.

change inputs

An inequity response; change inputs in different directions depending on whether perceived inequity is positive or negative. For negative inequity, an individual might reduce effort and productivity; for positive inequity, the individual might increase those inputs.

change outcomes

An inequity response; person might try to improve outcomes by asking for an increase in pay.

cognitively distort inputs and outcomes

An inequity response; change perceptions of inputs or outcomes. Overpayment: begin to “see” more responsibility and duties in the job. Underpayment: reduce the perceived importance of the job by suggesting to themselves that “it is just another job.”

withdrawal

An inequity response; withdraw from the situation that produced the feeling of inequity. Includes permanent withdrawal, such as leaving the company or temporary withdrawal such as increased absences.

acting on other

An inequity response; take action against the comparison person.

cognitively distort inputs and outcomes of other

An inequity response; change perceptions of inputs or outcomes of comparison other. A person who feels overpaid might assign more importance to the task of the other party than in the past.

change reference groups or the comparison person

An inequity response; person who feels underpaid compared to someone else in the organization might shift to a different comparison person.

instrumentality

See performance-outcome expectancy.

other

The person or event to which one compares during an equity assessment.

outcomes

The positive or negative results a person receives from the employment exchange; include pay, fringe benefits, working conditions, and coworkers.

person

The individual making the comparison during an equity assessment. See also other.

schedules of reinforcement

In behavior modification, the timing of the reinforcement of behavior based on the time between behaviors or the number of behaviors.

procedural justice

Focuses on equity in decision-making processes that decide the distribution of costs and benefits. See also distributive justice.

behavior modification

An approach to motivation that relies on various techniques of controlling the consequences of behavior to direct and shape behavior; assumes people choose behavior that has positive outcomes and avoid behavior that has unpleasant outcomes.

continuous reinforcement

A system of timing reinforcement that applies a consequence after each behavior.

deficiency cycle

In E.R.G. theory, the condition when an individual cannot satisfy existence needs and comes to desire them ever more strongly.

distributive justice

Focuses on fairness or equity in the distribution of costs and benefits. See also procedural justice.

effort-performance expectancy (EP)

A concept of expectancy theory; refers to a person's belief that effort leads to a desired or required level of performance.

enrichment cycle

In E.R.G. theory, the condition when a person satisfies growth needs and comes to desire ever more growth.

equity

The condition that exists when a person perceives the person’s ratio of outcomes received from an employment exchange and the inputs the person brings to it as roughly equal to coworkers' ratio of outcomes and inputs.

equity sensitivity

The degree of response to a state of inequity; can be one of three types: equity sensitive, benevolent, or entitled.

equity sensitive

One of three types of equity sensitivity; person reacts to felt inequity as described by equity theory.

benevolent

One of three types of equity sensitivity; person accepts negative inequity and does not try to reduce the feeling as described by equity theory.

entitled

One of three types of equity sensitivity; person has a high inequity threshold and accepts positive inequity with no guilt feelings.

equity theory

A theory of motivation that focuses on exchange relationships and holds that people try to balance the ratios of outputs to inputs in such relationships.

expectancy theory

A theory of motivation that focuses on the internal processes and holds that people try to maximize the outcomes of behavior and choose among outcomes based on this maximization.

extinction

A means of behavior modification in which a positive event is withdrawn to decrease the frequency of undesirable behavior.

extrinsic outcomes

Outcomes for performance that people receive from someone else.

fixed interval schedule

A consequence is applied after a constant time between behaviors; e.g., receiving a pay check at the end of each pay period.

fixed ratio schedule

A consequence is applied after a fixed number of behaviors; e.g., sales commissions.

goal setting theory

Holds that specific, challenging, reachable, and accepted goals lead to higher performance than goals without those characteristics.

individual blockages

Obstacles deriving from a person's skills and abilities, both real and perceived; task experience and task difficulty that cause the person to perceive a low effort-performance expectancy.

inequity

The condition that exists when a person perceives the ratio of outcomes she receives from an employment exchange and the inputs she brings to it as unequal to a coworkers' ratio of outcomes and inputs; two forms of inequity: negative inequity ("underpayment") and positive inequity ("overpayment").

negative inequity

A person’s feeling of underpayment for what they give to the organization.

positive inequity

A person’s feeling of overpayment for what they give to the organization.

inequity responses

Include changing inputs or outcomes, cognitively distorting own inputs and outcomes, withdrawing, taking action against or changing the comparison person, and cognitively distorting the inputs and outcomes of the comparison person.

inputs

In equity theory, the personal characteristics and behaviors a person brings to the employment exchange.

intermittent reinforcement

A system of timing reinforcement that applies a consequence based on the time between behaviors or the number of behaviors.

intrinsic outcomes

Rewards for a performance that people give to themselves, e.g., satisfaction for completing a challenging task.

negative inequity

The condition that exists when people feel underpaid for what they give the organization.

negative reinforcement

A means of behavior modification in which a negative event is withdrawn or withheld to increase the frequency of desirable behavior.

organizational blockages

Barriers inherent in an organization, such as a lack of resources or high levels of conflict, that cause people to perceive a low effort-performance expectancy.

performance-outcome expectancy (PO)

A concept of expectancy theory that describes the perceived connection between a person's performance and any outcomes the person may get for that performance. Also called instrumentality.

positive reinforcement

A means of behavior modification that applies a positive event to increase the frequency or strength of desirable behavior.

principle of contingent reinforcement

A behavior modification principle; a consequence has its strongest effect on behavior only if delivered when the desired behavior occurs.

principle of immediate reinforcement

A behavior modification principle; a consequence has its strongest effect on behavior if it occurs immediately after the behavior happens.

principle of reinforcement size

A behavior modification principle; large consequences have stronger effects on behavior than small consequences.

principle of reinforcement deprivation

A behavior modification principle; the longer a person is deprived of a reinforcer, the stronger its effect on behavior in the future.

punishment

A means of behavior modification that applies a negative event to decrease the frequency or strength of undesirable behavior.

shaping

A behavior modification technique designed to make gradual changes in a person's behavior while aiming for a target behavior.

side effects of punishment

Can include emotional reactions such as anger, inflexible behavior, failure to learn new desirable behavior, and the development of negative feelings toward the source of the punishment.

valence (V)

An expectancy theory concept that refers to the preference people have among outcomes.

variable interval schedule

A consequence follows a varying number of behaviors; e.g., giving people time off for meeting goals but not doing it each time they meet goals.

variable ratio schedule

A consequence is applied after different periods between behaviors; e.g., random praise for employee performance.

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Structure of cognitive theories
    2. Structure of behavioral theories
    3. Comparison to the need theories described in Chapter 7, “Motivation: Need Theories.” The cognitive theories do not concern themselves with how needs or cognitions are acquired. The need theories in Chapter 7 described much of this.
  2. Expectancy Theory
    1. Basic concepts of expectancy theory
      1. Expectancy: a belief that a particular act will be followed by a particular outcome. Certain the outcome will happen = 1; certain the outcome will not happen = 0; ranges fcbetween 0 and 1.
      2. Two types of expectancies
        1. Effort-Performance expectancy (E P). Perception of a person's effort leading to the desired level of performance. No guarantee the person will perform as required. Multiple levels of effort and performance.
        2. Performance-Outcome expectancy (P O). Perception of getting a specific outcome for performance. Instrumentality in some formulations. Multiple outcomes.
        3. Managers can affect expectancies both directly and indirectly
      3. Valence of the outcomes
        1. + = attracted to outcome (traveling to Boston or San Francisco)
        2. 0 = indifference to the outcome (traveling to Hollywood)
        3. - = avoid the outcome (traveling to Plainview, Texas)
        4. Can take on a wide range of values which expresses the degree of attractiveness or avoidance of the outcome. Example: grades
        5. Managers actions do not tend to affect valences
    2. Relationships between expectancies and valences (formula for model)
    3. Types of outcomes
      1. Extrinsic outcomes. Controlled by someone outside the person. Time delay often between performance and receiving the reward.
      2. Intrinsic outcomes. Controlled by the individual. Little if any time delay between performance and the reward
      3. Relationship of each to needs
        1. Extrinsic: can be related to many needs.
        2. Intrinsic: related to higher-level needs such as esteem and self-actualization
    4. Individual and organizational blockages
      1. Individual blockages: skills, abilities, task assignments, experience with the requested behavior
      2. Organizational blockages: resources, training, and conflict levels
  3. Equity Theory
    1. Views social relationships as exchange relationships. In any exchange, one party could feel unfairly treated. Especially important in employee exchanges and other transactions in the work setting involving extrinsic rewards. Can be a direct exchange relationship or a relationship with a third party such as an employer.
    2. Part of larger concern with organizational justice
      1. Distributive justice
        1. Fairness in distribution of rewards and costs
        2. Example: giving pay increases and promotions
      2. Procedural Justice
        1. Fairness of decision-making procedure for distributing rewards and costs
        2. Example: deciding the pay increases and promotions
      3. Equity theory focuses on distributive justice
    3. Inputs
      1. What is brought to the social exchange
      2. As perceived by the contributor
      3. Contributor determines relevance to the exchange relationship
      4. Example: merit versus seniority pay raises
    4. Outcomes
      1. Relevance as perceived by recipient
      2. Positively valent
      3. Negatively valent
    5. Person and other
    6. Equity defined
      • Op   Oa
        — = —
        Ip      Ia

    7. Inequity defined
      1. Underpayment (Negative Inequity)

        Op    Oa
        — < —
        Ip      Ia

      2. Overpayment (Positive Inequity)

         Op    Oa
        — > —
        Ip     Ia

      3. The threshold of inequity is higher in the overpayment case
    8. O and I are weighted sums of individual outcomes and inputs.
    9. Note the central role of perception in the equity comparison
    10. Responses to inequity. Try to change any of the four elements of the inequity formula
      1. Change inputs
        1. Negative inequity: reduce productivity or quality of output
        2. Positive inequity: increase productivity or quality of output. Less likely to occur than (1) because of threshold effect.
      2. Change outcomes. Asking for a pay increase is the most likely. Union wage negotiations.
      3. Cognitive distortion of own inputs and outcomes. Constrained by realities. Alter utility, relevance, and importance. See more variety in the job.
      4. Withdrawal. Temporary and permanent
      5. Acting on other
      6. Cognitively distort inputs and outcomes of the other
      7. Change the other
    11. Equity Sensitivity
      1. Equity sensitives: react as theory predicts
      2. Benevolents: accept negative inequity
      3. Entitleds: accept positive inequity with no guilt
  4. Goal Setting Theory
    1. Description
    2. Goal setting steps
    3. Links to expectancy theory
  5. Behavior Modification
    1. Technique built from operant conditioning and reinforcement theory.
    2. Principles underlying behavior modification
    3. A method of behavior modification
      1. Positive reinforcement
      2. Punishment
      3. Extinction
      4. Negative reinforcement
    4. Schedules of reinforcement
      1. Continuous reinforcement
      2. Intermittent reinforcement
        1. Fixed ratio
        2. Variable ratio
        3. Fixed interval
        4. Variable interval
    5. Shaping
    6. Side effects of punishment
  6. International Aspects of the Cognitive and Behavioral Theoies of Motivation
    1. The theories described in this chapter have two underlying assumptions. The first says that the individual controls her decisions about future actions. The second says a manager can deliberately shape the behavior of the people who work for her. Both assumptions probably reflect U.S. values.
    2. Expectancy theory
      1. Has strong roots in U.S. values. Strong individualism leads to a need to explain our actions as ways of getting something for them or satisfying some need. Is it culture bound?
      2. Expectancy theory emphasizes individual control, a strong U.S. value but not characteristic of all cultures. Examples. Does not apply in those cultures.
      3. The discussion of the international aspects of need theories in Chapter 7 highlighted the large differences among cultures in what people felt were their most important needs and values. Such differences will have strong affects on the types of outcomes people from different cultures with see as positively valent. Examples.
      4. Has more cross-cultural application if we recognize major differences in what workers in different countries will view as positively valent.
    3. Equity theory in collectivistic societies
    4. Goal setting theory
  7. Ethical Issues in the Cognitive and Behavioral Theories of Motivation
    1. This chapter gave you more information about motivation and shaping the behavior of other people. The theories discussed are especially powerful ways of affecting another person's behavior. We continue our ethical dialogue about motivation in organizations by focusing on issues raised by each theory
    2. General ethical issues
      1. Goals of using knowledge of motivation. Openness about those goals.
      2. Equity and the ethics of deliberately creating a condition of perceived negative inequity with the purpose of driving an employee out of the organization.
      3. Should managers use their knowledge of human motivation to aim people's behavior in an ethical direction?
      4. Punishment and justice in shaping ethical behavior
    3. Behavior modification is a powerful method of controlling human behavior. It often leaves people feeling uneasy about its use. Individual freedom and autonomy.
      1. The question of control
      2. Controlling the controllers

Chapter Overview

Chapter 8 describes the cognitive and behavioral theories and techniques of motivation. The cognitive theories are expectancy theory, equity theory, and goal setting. Expectancy theory describes internal processes of choice among different behaviors. Equity theory describes how people react when they feel unfairly treated by a manager. Goal setting theory emphasizes setting external goals that a person tries to reach. The chapter fully develops each theory and shows their analytical strength for assessing motivational issues and problems in organizations.
The chapter then turns to behavior modification. This theory does not use internal psychological processes to explain human behavior, which is sometimes a controversial feature of behavior modification. Chapter 8 shows behavior modification’s practical use without laboring over details of the underlying theory of operant conditioning.

learning goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Describe how people develop expectations about what will happen to them.
  • Analyze differences in the values people place on the results of their behavior.
  • Distinguish the differences between extrinsic and intrinsic outcomes.
  • Discuss the role of equity in human motivation and behavior.
  • Use the techniques of goal setting.
  • Describe the powerful technique of behavior modification.
  • Discuss some international aspects of motivation.
  • Contrast some ethical issues that surround motivation and behavior in organizations.

Personal and Management implications

The concept of valence from expectancy theory has important implications for you in the job you now have and whatever career you pursue in the future. What do you strongly value? If what you value is not used to reward your performance in your present job, you will probably not be highly motivated except by intrinsic outcomes. Think about the career you are headed toward. Will it let you get what you find positively valent?

Expectancy Theory recommends that managers closely tie valued outcomes to their subordinates' job performance. Many organizations do not give managers the flexibility they need to follow this recommendation. Other organizations give considerable discretion to managers and supervisors. In both instances, managing the equitable distribution of extrinsic outcomes is not easy.

When doing your present job, or any job in the future, pay special attention to blockages between your effort and performance. Although some blockages may be individual (skills and experience), managers are responsible for clearing many of them. If the managers do not remove the blockages, you may experience frustration when doing your job, and your motivation may drop as a result. Your college preparation right now is trying to clear individual blockages between your effort and performance in the future.

Managing the blockages that can reduce the effort-performance expectancy is an important part of the job of managing motivation. Subordinates may not always tell you they cannot do a task assignment. They may not tell you because they do not know or because they are not comfortable discussing their deficiency with you. If their performance is not as high as you expected, look for individual blockages. You may find the employees do not have the necessary skills and abilities. You could then give them training to do the task well or break up the task into more manageable parts.

The technique of behavior modification is clear about what it wants a supervisor or manager to do in directing and shaping behavior. In the future, you may find yourself faced with the opportunity to use Behavior Modification. Only you can decide the answers to the ethical questions raised in the text.


Chapter Summary

This chapter focused on motivation from two perspectives: one perspective was external to the individual, and the other was internal. Expectancy theory explains different internal states of the process of motivation. The effort-performance expectancy is the perceived connection between an individual’s effort and performance. Both individual and organizational blockages reduce the belief that a person’s effort will lead to a given level of performance. A second expectancy describes the perceived connection between performance and the outcomes for performance. The performance-outcome expectancy is a person’s belief that performance will be followed by one or more ­extrinsic or intrinsic outcomes. Of great importance is the valence, or value, put on those outcomes. Managers need to focus on what subordinates value for their performance and then reward good performance with valued outcomes.

Equity theory showed us that a manager must be careful when using extrinsic outcomes for job performance. If a person feels inequitably treated, the individual might decrease performance or leave the organization.

Goal setting theory describes other ways of directing and shaping a person’s behavior. Goals that are specific, challenging, reachable, and accepted by a person lead to higher performance than goals that do not have those characteristics. Managers can follow the goal setting steps to improve a subordinate’s performance.

Behavior modification does not use cognitive processes to describe human motivation and behavior; rather it looks outside the individual at the consequences of a person’s behavior. The techniques of behavior modification center on controlling those consequences to direct and shape behavior.

U.S. scholars developed the motivation theories described in this chapter. Those theories have some underlying assumptions that reflect U.S. values of free will and individualism. The “International Aspects” section discussed whether the assumptions limit the application of these theories in countries outside the United States.

Several ethical issues emerge from the motivation theories in this chapter. The most basic issue is whether managers should tell employees that they will try to affect their behavior by various motivational approaches. Other issues derive from behavior modification because a manager, or any person, can clearly use it for good or evil ends.

Job Performance and Outcomes

What is your experience with the connection ¬between job performance and outcomes? Were positive outcomes used more often than negative outcomes?

Individual and Organizational Blockages

Have you experienced blockages between your effort and performance? Were they individual or organizational blockages? What form did the blockages take? What did you or your manager or supervisor do about the blockages?

Equity and Inequity Reactions

Review the various reactions to inequity described in textbook Chapter 8. How have you reacted to inequity in the past?

Comparison Other

To whom have you compared yourself in the past when making equity comparisons? Under what circumstances have you changed your comparison other?

Goal Setting Theory

Discuss goal setting theory and its several steps for setting goals. Would you expect such activities to have a positive effect on your work performance?

Behavior Modification Criticisms

Review the criticisms raised about behavior modification. Discuss those criticisms. Do those criticisms limit the use of behavior modification in organizations?

International Aspects of the Cognitive and Behavioral Motivation Theories

Review the discussion of the international aspects of the motivational theories described in textbook Chapter 8.

Mr. Holland's Opus (1995)

Glenn Holland (Richard Dreyfuss) must set aside his passion for music composition and take a high school music teacher's position. He stays for 30 years, during which time he discovers his teaching gifts and ability to motivate students

These scenes begin with DVD Chapter 10, “New Assignment.” They begin on the John F. Kennedy High School's football field with Mr. Holland trying to focus his marching band. The scenes end after Lou Russ (Terrence Howard) successfully plays the bass drum (Stop: DVD Chapter 11, “Challenged,” 0:53:54).

Use the following questions as guides while viewing the scenes: How does Mr. Holland motivate Lou Russ to play the drum? Does he make gradual or large changes in Lou Russ's behavior? Assess Lou Russ's self-esteem at the beginning and end of these scenes.

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Dangerous Minds (1995)

Former U.S. Marine LouAnne Johnson (Michelle Pfeiffer) accepts a teaching job at a high school that buses in special students. They are inner city students who typically have underachieved academically. Ms. Johnson tries to motivate them to what she perceives as their likely achievement levels. The school's principal perceives her motivation methods as unorthodox and pressures her to follow the course outlines.

These scenes start with a shot of the hallway after Principal Grandey (Courtney B. Vance) reprimanded Johnson for taking students to an amusement park without signed permissions (DVD Chapter 9, “Dylan–Dylan Contest.”) Johnson's voiceover says, “Angela, would you read the first line?” Ms. Johnson then announces the Dylan-Dylan contest. These scenes end after her students draw prizes from the reward box (Stop 0:58:11). The film cuts to Ms. Johnson picking up trash in her classroom. Callie (Idina Harris) enters the classroom.

View the scene first and then answer the following questions: What methods does Ms. Johnson use to motivate her students to high performance? Does her motivation approach change the behavior of these underperforming students? Is it fair for her to reward the non-winners by letting them pick from the reward box?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Motivation and Performance Scenarios

Scenario 1: John O’Conner, Laboratory Technician

John’s motivation level is extremely low. No matter how hard he tries, he is unlikely to reach a high performance level. He values the pay increase (positive valence) and believes he will receive it if he performs as required (high performance-outcome expectancy).

The major obstacle to reaching the required performance level is the individual and organizational blockages on John’s effort-performance expectancy. He does not have the needed skills because his prior pharmaceutical work experience does not apply to ophthalmic research (individual blockage). Derrick Taylor, John’s supervisor is not providing organizational support such as training, creating a serious organizational blockage to John’s effort-performance expectancy. If Derrick values John as a potential long-term employee, he needs to help him with a training effort, either formal or informal.


Scenario 2: Crystal Martinez, Financial Analyst

Crystal likely is not highly motivated to perform even at her previous performance level following her 5 percent pay increase. She received the highest performance evaluation, but the same pay increase as her coworkers. Crystal probably feels unfairly treated (negative inequity). She could reduce her effort in the future.

Most other aspects of her motivation situation look good. She has a high positive valence on a pay increase because she wants to replace her car. Crystal also has high effort-performance expectancy because she has the skills, abilities, and education for her financial analyst position. Her performance-outcome expectancy is still high after her last pay increase, because she knows she will at least receive a 5 percent raise.

Rosemary Du Pont’s management behavior suggests she knows little about human motivation in this work situation. She needs a better understanding of motivation theories such as expectancy theory to let her react more positively to a potentially high performing employee like Crystal Martinez.


Scenario 3: Daniel Sosa, Software Development Team Leader

Daniel’s high motivation and performance comes primarily from the intrinsic rewards he experiences from his challenging job. He has high effort-performance expectancy because of his education and job experience. His performance-outcome expectancy for intrinsic rewards also is high, but his performance-outcome expectancy for extrinsic rewards is low.

We do not know Daniel’s valence on extrinsic rewards such as recognition and pay increases. He has a high positive valence on intrinsic rewards, judging from his high performance and the absence of any extrinsic rewards. Tony Montana, Daniel’s division manager, possibly is making a big mistake by not giving him recognition. There is a strong chance that Daniel could develop negative inequity feelings. Because of his skills, talent, and publicly known performance, Daniel might leave this company for employment by a competitor.


Scenario 4: Linda Nguyen, Vice President, International Marketing

Linda’s motivation and performance profile has nearly perfect characteristics. She likely has a high valence on the intrinsic and extrinsic outcomes from her job and work performance. The job has high challenge, variety, and autonomy—all of which lead to intrinsic outcomes. Her annual cash bonus is an attractive extrinsic outcome that can help keep her motivation level high.

Almost no blockages exist between Linda’s effort and performance expectancy. Her skills, abilities, and experience help keep the effort-performance expectancy high. The support by the organization also helps keep this expectancy high. Linda should continue her high level of motivation and performance well into the future.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 9.

affective outcomes

In job characteristics theory, the individual's internal reactions to a job's design; e.g., job satisfaction and motivation.

behavioral outcomes

In job characteristics theory, observed employee behavior in response to a job's design; e.g., individual productivity and quality of work.

context satisfaction

The degree of satisfaction with the work context. A moderator variable in the job characteristics theory of work motivation; can affect a person's response to the motivating potential of the job.

core job characteristics

Five characteristics identified by the job characteristics theory as inducing the critical psychological states; include skill variety, task identity, task significance, autonomy, and feedback from the job itself.

skill variety

A core job characteristic in the job characteristics theory of work motivation; degree to which the job has many different activities using several skills, abilities, and talents of the person.

task identity

A core job characteristic in the job characteristics theory of work motivation; degree to which the job lets a person do a whole piece of work from start to finish.

task significance

A core job characteristic in the job characteristics theory of work motivation; degree to which the person doing the job perceives it as important to others in the organization or clients of the organization.

autonomy

A core job characteristic in the job characteristics theory of work motivation; degree of a person’s discretion in deciding how and when to do the job.

feedback from the job itself

A core job characteristic in the job characteristics theory of work motivation; degree to which the person learns about the quality of job performance while doing the task. Feedback comes from clients directly served by the job, but not from a supervisor or coworkers.

organizational design

A factor in the context of a person’s job that can affect a job’s design and a person’s reaction to it; includes degree of specialization of division of labor and centralization or decentralization of decision making. For example, centralized decision making yields jobs low in skill variety and autonomy.

manager’s behavior

A factor in the context of a person’s job that can affect a job’s design and a person’s reaction to it; includes the degree of control of subordinates and the degree of involvement in decision making. For example, general control and delegation of decision-making authority can increase skill variety, task identity, and autonomy.

technical process

A factor in the context of a person’s job that can affect a job’s design and a person’s reaction to it; the major way the organization’s work gets done. A mass production technical process with highly standardized jobs can reduce all the core job characteristics. Moving away from mass production approaches can increase the core job characteristics.

critical psychological states

In job characteristics theory, the states that must be present to produce the highest level of positive affective and behavioral outcomes; include experienced meaningfulness of the work, responsibility for work outcomes, and knowledge of actual results of work.

experienced meaningfulness of the work

A critical psychological state; a person doing the job must experience the work as important. Work perceived as unimportant is not likely to produce high levels of affective and behavioral response.

experienced responsibility for outcomes of the work

A critical psychological state; a person must also control the outcomes of work activities. If the employee believes external factors such as coworkers, equipment, or the supervisor were responsible for job outcomes, he or she likely will not feel good about doing a good job or feel bad about doing a poor job.

knowledge of the actual results of work activities

A critical psychological state; a person must know how well or how poorly he or she is doing while doing the work itself. Neither positive nor negative feelings will result if the individual does not know the results of work activities.

general job satisfaction

A person's overall feelings about work and the work organization.

group-based job design

A job design for a task to be done by a team; must design both the task and some aspects of the group.

growth need strength (GNS)

A concept that describes the variability in growth needs among different people; a moderator variable in job characteristics theory. People with strong growth needs should respond more postively to job high in motivating potential than people with weak growth needs.

growth satisfaction

Satisfaction with personal growth and development from the work itself.

internal work motivation

A feeling of self-reward from doing a job; in job characteristics theory, the affective outcome most closely associated with work effectiveness.

job characteristics theory of work motivation

Describes how job design affects motivation, performance, and satisfaction; specifies core job characteristics that can lead to critical psychological states and induce high levels of motivation and performance; also includes individual and work context factors that can moderate those effects.

job diagnostic survey (JDS)

A questionnaire that collects data about jobs in an organization to decide whether they should be redesigned; allows calculating the Motivating Potential Score and gives information about levels of context satisfaction.

job enlargement

Added duties and tasks to a job; duties, tasks, or jobs usually were at the same level.

job enrichment

Added duties and tasks that increased the autonomy and responsibilities of a worker; also had increased involvement in decision making.

job rotation

Worker moved among different jobs; each job often had few tasks or activities; presumed less boredom from doing many different activities in a day or week.

knowledge and skill

A person with a job's required knowledge and skill should respond more positively to the job's motivating potential than a person with less knowledge and skill. A moderator variable in the job characteristics theory of work motivation; can affect a person's response to the motivating potential of the job.

moderator variables

(1) Variables that affect the relationship between independent and dependent variables; the theory guiding the researcher describes any expected moderator effects. (2) In job characteristics theory, factors in the person or the work context that affect the response to a job's motivating potential.

motivating potential

In job characteristics theory, the concept that summarizes the effect of the five core job characteristics on the critical psychological states.

self-managing workgroup

Interdependent group that produces a defined product, service, or decision and whose members control the group's task and interpersonal processes; also known as self-managing teams.

social information processing theory

Holds that interactions with other people affect a person's perception of job characteristics and that supervisors, coworkers, and the job redesign process can affect perceptions even when the job is not changed.

work effectiveness

The quality of a person’s work performance and quantity of work produced.

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Design of a job can affect a person’s motivation and satisfaction
    2. Previous two chapters suggested the importance of both extrinsic and intrinsic rewards in motivation and performance
    3. This chapter shows how a manager can create a context within which a person
  2. Intrinsic Rewards and Job Design
    1. Job rotation
    2. Job enlargement
    3. Job enrichment
  3. The Job Characteristics Theory of Work Motivation
    1. Affective and behavioral outcomes
    2. Critical psychological states
    3. Perceived and objective job characteristics
      1. Core job characteristics
      2. Motivating potential of a job
      3. Objective job characteristics
    4. Relationships predicted by the theory
      1. Main effects
      2. Moderators of the relationships in the model
        1. Knowledge and skill
        2. Growth need strength
        3. Work context
  4. Contextual Factors in Job Design
    1. Organizational design and job design
      1. Specialized division of labor
      2. Centralization, decentralization, and span of control
        1. Wide span of control: more autonomy for subordinates. Probably broader-scope jobs. Affects jobs of both supervisors and subordinates. Reverse would be true for narrow span of control.
        2. Centralized organizations imply closer supervision and less autonomy.
    2. Technical process and job design
      1. Constraint. capital investment
      2. Helps job redesign
      3. Types of technology and job design effects
    3. Management behavior and job design
      1. More about leadership and management in organizations in Chapter 12, “Leadership and Management.”
      2. Reciprocal effects
      3. Leader behavior can define content of tasks done by subordinates
        1. Close versus general supervision
        2. Participation in decision-making
  5. Diagnosing and Redesigning Jobs
  6. Group-Based Job Design
    1. Some tasks are better done by groups than by individuals.
    2. Adopting a technology that uses groups.
    3. Type of group: “self-managing work group.”
    4. Design of task and group
      1. Design of group task
        1. Built from individual job design
        2. Changing focus to a group instead of an individual
      2. Design of group
        1. Group composition
        2. Group performance norms
    5. What Are the Expectations for Group-Based Jobs?
    6. Individual and contextual considerations
      1. Need for affiliation
      2. Growth need strength
      3. Reward system
  7. Factors Affecting Perceptions of Objective Job Characteristics
    1. The social information processing theory (SIP)
      1. An alternative to the job characteristics theory
      2. Objective job characteristics exist and people perceive them
      3. Perceptions of the job characteristics are affected by the social information people get from their immediate environment, especially that received from co-workers and immediate supervisor.
      4. Many factors can affect perceptions. Reaction is to those perceptions that can be directly influenced by social information
      5. Opens the possibility that people can be affected by the manipulation of social information independently of any changes in the characteristics of their jobs as suggested by the job characteristics theory.
    2. Both theories have a place and are useful
  8. International Aspects of Job Design
    1. Differences in the needs and different cultures discussed in Chapter 7, “Motivation: Need Theories.” Implies that striving for intrinsic rewards, the basic target of job redesign, does not apply to all cultures. Not all cultures view self-actualization from work experiences as important.
    2. Changing specific job characteristics and likely reactions in different cultures. For example, autonomy and task identity. Not likely to be accepted in countries such as Belgium, Mexico, Greece, Thailand, Turkey, and France. French managers especially abhor recommendations to decentralize their decision authority and their subordinates do not expect them to do so.
    3. Individual versus group-based job design and cultural differences. Sweden and Norway especially have restructured their work systems around self-managing teams. Consistent with their more socially-oriented values, desire for quality interpersonal relationships, and little emphasis on competition among individuals.
  9. Ethical Issues in Job Design
    1. Stress effects of job design from both low-clout jobs and those that overtax people.
    2. Voluntary involvement of people in self-managing work teams for those with a low need for affiliation and little desire for team-based work. Some people do not want high involvement in their work roles, preferring high involvement in nonwork roles.
    3. Job redesign in international operations. As described in Chapter 7, people around the world differ in the needs they consider central to their personalities and lives. People in some cultures do not readily accept moving decision-making authority below managers. They perceive such decision- making as the proper role of a manager and not to be done by a nonmanager. Other cultures, such as Sweden, have been successful with self-managing work teams.

Chapter Overview

Chapter 9 presents the results of the extensive research done on the effects of job design on people's intrinsic motivation. The chapter focuses only on job design and the intrinsic rewards that can flow from work designed in specific ways.

The chapter describes the job characteristics theory of work Motivation—a motivational view of job design. It includes a discussion of the effects of several contextual factors on people's reactions to their job's design. The chapter closes with descriptions of diagnosing and redesigning jobs and group-based job design.

learning goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Discuss the role of job design in giving people opportunities to experience intrinsic rewards.
  • Describe the major job design theories.
  • Analyze how the work context affects people's reaction to the design of their jobs.
  • Explain the process of diagnosing and redesigning jobs.
  • Compare individual job design to group job design.
  • Identify some international aspects of intrinsic rewards and job design.
  • Discuss ethical issues that surround intrinsic rewards and job design.

Personal and management implications

Several important implications emerge from this chapter for you and for the design of jobs. The first is related to you as a person and the nature of the needs you are trying to satisfy at work. People, including yourself, vary in the needs they are trying to satisfy in their jobs and careers. The issue for you is the degree of congruency that exists between your need structure and the type of career you are now pursuing. A job congruent with your various needs should be highly satisfying and motivating to you.

Second, reflect upon the outcomes for your work performance that you highly value (see text Chapter 8, “Motivation: Cognitive and Behavioral Theories and Techniques”). If you place more emphasis on intrinsic outcomes, jobs designed according to the job characteristics theory should be a source of satisfaction and motivation for you. If you place more emphasis on extrinsic outcomes, the opposite conclusion is true. The intrinsic motivational qualities are less important to you than the extrinsic outcomes you get for good performance.

The last implication deals with your relative preferences for jobs designed for groups versus individuals. If you have strong affiliation needs, you should be comfortable with jobs designed for groups or teams. If your affiliation needs are weak, you should prefer jobs designed for individuals.

Managers should actively search for ways to tap the growth needs of their employees. You would like to have maximum discretion in designing jobs to fit the needs people are trying to satisfy at work. Remember, though, the importance of growth needs varies from country to country. Unfortunately, getting congruence between individual needs and job design is not always possible. The design of the organization and the underlying technical process may constrain you from being as flexible as you might prefer.

Another important issue is whether the design of jobs you manage is congruent with the organization's technical process. A highly interdependent technical process suggests using individual job design. A technical process built upon teams requires a group-based approach to job design. Incongruity between the technical process and the type of job design can lead to unnecessary frustration for your subordinates.

Changing your behavior as a manager can produce significant changes in your subordinates' job design. Delegating decision authority increases the autonomy and task significance of your subordinates' jobs. Involving subordinates in decisions can increase skill variety and task significance. If people working for you have strong achievement needs and are unhappy with the jobs they are doing, consider changing some aspects of your management behavior. The change in your behavior will lead to important changes in the design of the jobs of your subordinates. Text Chapter 12, “Leadership and Management” raises these issues when it turns to the question of leadership and management.


Chapter Summary

The job characteristics theory of work motivation describes how the design of jobs affects motivation, performance, and satisfaction. The theory specifies several core job characteristics that can affect three internal psychological states and induce high levels of motivation and performance.

The theory includes both individual and work context factors that can affect (moderate) the expected positive relationships between job characteristics and levels of motivation and performance. The strength of a person’s need for growth on the job must be strong for a high positive response to the job’s characteristics. Many other factors in the work context can help or hinder job design such as an organization’s design, its technical process, and management behavior.

The diagnosis and redesign of jobs start by getting information about the present state of jobs using a questionnaire similar to the job diagnostic survey (JDS). Data collected with the JDS show the job’s motivating potential score (MPS), the core job characteristics, and affective responses. The MPS can be compared to norms to decide whether a job has an excessively low score, and then the job characteristics that are responsible for that low MPS can be identified.

Jobs can be designed either for groups or for individuals. The basic approach is the same for each. Other factors considered in group-based job design include internal group dynamics and group norms. Countries differ in whether they emphasize individual-based or group-based job design. Scandinavian organizations have emphasized self-managing work teams more than individual-based approaches to work design.

An alternative to the job characteristics theory describes how perceptions of job characteristics develop and the factors that can affect those perceptions. Supervisors, coworkers, and the job redesign process all can positively or negatively affect perceptions, even when the job is not changed.

Two implications for intrinsic rewards and job design follow from cultural differences. Because all cultures do not view self-actualization from work experiences as important, striving for intrinsic rewards from job redesign does not always apply. Another implication is that cultural differences should guide the choice of individual-based or group-based approaches. U.S. managers have mostly used individual-based job design approaches. Managers in other countries such as Norway and Sweden have mainly emphasized group-based job design.

Some ethical implications derive from people’s differences in the need for affiliation and designing group-based work. People with a low need for affiliation might have little desire for group-based work. Some people might not want high involvement in their work roles, preferring high involvement in nonwork roles instead. Those reasons imply at least two ethical questions. Should involvement in such groups be voluntary for those already employed by a company? Should job applicants be fully informed about the company’s use of groups and the likelihood of a group assignment if they are hired?

Work Context Effects and You

Discuss examples of work contexts within which you have worked. Did your job’s design take advantage of the work context or did it conflict with the work context? What were your reactions?

Perception of Objective Job Characteristics

Discuss the factors that affect a person’s perception of a job’s objective characteristics. What implications do you see for a job redesign strategy? Discuss examples from your work experiences.

Individual and Group Job Design

Jobs can be designed for groups or individuals. What individual needs should be strong in people who will work in a group or team setting? Which countries emphasize one approach instead of the other?

Individual Moderators and Job Design

Discuss the role of individual moderators in job design. Which needs discussed in earlier chapters are closely tied to the concept of growth need strength? Will you find differences in important needs in different cultures around the world?

Work Contetxt Factors

Which work context factors can affect a person’s reaction to a job’s design? Discuss how these factors affect such reactions. Include examples from your work experiences.

Diagnosing and Redesigning Jobs

What are the steps in diagnosing and redesigning jobs? Discuss the role of job incumbents in the diagnosis and redesign of their jobs.

Ethics and Job Design

Review the discussion of ethics and job design. Are those real issues facing managers in modern organizations? Why?

Modern Times (1936)

Charlie Chaplin plays a factory worker in his last film with his Little Tramp character. It satirically shows 1930s American factory life. Chaplin's daily work involves tightening bolts on some nondescript parts. He cracks from the work stress and runs through the factory trying to sabotage its various parts.

These scenes start the film (DVD Chapter 01 through DVD Chapter 02). They begin with a dark screen followed by a close-up of a clock. The scenes end after Charlie Chaplin returns to work and continues to tighten bolts.

Consider the following questions while viewing the scenes: Predict a motivating potential score (MPS) for the jobs of Chaplin and his coworkers. How do you assess the context of Chaplin's work — good or bad? Does the job characteristics theory of work motivation explain the behavior of Chaplin and his coworkers?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Joe versus the Volcano (1990)

“Once upon a time there was a guy named Joe who had a very lousy job…” This film's opening title screens give strong clues about a typical workday for Joe Banks (Tom Hanks). He has a bad job and perhaps an even worse work environment. Joe does not feel well. Joe learns from his doctor that he has a “brain cloud,” a rare disease that will kill him in less than six months. He accepts millionaire Samuel Harvey Graynamore's (Lloyd Bridges) offer of a vacation on Waponi Woo, a South Sea Island where he will live like a king. The bad part of the vacation comes when he learns he must jump into a local volcano as part of an island ritual.

These scenes start as Joe Banks enters his work area after punching his time card at the time clock. They are fully contained in DVD Chapter 2, “What's the matter?” The scenes end after Joe puts his hands to his face and you hear the voiceover, “Mr. Banks. Mr. Banks.” The film cuts to Dr. Ellison's (Robert Stack) office where Joe learns he has a brain cloud.

The following questions can guide your viewing of these scenes: What features of Joe's work context (supervision, coworkers, physical environment) affect his job reactions? Do those features have positive or negative effects? Rate Joe's satisfaction with his work context. Use a 1 to 7 scale where 1 is low satisfaction and 7 is high satisfaction.

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Diagnosing Your Job Now or in the Past

The following interpretation describes your possible reactions to the job you diagnosed using predictions from the job characteristics theory of work motivation. Deviations from the following descriptions will occur if you do not react as the theory predicts, or if the theory is incomplete.

The national norm for the motivating potential score (MPS) after adjusting for the scale used by the exercise is 47. That norm is the average MPS for 6,930 people working in 876 different jobs in 56 organizations around the United States. If your MPS is between 1 and 42, your job should not be an important source of intrinsic motivation or growth satisfaction. Because the job itself gives you few intrinsic outcomes, you might view the job as instrumental for getting extrinsic outcomes, especially money.

If your MPS ranges from 85 to 125, your job should be a source of high internal work motivation and growth satisfaction. You likely enjoy your work and look forward to going to work each day. The previous statements would be even more positive if you are also high in growth need strength (see the Moderator Variables section of the exercise).

The following are the national norms for each core job characteristic:

  • Skill variety = 3.4
  • Task Identity = 3.4
  • Task significance = 4.0
  • Autonomy = 3.5
  • Feedback from the job itself = 3.5

Compare your ratings of each core job characteristic to those norms. If your job’s characteristics differ from the norm by about .5 point, you can consider those characteristics significantly higher or lower than the norm. Remember that autonomy and feedback from the job heavily affect your MPS. Your score might be high or low because of those two job characteristics alone.

Two other moderator variables you rated in the exercise can affect your response to your job’s MPS. Your knowledge and skill contribute to whether you can do the job well. Typically, high knowledge and skill combine with high MPS to produce high levels of growth satisfaction and motivation. Lower levels of either or both variables can reduce satisfaction and motivation.

“Context” satisfaction refers to your degree of satisfaction with work context factors such as supervision, immediate coworkers, and compen­sation. You should perceive a positive work context as supportive and a negative work context as distracting. Your high motivation and satisfaction response to your job’s MPS can occur in a positive work context.
The core job characteristics affect the levels of the critical psychological states in the following way:

  • Skill variety, task identity, and task significance are predicted to affect the level of experienced meaningfulness of the work.
  • Autonomy is predicted to affect the level of experienced responsibility for outcomes of the work.
  • Feedback from the job itself is predicted to affect the level of knowledge of the actual results of work activities.

Examine your results to see whether the theory’s predicted pattern held true for you. Deviations from the theory’s predictions can occur, as noted earlier in this interpretation.


Hackman, J. R., and G. R. Oldham. Work Redesign. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1980, p. 105.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 10.

group formation stage (forming)

A stage of group development; group members meet each other for the first time and learn about the group’s task.

intragroup conflict stage (storming)

A stage of group development; discussions focus on behavior, roles, and social relationships that are right for the group’s task.

group cohesion stage (norming)

A stage of group development; group has defined its roles and role relationship; agrees about correct member behavior.

task orientation stage (performing)

A stage of group development; group members are comfortable with each other and have accepted the group’s norms.

termination or adjourning stage

A stage of group development; group has reached its goals and disbands or redefines task and group membership.

status structure

Part of the social structure of a group; defines the relative position of each role in a group and the relationships among roles.

communication network (I)

In groups and intergroup processes, part of a group’s social structure; each member has a position in the network; varies in degree of centrality to group functioning

power and influence patterns

Part of the social structure of a group; patterns of authority and influence within a group of formal and informal leaders.

activities

An organization's formal requirements for group members such as job duties and responsibilities; similar to required behavior.

adjustment

The third phase of workgroup socialization; new group member has successfully adapted to the workgroup and the group has successfully adapted to the new member.

anticipation

The first phase of workgroup socialization; occurs before person joins a workgroup; develops image of participation in the group.

bases of attraction

Factors that explain why people who can potentially interact are sufficiently attracted to each other to form a cohesive group; e.g., similarities in age, attitudes, or ethnic background.

cohesive group formation, organizational factors that affect

Include factors in the physical work area, the work processes, or the organizational design that encourage or restrict social interaction; e.g., proximity of people and the noise level.

cohesive group

A group where its members are attracted to its task, to its norms, and to other members of the group.

compliance conformity

Occurs when a person goes along with the group's norms without accepting those norms.

dysfunctional consequences of groups

Negative aspects of groups; include taking more time to accomplish tasks, loss of individual identity for members, free-rider effects, groupthink, and pressure for conformity to group norms.

conformity

Acceptance of a group’s norms; two types of conformity: compliance and personal acceptance.

groupthink (I)

A dysfunctional consequence of groups that affects cohesive decision-making groups. Such groups strive for consensus and consider only a few decision alternatives.

electronic groups

Human groups that use computer systems to link group members; computer networks linked by an organization's intranet or over the Internet.

electronic meeting systems (EMS)

Computer software that help electronic groups function.

emergent behavior

Behavior that grows from interactions among group members; can focus on work tasks or be purely social.

encounter

The second phase of workgroup socialization; occurs after person joins a workgroup and begins to learn their role in it.

factors affecting cohesive group formation

Aspects of the physical layout of work areas, work processes, organizational design, and job design that affect the formation of cohesive groups.

factors affecting group effectiveness

Factors that enhance group members' satisfaction and increase the group's ability to meet goals. Includes the physical environment, size and type of work area, group size, member compatibility, and the group's goals.

physical environment

A factor that can affect group effectiveness; affects interaction within the group by allowing or restricting social interaction.

size and type of work area

A factor that can affect group effectiveness; a crowded work area can prevent people from working comfortably; a defined group boundary can help a group become cohesive.

compatibility of group members

A factor that can affect group effectiveness; less conflict when group members are compatible in needs and personality.

group goals

A factor that can affect group effectiveness; groups with specific, clear goals outperform those with less clear and specific goals.

group size

A factor that can affect group effectiveness; associated with several effects including decreased satisfaction and member participation as group size increases.

formal groups

Functional or task groups within an organization. Functional groups are formed by the organization's design; departments; task group are formed temporarily to perform a specific duty, e.g., committees.

functions of groups

The good results of groups in organizations; include socialization of group members, a source of rewards for group members, and support of members, especially in hazardous work.

group (I)

An interdependent set of people doing a task or trying to reach a common goal.

group decision support systems (GDSSs)

Computer software that supports an electronic group's problem-solving or decision-making processes.

group effectiveness, factors affecting

Factors that enhance the group members' satisfaction and increase the group's ability to meet goals; include the physical environment, social environment, and the group's size and task.

individual roles

Part of the social structure of groups; a set of roles that focus on member needs and behavior that often have little to do with the group.

informal groups

Groups formed within and across formal groups in organizations; not formally established; may be based on shared interests or friendship.

interaction

Social interaction between two or more people; includes face-to-face interaction or through written materials or telecommunication devices.

intergroup processes

Social interactions at the interfaces of groups; members of different groups interact to complete a task; can feature intergroup conflict.

maintenance roles

Part of the social structure of groups; a set of roles that focus on behavioral processes within the group that help reach group goals.

majority group members

Hold strongly to a group's norm or position; pressure minority group members to conform to the norm.

minority group members

Deviant group members who do not accept the group's dominant position.

norms

Unwritten rules of behavior for members of a cohesive group; define acceptable behavior and roles of group members.

personal acceptance conformity

Occurs when a group member goes along with the group's norms because her beliefs and attitudes are congruent with those norms.

required behavior

What a person must do because of organizational membership and as part of a person's role in the formal group.

self-managing teams

Work units that have the authority to make decisions about product design, process design, and customer service; also known as self-managing workgroups.

sentiments

Attitudes, beliefs, and feelings about those with whom one interacts.

social loafing

A dysfunctional consequence of groups. Can occur within groups; also called the free-rider effect. Can develop when a person perceives her effort in the group as unimportant or not easily observed by others. Reduces effort toward group's goals, often lowering overall group performance. See also sucker effects.

social structure of groups

The social arrangement of a group; includes several dimensions such as group member roles, status structure, the group's communication network, and power and influence patterns within the group.

stages of group development

Include group formation (forming), intragroup conflict (storming), group cohesion(norming), task orientation (performing), and termination; mark plateaus in group evolution not discrete and clearly identifiable states.

sucker effects

A dysfunctional consequence of groups. Happen when other group members perceive a free rider and reduce effort to remedy feelings of inequity; often lowers overall group performance. See also social loafing.

task roles

Part of the social structure of groups; a set of roles that focus on the group’s tasks, issues, and problems.

workgroup socialization

The process by which people learn their role in a workgroup; has three phases: anticipation, encounter, and adjustment. See also organizational socialization.

Example

An example of something

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Groups, group dynamics, intergroup processes: inevitable and critical aspects of organizations and their management
    2. Group: an interdependent set of people doing a task or trying to reach a common goal
    3. A group is a complex, adaptive system that can change its membership, goals, and structure over time
    4. Groups can powerfully affect people’s behavior
    5. Knowledge of group dynamics can help you function better within a group or manage group activities.
  2. Formal and Informal Groups
    1. Formal groups
      1. Functional groups. Created by the formal organization structure. Permanent: departments, work units
      2. Task groups. Created to do a specific task or solve a specific problem. Temporary: task forces, project teams, or committees.
      3. Self-managing teams. A growing use in many organizations. Autonomy is a major feature.
    2. Informal groups. Interest groups and friendship groups. Emerge within and across the formal groups. Powerful—the shadow organization
    3. Membership in informal groups is voluntary. Membership in formal groups is required by employer. Attraction to members of the group. Similarity in attitudes, beliefs, and opinions
  3. Basic Concepts for Understanding Groups in Organizations
    1. Norms
    2. Cohesiveness
    3. Conformity
      1. Compliance: goes along with the group's norms, but does not personally accept those norms.
      2. Personal acceptance: individual's beliefs and attitudes are congruent with the group's norms. The more powerful of the two forms of conformity—greater control.
      3. Conformity is not necessarily bad. Gives order to the group's activities. Individual members know what to expect from each other. Conformity often leads to effective group performance.
    4. Required and emergent behaviors
  4. Functions of Groups in Organizations
    1. Socialization of members
    2. Motivation system
    3. Support members while doing the work. Especially important for hazardous work.
    4. Informal social behavior. Adds a purely social dimension to working
  5. Dysfunctions of Groups in Organizations
    1. Groups do not always produce positive results for either the individual or the organization
    2. Groups take more time than individuals
      1. Group structure takes time to develop
      2. Roles, statuses, and norms take time to specify.
      3. Conflict within the group takes time to settle
    3. Social loafing, free-rider, and sucker effects
    4. People who are members of cohesive informal groups can experience some loss of their individual identity. Being able to hide in a group may lead a person to behave in ways atypical for the individual. Responsibility for negative results of the group's action can become diffused among group members. No single person takes responsibility for a bad decision.
    5. Pressures toward uniformity. Groupthink. Discussed more fully in Chapter 14, “Decision-Making and Problem-Solving Processes”.
  6. Model of Cohesive Group Formation
    1. Activities, interactions, and sentiments
    2. Organizational factors affecting cohesive group formation
      1. Proximity
      2. Physical isolation
      3. Ambient noise level
      4. Required interaction
      5. Incomplete job descriptions
      6. Free time at work
      7. Physically tied to work station
      8. Attention required by work
      9. Absenteeism and turnover
    3. Bases of attraction
  7. Stages of Group Development: Important because productivity is not always highest in the early group development stages
    1. Group formation (Forming). Orienting the members of the group to the group's task and to each other
    2. Intragroup conflict (Storming). Emergence of status structure of the group. Interpersonal conflict.
    3. Group cohesion (Norming). Development of group norms. Cohesiveness.
    4. Task orientation (Performing). Maturity. Social issues settled. Now focus on the task.
    5. Termination
    6. Repetition of the stages. Redevelopment of group when a new member joins. Relationship to socialization (Chapter 6, “Organizational Socialization”).
  8. Social Structure of Groups
    1. Social structure
      1. Prescribed by the organization for formal groups such as functional and task groups.
      2. Emerges within an informal group. Members often know what that structure is and can describe it. Or, the informal group decides to formalize and specify its structure in writing or by any device it considers appropriate.
      3. Once a group has matured and established its norms, the structure can persist even as group membership changes
    2. Dimensions of group structure
      1. Roles, norms, satus
        1. Expected behavior of role occupant
        2. Changes made by person who takes on the role
      2. Status: rank and place
      3. Norms
      4. Communication network: person's position within it
        1. Central: connected to everyone in the group
        2. Peripheral: removed from other group members
        3. Positioned between two other members. Communication must go through the connecting role. Can be a bottleneck to communication.
        4. More in Chapter 13, "Communication Processes"
      5. Power and Influence
        1. Individual needs. Needs for dominance, affiliation, autonomy, security, structure, order (Murray, Chapter 7, “Motivation: Need Theories”).
        2. Individual abilities. Have the only resource that is important to achieving the groups' goals (expertise, lap-top computer). Or, several people have the resource that must be pooled to reach the groups' goals.
    3. Group structure effects
      1. Individual needs, satisfaction, behavior, influence. Need for affiliation, need for power, need for dominance
      2. Behavior differences from group to group. Different status position and roles in different groups.
      3. Role conflict
      4. Achieving group goals. Group performance. More detail in the next section
  9. Factors that Affect Group Effectiveness
    1. Physical environment
      1. Seating arrangement. People at ends of a rectangular table participate more in group activities than those in other positions.
      2. Those across from each other interact more than with others in different positions.
      3. Those who know each other well tend to sit next to each other.
      4. Leaders emerge from the head positions of a rectangular table. More difficult to predict in a circular arrangement.
      5. Effect of physical setting. Crowding.
    2. Social environment
      1. Compatibility of members leads to higher group productivity. Enjoy the company of others in the group.
      2. If the task requires variations in people's performance, then variations in members' characteristics lead to higher group performance. If the task requires similarities in people's performance, similarities in member's characteristics leads to higher performance.
      3. Members with special skills that apply to the group's task will be the more active participants and more strongly affect the group's decisions.
      4. More communication within a cohesive group.
      5. Members of cohesive groups are more cooperative with each other and more satisfied with the group and its task.
      6. Highly cohesive groups more strongly affect members' behavior than less cohesive groups. Nature of norms, of course, are important here.
      7. Groups with members having diverse abilities that apply to the task of the group are more effective
    3. Group size
      1. Small refers to groups with seven or fewer members
      2. As size increases, satisfaction with the group's activities decreases
      3. Participation of members drops as size of the group increases
      4. Communication difficulty in large groups
      5. Individuals more likely to conform to group norms in small groups
      6. Larger groups have more resources to work on the group's task. Can have difficulty in reaching agreement.
      7. Discussion and problem-solving groups should be 5 people to get best performance.
      8. Leader is more likely to emerge as group size increases
      9. Odd-even effects
    4. Task
      1. Cooperation requirements. Interdependence. Highly cooperative tasks are better done in smaller groups.
      2. Task difficulty and feedback within the group while doing the task
      3. Complex: decentralized group structure
      4. Simple: centralized group structure
    5. Implications for designing groups
  10. Virtual Groups
    1. Definition
      1. Interactive computer-based systems
      2. Uses communication, computer, and decision support technologies
      3. Technologies support problem-solving and decision-making groups
      4. Goal is to support group processes that increase decision effectiveness and quality
      5. Temporal and physical configurations range from meeting in real time or asynchronously
      6. Names of some systems in use
        1. HroupSystems
        2. Cisco Systems WebEx
    2. Technologies features and characteristics
      1. Decision tools. Software that supports a problem solving or decision-making task. Example: stakeholder analysis tool.
      2. Process tools. Software that supports a particular approach to a group's task. Example: electronic brainstorming tool.
      3. Parallel communication. Ability of group members to communicate with everyone in the group.
      4. Anonymous communication. No identification attached to a person's message.
      5. Shared software. Available equally to all group members. Allows joint tasks.
      6. Shared view. All group members have the same view of the group's work.
      7. Communication
        1. Synchronous: chat rooms and other direct computer-to-computer communication.
        2. Asynchronous: e-mail, bulletin boards for threaded discussions
    3. Challenges presented to organizations and management
      1. Building trust among group members
      2. Building group cohesiveness
      3. Reducing feelings of member isolation and detachment
      4. Balancing member interpersonal and technical skill requirements
      5. Recognizing group and member performance
  11. Self-Managing Teams
    1. Definition
    2. Distinguishing features. Use for interdependent tasks
    3. Composition and size
    4. Team processes
      1. Cooperative behavior
      2. Interdependent with each other to get task done
      3. Synergy
      4. Conflict management
      5. Interactions, activities, and sentiments view applies here. Want cohesiveness.
    5. Team leader
    6. Links to customers and suppliers. Links inside and outside the organization
    7. Managing self-managing teams
    8. Empirical research results
  12. Workgroup Socialization
    1. Similar to the organizational socialization process discussed in Chapter 6
    2. Unfolds in three related phases
      1. Phase I: Anticipation
      2. Phase II: Encounter
      3. Phase III: Adjustment
    3. Features that distinguishing workgroup socialization from organizational socialization
      1. New member’s entry can strongly affect processes and structure. Smaller than an entire organization.
      2. Forming new groups of any type starts the process of socializing the entire workgroup.
      3. Group member departure
        1. Group member can want to leave
        2. Group can decide it wants a member to leave
        3. Withdrawal process starts; person becomes a marginal group member
  13. Majority and Minority Influences in Groups
    1. Earlier discussion about group norms and group cohesiveness possibly left you with the impression of the absence of deviant behavior in groups
      1. Cohesive groups feature an attachment to a group's norm or position by the majority of group members
      2. Majority group members can pressure minority or deviant members to conform to a group's norm or position
      3. Majority group members outnumber minority members
      4. Hold negative view of minority or deviant members
      5. Research shows positive group performance effects of minority group member influence
      6. Group could perform at a lower level because members ignore information from one or more nonconforming members
    2. Minority group members
      1. Do not endorse the prevailing group opinion on an issue, problem, or decision. Oppose the group's prevailing position
      2. Minority members bring alternative views to a problem or decision faced by the group.
      3. Increase conflict within the group (See Chapter 11, “Conflict in Organizations’).
      4. Promotes divergent thinking among majority members. Attend to new information that can lead to better decisions or problem solutions.
      5. Minority group member's effects on majority opinion.
        1. Consistent statements of opinion
        2. Confidence in position
        3. Repeated statements of opinion (persistence)
        4. Timing of statements. For example, an increase in workplace accidents and pressing for better health insurance coverage
  14. Effects of Workforce Diversity
    1. Positive effects
      1. Diverse outlooks can potentially help create more solutions to problems
      2. Find better ways of doing group’s work
      3. Especially useful to organizations that use teams to analyze work
      4. Successful management
        1. Knowledge of group dynamics
        2. Knowledge of conflict management
        3. Understand and accept differences
    2. Negative effects
      1. Misinterpretation of group members' intentions because of different worldviews
      2. Especially likely to happen when people hold stereotypes about other members
      3. Communication difficulties if members do not have a common first language
      4. Distrust may exist because group members fear the new and unknown
      5. High conflict potential
    3. Other effects
      1. Takes longer to pass through early stages of group formation and become cohesive
      2. Introduces wide variation in bases of attraction
      3. Makes the process of becoming cohesive longer, more complex, more difficult
      4. Although the empirical research is mixed, results support the above statements
  15. Intergroup Processes in Organizations
    1. Behavior among groups. Interactions among members of different groups in an organization. Groups such as manufacturing, quality assurance, finance, marketing, design engineering, and the like.
    2. Interdependence in organizations. The necessary connections among people that result from the design of the organization and its work processes. Growing use of cross-functional teams, especially in modern manufacturing's use of concurrent engineering and the world-wide press to manage for quality. The basic management issue is the coordination of activities that require contributions from people in different groups
    3. People from different groups can have different orientations to tasks, time, and goals.
    4. Those interactions can have various qualities. Several social psychological forces shape those qualities. Stereotype, categorization, etc.
    5. Intergroup behavior often results in conflict between groups. That conflict must be managed to maintain it at a functional level so people can reach their work goals. Chapter 11 discusses conflict and conflict management.
    6. Workforce diversity, informal groups, and intergroup behavior. Formal groups often mixed, but informal groups can grow around characteristics shared by people and some bases of attraction.
  16. International Aspects of Groups in Organizations
    1. Form and character of some group dynamics vary among cultures.
    2. Pressures for conformity. The tendency to accept group pressure for conformity to the group's norms varies among cultures. Conformity is high among Japanese to the norms of a group that has the person's primary loyalty. Experimental research with German students showed a low tendency to conform. Conformity was moderate among people in Hong Kong, Brazil, Lebanon, and the U.S. Such evidence implies caution in carrying one's home-country view of conformity into other cultures.
    3. Treatment of deviants. All societies pressure deviates to conform to norms. The cultural differences center on the strength of the pressure and the intensity of group rejection of a deviate. Some limited experimental evidence showed French, Swedish, and Norwegian groups as highest in pressure to conform and in intensity of rejection of a deviate. German and British groups much lower in those pressures. Implies importance of such group processes within organizations operating in various countries.
    4. Intergroup behavior
      1. Little cross-cultural research done. Major cultural distinction along an individualism-collectivism dimension. Collectivism emphasizes the goals of the group over those of the individual; asks loyalty to the group and emphasizes cooperation among group members. Individualism focuses on the person, not the group.
      2. Collectivistic cultures expect little expression of conflict during intergroup interactions. A suppression of it with little discussion about the feelings of the members of the different groups that come into contact with each other. More personalization during the interaction. Focuses on the people in the interaction, despite the group they represent. Group membership is more salient during intergroup interactions than in individualistic cultures.
    5. The cross-cultural differences in group and intergroup behavior emphasize major areas of cultural diversity for organizations operating in a global environment. Several observation about managing such culturally diverse groups.
      1. Select team members of about equal ability, not based on cultural factors only. The manager can also let all members of the team know about the achievements of each person. Try to develop mutual respect among team members and avoid judgments based on cultural or ethnic stereotypes.
      2. Recognize differences, do not hide or ignore them. Managers could encourage team members to discuss the cultural differences in the team. Want to discover and use different, and potentially positive, ways of viewing the group's task. A form of cultural synergy that can lead to high group performance.
      3. International management observers caution against letting one cultural group dominate another within a team. Such dominance can come from the cultures viewed as most advanced, those from the host country, or those from the home country of the employing organization. The goal is to get the best of the different cultural views focused on the tasks of the team.
      4. Actively manage the group processes by giving feedback to each member about the member's contribution. Use this feedback to help all team members understand the contribution to its success from its cultural diversity.
  17. Ethical Issues about Groups in Organizations
    1. Similar to those in organizational socialization
    2. Conformity to group norms and the question of informed free choice
    3. Assignment to formal groups is an expected part of the employment contract
    4. No prior knowledge of the presence of informal groups and their norms. Any requirement of full disclosure by managers to recruits?
    5. People with low affiliation needs and assignment to deliberately formed groups
    6. Conflict levels within groups especially when heterogeneous, either deliberately or from workforce diversity

Chapter Overview

Chapter 10 describes group and intergroup processes in organizations. The chapter focuses on the role of groups in organizations and distinguishes formal groups from informal groups. Descriptions follow about the functions and dysfunctions of groups in organizations and why people join groups. The chapter develops a model of cohesive group formation and discusses group development stages. It then describes the growing use of virtual groups and self-managing teams in modern organizations. Two sections describe majority and minority influences in groups and workgroup socialization processes. The chapter discusses workforce diversity effects on group development and functioning. The chapter also discusses intergroup processes in organizations.

learning goals

After reading this chapter, the reader should be able to:

  • Distinguish between formal and informal groups.
  • Define the basic conceptual tools for understanding groups.
  • Compare the functions and dysfunctions of groups in organizations.
  • Describe how and why cohesive groups form in organizations.
  • Discuss the role of activities, interactions, and sentiments in cohesive group formation.
  • List the stages of group development and the behavior that likely occurs in each stage.
  • Define factors that affect group effectiveness, including minority influence in groups.
  • Discuss the functioning of virtual groups in organizations and some characteristics of virtual group technology.
  • Explain the emergence and use of self-managing teams in organizations.
  • Discuss the management roles required by self-managing teams.
  • Describe workgroup socialization processes.
  • Explain intergroup processes in organizations.

Appreciate some international and ethical issues that surround group and intergroup processes


Personal and Management Implications

The implications of groups for you as an individual derive from the ways a cohesive group can affect your behavior. If you like to interact with people, you likely will become a member of an existing informal group. If the group is cohesive, its norms will affect your behavior. Of course, if you do not care to interact with others, you will probably not become a member and the group will have little effect on you.

The norms of a cohesive group do not always accord with the wishes of management and the organization. During your early socialization in an organization, a group may present you with performance norms that contradict the organization's norms. You can experience much internal conflict when trying to decide which performance norms to accept. If you value group membership highly, you will likely accept the group's norms. If those norms also contradict management's performance norms, you may find yourself at odds with the organization.

The positive side of a cohesive group for you is the support it can give its members. If the tasks of the group are interdependent, group support should help you get your job done. The group can also be an important source of information about how to do the tasks. A cohesive group can help you "learn the ropes" quickly.

Recall from text Chapter 6, “Organizational Socialization” that the early stages of socialization are both important and potentially stressful. The stages of group development you experience when entering groups of varying maturity put pressures upon you along with their socialization efforts.1 Organizations that use temporary teams expose their employees to repeated pressures from both the stages of group development and socialization process.

You likely will have future chances to participate in virtual groups as organizations increasingly use them. Reflect on your reaction to technology, especially communication technology. If you have positive reactions, you will likely comfortable fit into an virtual group. If not, your experience could have negative effects on you.

Some management implications derive from two major properties of cohesive groups: (1) their powerful effect on individual behavior and (2) group norms. Managers should consider how they can use the positive qualities of cohesive groups. Such groups can support individual performance and help develop innovative solutions to problems.

Deliberately constructing factors that help group formation, or reducing factors that impede group formation, is a major management implication. Managers can affect whether a cohesive group will form. More difficult is getting group norms that accord with your goals and those of your organization. The information in text Chapters 12, “Leadership and Management” and Chapter 18, “Organizational Change and Development” should help you create a climate for the development of groups with the norms you want.

When you deliberately use groups in an organization, you need to understand the stages of group development and the effects of those stages on group members. You can help the stages of group development in many ways. Give newcomers an accurate picture of what it is like to work in a group before they join. Anticipatory socialization and realistic job previews, described in text Chapter 6, can inform newcomers about the group before they arrive. The more accurate the information, the more it will help the individuals adjust to the group. Well-informed newcomers will also minimally disturb the existing group's social and task structure.

The growing use of virtual groups in their varying forms should pose some challenges for you in the future. Such groups require not only understanding the basic knowledge about groups described in text Chapter 10, “Groups and Intergroup Processes” but also understanding the technologies that support virtual groups. Interactions between technology and human behavior should present you with unusual opportunities in the future.

People who choose to work outside their home country will be affected by cultural differences in groups and group dynamics. One simply cannot carry home country assumptions about the right way to behave in groups into another culture. Although our knowledge is still limited, the available evidence suggests you should inquire about cultural differences in such behavior.

1. Wanous, J. P., A. E. Reichers, and S. D. Malik. 1984. Organizational Socialization and Group Development: Toward an Integrative Perspective. Academy of Management Review 9: 670–83.


Chapter Summary

A group is a collection of people doing a task or trying to reach a goal. Formal groups are either task groups or functional groups, such as departments and work units. Informal groups form within and across formal groups. The basic concepts for understanding groups in organizations are norms, cohesiveness, required behavior, and emergent behavior. People join informal groups for many reasons, such as satisfying social needs. People with strong dominance or power needs can satisfy those needs through leadership roles in groups.

Many factors in the physical layout of work areas and work processes, organizational design, and job design affect the formation of a cohesive group. If such factors allow social interaction and positive feelings emerge among those who interact, a cohesive group should form.

The stages of group development each emphasize something different for group members. Conflict levels typically are high during the early stages of group development. Later stages focus on the group’s tasks.

Several factors affect a group’s effectiveness. The physical environment, social environment, group size (number of group members), and type of task all influence group effectiveness in different ways. Each factor has implications for designing groups in organizations to get work done.

Virtual groups are human groups using computer systems to link members. They feature an information technology environment using PCs or workstations connected over a network. Such connections allow different temporal and physical patterns ranging from meeting in a single room simultaneously or at dispersed locations asynchronously. The system’s goal is to support group processes that increase decision effectiveness and quality.

Self-managing teams are an emerging, important type of formal group. These teams typically have high internal autonomy. They usually have decision authority on work scheduling, team member assignments, and the choice of a team leader. Empirical research focused on self-managing teams shows that such teams have consistent positive effects.

Workgroup socialization happens in a series of related phases, similar to the organizational socialization phases described in Chapter 6. A major distinguish­ing characteristic of workgroup socialization from organizational socialization is a process of mutual adjustment and adaptation for newcomers and group members.

Cohesive groups feature an attachment to a group’s norm or position by most group members. Majority group members can pressure minority or deviant members to conform to a group’s norm or position. Majority group members outnumber minority group members and often hold negative views of minority or deviant members. Although outnumbered in groups, research shows positive group performance effects of minority group member influence.

Cultural differences in group dynamics suggest one should learn about those differences before taking an assignment in another country. The pressure to conform to group norms and the value placed on conformity to those norms vary from culture to culture. Cultures also differ in how much conflict between groups they will accept.

The major ethical issues about groups in organizations center on conformity to group norms and informed free choice. Cohesive groups develop powerful forces of socialization to their norms. Such groups reject deviant members after unsuccessful efforts to get conformity to norms. Are managers ethically required to tell recruits about all cohesive informal groups in the organization?

Cohesive Groups

Why are cohesive groups important to us as individuals? What are some reasons managers should care about the presence of groups and group cohesiveness?

Cohesive Group Formation

What factors help or impede cohesive group formation? Reflect on your work experiences to find examples of these factors.

Model of Cohesive Group Formation

Discuss the model of cohesive group formation. Apply it to your experiences. Discuss instances where you have experienced the formation of a group.

Stages of Group Development

Discuss the stages of group development. What behavior or events does each stage emphasize? Reflect on your work experiences. Discuss examples of each stage.

Virtual Groups

Review the section on “Virtual Groups.” Discuss your experiences with electronic communication such as e-mail, threaded discussion bulletin boards, and chat rooms. What are some positive effects of virtual groups? What are some negative effects of such groups?

Self-Managing Teams

Discuss self-managing teams. Have you experienced such teams? Discuss your experiences from both a positive and negative perspective.

Rewarding Group Performance

How should managers reward group performance? You might want to review the motivation chapters (Chapters 7, “Motivation: Need Theories” and 8, “Cognitive and Behavioral Theories and Techniques”) for some hints.

Hoosiers (1986)

Norman Dale (Gene Hackman) takes on his new high school basketball coaching job with a high degree of focus and energy. A basketball-loving Indiana small town does not support him immediately but grows with him as the team has successive victories.

These scenes show Norman Dale's first day as the new basketball coach. George (Chelcie Ross), the assistant coach, is guiding a practice session when Coach Dale arrives. The scenes are DVD Chapter 5, “First Practice.”

Consider the following questions while viewing these scenes: Did the team act as a cohesive group on the first day? Does it begin to develop into a cohesive group by the end of the first day of practice? If it does, what factors helped the team in that direction?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

It's Complicated (2009)

Three people form the center of relationships in this charming and often funny film from director Nancy Meyers. Jane (Meryl Streep) has a thriving bakery in Santa Barbara, California. Jake, her ex-husband, is a successful attorney and has remarried. Adam (Steve Martin) is divorced and is Jane's architect. Jane and Jake come together for their son's graduation. This single meeting blossoms into a full-blown affair.

This scene begins with Jane bringing three pies to the table where her friends Trisha (Rita Wilson), Joanne (Mary Kay Place), and Diane (Alexandra Wentworth) are seated (DVD Chapter 7, “It's Official”, 0:37:55). The scene follows the sexual encounter with Jake (Alec Baldwin) in Jane's home. Their discussion has a reference to Agness (Lake Bell), who is Jake's wife. This scene ends as her friends ask for details about the affair (Stop 0:40:40). The film cuts to the bakery's kitchen.

Consider the following questions while viewing this scene: Does this small group appear to be cohesive or noncohesive? What is the evidence? Can you infer a group norm from the interactions in the scene? If so, what is it?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Groups, Teams, and You

You undoubtedly have experienced groups in many settings. This exercise should have helped you recall such experiences—good or bad. The conceptual tools you have learned about groups and group dynamics should help you better understand the forces and dynamics you experienced.

The basic concepts for understanding groups are lenses for viewing and understanding some aspects of group phenomena. If you were part of a cohesive group, you experienced group norms and pressures to accept those norms. Emergent behavior is also a quality of cohesive groups. Perhaps your group had a time or theme during the day to break up the workday into more manageable parts. Here is an example:


At 3 p.m. every day, a particular pattern of behavior occurred in a law firm. Members of the firm called the behavior “M&M™ Time.” The firm’s offices were in a large rectangular area on a single floor of a downtown office building. The attorneys’ offices were on the outside perimeter while secretarial staff occupied the center of the rectangle. At 3 p.m., one secretary would take a large brandy snifter of M&M™ candies from a drawer of her desk. She would place the snifter on her desk, making enough noise for the attorneys in the surrounding offices to hear. The attorneys would fly out of their offices and line up to take a handful of candy. They would linger by the secretary’s desk talking among themselves about their leisure time activities or about technical aspects of their cases. After about 20 minutes, the attorneys would return to their offices.1


Did you experience the stages of group development? The conflict in the earlier stages often creates stress for many people. It is also a confusing time as you learn the group’s tasks, your individual task, and the emerging social relationships.

Mature groups end with a social structure that defines relationships among members. That structure plays a key role in group governance and helps to manage group dynamics in a positive way.


1 Champoux, J. E. 1996. Organizational Behavior: Integrating Individuals, Groups, and Processes. St. Paul, Minn.: West Publishing Company, p. 260.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 11.

conflict (II)

In organizations, includes interactions in which (1) one party opposes another or (2) one party tries to prevent or block another from reaching his or her goals; involves opposition, incompatible behaviors, or antagonistic interaction.

conflict aftermath

The end of a conflict episode; often linked to the latent conflict of a later episode.

conflict episode

A model that describes a conflict process as beginning with antecedents that lead to conflict behavior and ending with an aftermath that links it to other conflict episodes; also includes perceived, felt, and manifest conflict.

conflict frames

Perceptual sets that people bring to conflict episodes; act as perceptual filters removing some information from the episode and emphasizing other information. Defined by the three dimensions of relationship-task, emotional-intellectual, and cooperate-win.

relationship-task

A conflict frame dimension. A relationship emphasis focuses on the parties’ interpersonal relationship. A task emphasis focuses on the material aspects of a conflict episode, such as a budget.

emotional-intellectual

A conflict frame dimension. An emotional emphasis focuses on feelings in an episode. An intellectual emphasis focuses on observed behavior.

cooperate-win

A conflict frame dimension. A cooperation focus emphasizes the role of all parties to the conflict. A party with a winning focus wants to maximize personal gain.

conflict management

Focuses on maintaining conflict at functional levels; does not mean the elimination of all conflict; includes increasing and decreasing conflict.

conflict orientations

Different behavioral patterns that people bring to a conflict episode; include dominance, collaborative, compromise, avoidance, and accommodative.

dominance (II)

Refers to (1) a conflict reduction method and (2) a conflict orientation. (1) A win-lose conflict reduction method; one party to a conflict overwhelms the other party. (2) A conflict orientation. A person with a dominance orientation wants to win the conflict episode; views conflict episodes as battles to fight and win.

collaborative

A conflict orientation. A person with a collaborative orientation wants to satisfy the desires of all parties to the conflict and sincerely wants to find a solution that satisfies everyone.

compromise (II)

Refers to (1) a method of conflict reduction and (2) a conflict orientation. (1) A lose-lose method of conflict reduction; uses bargaining and negotiation to reduce conflict. Each party to the conflict gives up something to get something of value. (2) A conflict orientation. A person with a compromise orientation splits the difference so each party gets part of what it wants.

avoidance

Refers to (1) a method of conflict reduction and (2) a conflict orientation. (1) A lose-lose method of conflict reduction; one or more parties to the conflict episode withdraws from the episode. (2) A conflict orientation. A person with an avoidance orientation backs away from a conflict episode, possibly because of low tolerance for conflict.

accommodative

A conflict orientation. A person with an accomodative orientation focuses on the other party’s needs and desires, ignoring his own needs and desires.

desired conflict level

A manager's choice of a work unit's conflict level considered optimal for unit performance; varies according to the conflict values in an organization's culture and a manager's tolerance for conflict.

dysfunctional conflict

Conflict that blocks an organization or group from reaching its goals.

dysfunctionally high conflict

In conflict management, the conflict level that triggers conflict reduction; conflict is too high for effective work unit performance.

dysfunctionally low conflict

In conflict management, the conflict level that triggers behavior to increase conflict; conflict is too low for effective work unit performance; decreases innovation.

felt conflict

The emotional part of a conflict episode; also includes the values and attitudes the parties to the conflict hold about each other.

functional conflict

Conflict that works toward the goals of an organization or group.

increasing conflict

Methods of raising the level of conflict when it becomes dysfunctionally low; includes forming heterogeneous groups, using a devil's advocate, structured debate (dialectical inquiry), and developing an organizational culture that supports debate and questioning.

forming heterogeneous groups

A method of increasing conflict; groups with members of different social backgrounds, education, expertise, organization positions, and opinions.

devil’s advocate

A method of increasing conflict; a person who deliberately criticizes a position that has emerged as dominant within the group.

organizational culture that supports debate

A method of increasing conflict; organizational culture features a set of values and norms that supports openness about debate and opinions.

dialectical inquiry (I)

A method of increasing conflict; structured debate of opposing views about solutions to a decision problem.

intergroup conflict

Conflict between two or more groups in an organization.

interorganization conflict

conflict between two or more organizations that results from relationships between them.

interpersonal conflict

Conflict between two or more people.

intragroup conflict

Conflict among members of a group.

intraorganization conflict

Conflict that occurs at the interface of organization functions, e.g., between manager and subordinate or between departments; includes all types of conflict occurring within an organization.

intrapersonal conflict

Conflict that occurs within an individual.

latent conflict

Factors in a person, group, or organization that might lead to conflict behavior; the antecedents to conflict. Includes scarce resources, organizational design (organizational differentiation), policies, cohesive groups, interdependence, communication barriers, ambiguous jurisdictions, and reward systems.

scarce resources

A latent conflict or conflict source in organizations. Dependence on a scarce resource such as money, equipment, and facilities often starts a conflict episode.

organizational differentiation

A latent conflict or conflict source in organizations. An aspect of organizational design that produces groups and work units with different goals, time horizons, views of the world, and languages.

rules, procedures, and policies

A latent conflict or conflict source in organizations. Policies usually exist to allow smooth decision making about recurring events. For example, a professor refuses to accept late student additions to a course, an action consistent with school policy. That action starts a conflict episode between the professor and one or more students.

cohesive groups

A latent conflict or conflict source in organizations. Cohesive groups can differ in what they value. Conflict can start when members of such groups interact with each other

interdependence

A latent conflict or conflict source in organizations. Interdependence in organizations forces people to interact with each other. The required interaction increases the potential for conflict.

communication barriers

A latent conflict or conflict source in organizations. Infrequent interaction among group members can lead to communication misunderstandings, starting a conflict episode.

ambiguous jurisdictions

A latent conflict or conflict source in organizations; occur when the organization has not clearly defined individual areas of decision authority. “Turf battles” erupt when two people or groups believe they have the responsibility for the same activity.

reward systems

A latent conflict or conflict source in organizations; often encourage different and incompatible behavior. Sales people often work on a commission. They can increase sales by offering quick delivery dates which are incompatible with manufacturing’s rewarded goals of low manufacturing costs.

manifest conflict

The actual conflict behavior of the parties to a conflict episode; can be oral, written, or physical.

perceived conflict

In the conflict episode model, the moment when the parties to a conflict are aware of the conflict.

perceived conflict requirements

The level of conflict desired. Organizations facing a fast-changing environment or producing innovative products require higher levels of conflict as do organizations with cultures that value debate and questioning.

reducing conflict

Methods of lessening conflict; include lose-lose methods, win-lose methods, and win-win methods.

lose-lose methods

Methods of conflict reduction where parties to the conflict do not get what they want; leave a conflict aftermath that starts a new conflict episode about the same issues; includes avoidance, compromise, and third-party intervention.

avoidance

A lose-lose method of conflict reduction; one or more parties to the conflict episode withdraws from the episode.

third-party intervention

A lose-lose method of conflict reduction; a neutral person seeks a solution to a conflict episode.

win-lose methods

Methods of conflict reduction where one party to the conflict is a clear winner and the other party is a clear loser; leave a conflict aftermath that starts a new conflict episode about the same issues; include dominance, authoritative command, and majority rule.

authoritative command

A win-lose method of conflict reduction; two people in a conflict episode refer the conflict to a common superior who decides the solution to the conflict.

majority rule

A win-lose method of conflict reduction; conflict issues are put to a vote, letting some members of the group win and others lose.

win-win methods

Methods of conflict reduction where parties to the conflict get what they want; do not leave a conflict aftermath that starts a new conflict episode about the same issues; include problem solving, integration, and superordinate goal.

Problem solving (I)

A win-win method of conflict reduction; tries to find the true basis of a conflict episode.

integration

A win-win method of conflict reduction; seeks solutions that are in the best interests of all parties.

superordinate goal

A win-win method of conflict reduction; a goal desired by all parties to the conflict but unattainable by any party alone. Superordinate goals compel cooperation even if the parties otherwise do not want to cooperate.

tolerance for conflict

A person’s ability to accept conflict.

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Definition of conflict in organizations
      1. Conflict in organizations is doubt, questioning, opposition, controversy, or antagonistic interaction.
      2. Conflict has both psychological and behavioral parts. Conflict may be within an individual (psychological) or between individuals (behavioral).
    2. Basic behavioral process that needs managing
    3. U.S. managers may feel conflict is not good for their organizations and that it should be eliminated
    4. Has an episodic quality; rises and falls in an organization; varies in duration
    5. Perspective on Conflict
      1. Conflict is not necessarily bad for an organization. Do not need to reduce all conflict
      2. An inevitable part of organization life
      3. Conflict can be necessary for organization growth and survival
      4. Conflict management is a basic responsibility of a manager
      5. Conflict management includes both increasing and reducing conflict
      6. Develop an understanding that lets you diagnose conflict situations and do a better job of managing conflict
  2. Functional and Dysfunctional Conflict
    1. Conflict is functional if it helps reach organizational goals. Dysfunctional conflict impedes the organization from reaching its goals. The latter type should be reduced or remove. Functional conflict should be nurtured, if not encouraged.
    2. Distinction is not always clear
    3. Conflict that is functional in one group may be dysfunctional in another group. Conflict requirements of a group may change with time. What is functional at one point for the group may be dysfunctional at another point.
    4. The assessment of whether conflict is functional or dysfunctional is from the perspective of the organization and not the perspective of individual participants. We all differ in the amount of conflict we can tolerate. The requirements of the group in which we work may be higher than what we are comfortable experiencing. Level of conflict may still be functional for the group, although some members do not like the conflict.
    5. Functional conflict
      1. Some basic observations from Follett, Chapter 1
      2. Generates information and new ideas
      3. Innovation and change. May be an important management tool in a turbulent environment
      4. Reduces stagnation
      5. Conflict between groups can lead to higher productivity and greater identity with the group's activities and goals
      6. Can point out problems within the organization requiring correction. For example, if inconsistent policies lead to repeated conflict between two people, the conflict can point out that inconsistency and allow the discovery of a needed correction.
    6. Dysfunctional conflict
      1. Tension, anxiety, stress
      2. Can reduce trust. Withholding information
      3. Can reduce performance if parties in conflict are interdependent in doing their jobs
      4. Conflict itself can become the focus of management's attention, diverting valuable resources
  3. Levels and Types of Conflict.
    1. Intraorganization conflict
      1. Intragroup conflict
      2. Intergroup conflict
      3. Interpersonal conflict
    2. Intrapersonal conflict
    3. Interorganization conflict
  4. Conflict Episodes
    1. Latent conflict. Sources of conflict in organizations. Here we find clues about the right interventions for reducing conflict.
    2. Perceived conflict
    3. Felt conflict
    4. Manifest conflict
    5. Conflict aftermath
    6. Relationship among conflict episodes
  5. Conflict Frames and Orientations
    1. Conflict frames
      1. Relationship-Task
      2. Emotional-Intellectual
      3. Cooperate-Win
    2. Conflict orientations
      1. As a person in a conflict episode, what will you do?
      2. Using one orientation predominantly. Affects your approach to conflict management described in the next section.
      3. Using many modes of behavior because circumstances restrict use of a single mode. Prefer collaborating but limited resources force you to use compromising.
      4. Some modes do not let a manager get to the antecedents of conflict (avoiding, compromise).
  6. Latent Conflict: Sources of Conflict in Organizations
    1. Antecedents to a conflict episode
    2. Latent conflict lurks in the background waiting for the right set of conditions to trigger manifest conflict
    3. Latent conflicts
      1. Scarce resources. Tangible or intangible. Money, equipment, facilities, influence, knowledge
      2. Highly differentiated organization. Different time horizons. Different goals and ways of viewing the world. Communication difficulties because of special language or jargon of the different groups.
      3. Rules, procedures, and policies
      4. Cohesive informal groups. Because of group membership, members will place high value on certain personal characteristics. Groups will differ in what they value. Conflict can potentially erupt when members of such groups interact.
      5. Interdependence. Joint decision making
      6. Communication barriers
      7. Ambiguous jurisdictions
      8. Reward systems that encourage incompatible behavior
  7. Conflict Management
    1. Desired level of organization conflict. Both what is required for most effective operation of the organization or unit of the organization and what you as a manager desire.
      1. Believe there is a desired conflict level for an organization
      2. Desired conflict level varies according to the perceived conflict requirements of the unit. The perception of the conflict requirements of the unit are affected by the manager's tolerance level for conflict. A manager who prefers to avoid conflict has a lower tolerance for conflict than a manager who is willing to actively engage in functional conflict behavior.
      3. Factors affecting the choice of the desired conflict level
        1. Organization culture. Placing a low value on debates and disagreements about important issues versus placing a high value on such behavior.
        2. Organization goals. Create innovative products or services
        3. Task requirements. Production line versus creative task group
        4. External environment
        5. Personal level of conflict tolerance
    2. Comparison of the actual conflict level to the desired conflict level.
      1. Dysfunctionally high
        1. Symptoms
          1. Low trust
          2. Distortion of information
          3. High level of tension during interpersonal interactions
          4. Antagonistic interactions (felt conflict)
          5. Sabotage or violence
        2. Reduce the conflict
      2. Dysfunctionally low
        1. Symptoms
          1. Suppression
            1. Denial of differences and desire to perceive similarities that do not exist
            2. Repress controversial information
            3. Prohibit disagreements about issues
          2. Withdrawal
            1. Reduced communication to avoid interactions that could lead to controversy
            2. "Peace at any price"
            3. Walking away from a disagreeable interaction
        2. Increase the conflict
      3. About right. Maintain conflict at the desired level
    3. Reducing conflict. Conflict resolution usually, but not suggesting conflict will be eliminated, only reduced to the desired level considered functional for the work unit.
      1. Lose-lose methods
        1. Avoidance
          1. Limit interaction
          2. Withdraw
        2. Compromise
          1. Bargaining
          2. Negotiation
        3. Third-party intervention. Submit conflict to neutral party for settlement
      2. Win-lose methods
        1. Dominance
        2. Authoritative command
        3. Majority rule
      3. Win-win methods. Each of the following is not entirely distinct from the others. There are useful differences among them. These can lead to no conflict aftermath.
        1. Problem solving
        2. Integration
        3. Superordinate goal
      4. Using multiple methods of conflict reduction
      5. Caution: do not reduce to a dysfunctionally low level
    4. Increasing Conflict
      1. Form heterogeneous groups
      2. Devil's advocate
      3. Dialectical inquiry
      4. Organizational culture of openness and debate
      5. Do not increase to a dysfunctionally high level
  8. International Aspects of Conflict in Organizations
    1. Collectivistic countries and desire for cooperative behavior. Functional levels of conflict could be lower than in noncollectivistic countries, such as the U.S.
    2. Presents a dilemma for a U.S. manager working in another country
    3. Increasing conflict in such countries could be a completely foreign view. The manager might believe that more conflict will produce more information, better ideas, and innovation. Local culture does not support such behavior
  9. Ethical Issues in Conflict in Organizations
    1. An individual's personal tolerance for conflict and amount of conflict experienced in an organization
      1. Manager's level of tolerance
      2. Subordinates' level of tolerance
      3. Manager's tolerance level and that of new hires. Disclosure
      4. Existing group and new manager. Disclosure.
    2. Form of manipulation. Trying to guide behavior in a desired direction. True of other topics in this book such as behavior modification as a motivation and behavior-shaping technique. Manager can openly state intention to use conflict as a tool for increasing ideas and innovation.
    3. Intrapersonal conflict from requests to act against one's moral values. Also, observing behavior that you consider unethical. The question of whistle-blowing.
    4. Differences in conflict levels among countries and managing at a functional level for people from collectivistic countries. Value conformity, orderliness, and group-oriented approaches to management.

Chapter Overview

Chapter 11 describes organizational conflict and conflict management. The chapter defines conflict and describes levels of conflict, functional conflict, and dysfunctional conflict. It includes a description of conflict frames and orientations and their effects on conflict behavior in organizations.

A key feature of the chapter is a well-integrated view of conflict episodes and the management of organizational conflict. Conflict management includes reducing and increasing conflict. Readers should develop insights about conflict processes especially from understanding latent conflict and its relationships to conflict aftermaths.

Learning Goals
After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Define conflict and conflict behavior in organizations.
  • Distinguish between functional and dysfunctional conflict.
  • Compare different levels and types of conflict in organizations.
  • Analyze conflict episodes and the linkages among them.
  • Examine the role of latent conflict in a conflict episode and its sources in an organization.
  • Describe different conflict frames and orientations.
  • Discuss conflict management.
  • List the sources of latent conflict in organizations.
  • Use various techniques to reduce and increase conflict.
  • Explain some international and ethical issues in conflict management.

Personal and Management Implications

Understanding your orientation to conflict can help you better interpret your reaction to others during a conflict episode. If you prefer to avoid conflict, another party to a conflict episode will quickly have the advantage. Although you might have good ideas about a problem or issue, those ideas may be lost because of your avoidance tendency.

If you tend to dominate or want to win a conflict episode, your ideas may dominate the solution. The problem, though, is that the solution will not benefit from others' ideas and may not be as good as it would have been otherwise.

Sometimes you may find yourself in conflict, but not understand why the conflict started. Look carefully for latent conflicts that have lain dormant in the situation in the past. Those latent conflicts, though sometimes hard to see, can be the real basis of your conflict. Only after finding the latencies can you do an effective job of reducing conflict you do not want.

You often will find yourself in a work situation where managers do not know how to manage conflict effectively. Conflict levels may get dysfunctionally high for you and prevent you from doing an effective job. You will become frustrated and stressed by the repeated conflict episodes. Unfortunately, you cannot always directly reduce the conflict level that is blocking you from doing a good job.

Understanding conflict episodes and the dynamics within them helps a manager shape a strategy for conflict management. The conflict orientation of the parties to the conflict plays an important role. A manager can find it difficult to comprehend the different orientations people have, especially when those orientations sharply differ from his own. Differences in cultural values about conflict will also affect conflict orientation. Such differences will arise in multinational organizations and those with high workforce diversity.

Predicting and then preventing conflict are skills every manager should develop. Developing these skills requires a full understanding of the true bases of conflict in organizations. Knowing the role of latent conflict in a conflict episode will give you keen insight into predicting and preventing conflict. Managers who are considering major changes in job or organizational design should analyze the proposed changes for sources of latent conflict. If latent conflict is found, the proposals can be altered to reduce or remove the latencies.


Chapter Summary

Conflict in organizations is opposition, incompatible behaviors, or antagonistic interaction. It includes interactions in which one party opposes another party, or one party tries to prevent or block another party from reaching his goals. Conflict can have both functional and dysfunctional effects on an organization.

Conflict behavior happens within interpersonal interactions, between groups (intergroup), within groups (intragroup), and between organizations (interorganization). Other conflict behavior starts because ­people experience strong conflicts within themselves (intrapersonal).

Conflict in organizations has an episodic quality. Many aspects of organizations act as the conflict latencies that can start an episode. Latent conflict lies dormant until conditions are right for the conflict to emerge as manifest conflict. The latter is the actual conflict behavior between the parties in a conflict episode. Managers can try to reduce the conflict by using a method of conflict reduction. Conflict episodes often end with a conflict aftermath that can become the latent conflict for a later episode.

There are many methods for reducing and increasing conflict. Most methods of conflict reduction leave a conflict aftermath. A few, such as integration and resource expansion, do not. Managers must carefully use the methods for increasing conflict so conflict ­levels do not become dysfunctionally high.

Countries differ in the levels of conflict that are functional. For example, collectivistic countries have a lower level of functional conflict than individualistic countries. Such differences raise an ethical question: Should managers honor the local country’s ­values even if their home country values support higher levels of conflict?

Functions and Dysfunctions of Conflict

Define conflict in organizations. Discuss the functions and dysfunctions of conflict. Do you view conflict as mainly functional or dysfunctional? Discuss examples of functional and dysfunctional conflict you have experienced.

Conflict Episodes

Describe the parts of a conflict episode and the relationships among them. Discuss the role of perceived and felt conflict on the results of a conflict episode.

Conflict Frames and Orientations

Discuss conflict frames and orientations. Which orientation best characterizes you? What do you tend to do when entering a conflict episode?

Methods of Reducing Conflict

Discuss the methods of reducing conflict that are most likely and least likely to leave a conflict aftermath. Why do the different methods leave or not leave an aftermath?

Methods of Increasing Conflict

Discuss the methods of increasing conflict. When should a manager increase conflict? What ¬cautions should a manager observe when increasing conflict?

Latent Conflict

What is latent conflict? What are some organizational features that can be latent conflict? What is the relationship between latent conflict and conflict aftermath? Give examples from your work experiences.

Conflict Management

Conflict management includes both reducing and increasing conflict. What major issues do you see for a manager trying to manage conflict in an organization?

Butch Cassidy and the Sundance Kid (1969)

A distant posse endlessly pursues outlaws Butch Cassidy (Paul Newman) and the Sundance Kid (Robert Redford). They go to Bolivia, expecting to outwit the posse and find a new life. Events do not turn out positively for them, leading to a dramatic shoot-out in the end

This sequence starts at the beginning of DVD Chapter 4, “The Hole in the Wall,” and continues to the end of DVD Chapter 5, “How Harvey Sees It.” Butch and Sundance ride to the gang's Hole-in-the-Wall, Wyoming hideout. The sequence ends after Butch says, “Harvey thought of that! Well, I'll tell you something, fellas. That's exactly what we're gonna do.”

Consider the following questions and observations while viewing this film sequence: When does Butch perceive that a conflict episode might begin? Describe the latent conflict shown in this sequence. Which conflict reduction method discussed in this chapter does Butch use to end the conflict episode?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Fried Green Tomatoes (1991)1

Repressed Southern housewife Evelyn Couch (Kathy Bates) lives in the small Southern town of Whistle Stop, Alabama. She meets spry, elderly Ninny Threadgoode (Jessica Tandy) while visiting her complaining mother-in-law at a nursing home. Ninny's story of two women who lived 50 years earlier inspires Evelyn to take charge of her life. She develops an alter ego, Towanda, a more independent person determined to improve her boring marriage and reclaim her life.

This scene opens in the Winn-Dixie grocery store parking lot (DVD Chapter 27, “Towanda the Avenger”). It follows the scene in which Idgie Threadgoode (Mary Stuart Masterson) and Ruth Jamison (Mary-Louise Parker) discuss Frank Bennett's (Nick Searcy) death. The scene fades in from a shot of Ruth's face to the parking lot. Evelyn Couch looks for a parking space. The scene ends as Evelyn drives away and the film cuts to an outside shot of the nursing home (Stop 1:23:06).2

Use the following questions as guides to your viewing of the scene: Does Evelyn expect to enter a conflict episode in the parking lot? What is the latent conflict in the episode? Describe the manifest conflict. What does Evelyn do to end the conflict episode?

Notes

  1. From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resources, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc. Reproduced by permission. www.cengage.com/permissions
  2. Recommended by Laura Dufek, MBA student, The Robert O. Anderson School of Management, The University of New Mexico.

Your Conflict Orientations

Your ratings of each conflict orientation tell you which orientation is likely the strongest and most often used. Think of the highest rated orientation as your “primary” orientation and the others as your “secondary” orientations. You likely use your primary orientation in many different situations, either at work or away from work. This is true especially if the difference between the top ranked orientation and the next ranked one is large.

You also likely move among the orientations if the differences between them are small. In this situation, you can choose an orientation based on the importance of the issue to you, or the person or persons involved in the conflict episode. If you are in a work situation, you might set aside feelings and emotions, and pick collaborative, compromise, or dominance. If you are in a nonwork situation with a person to whom you are close, you might pick accommodative or avoidance. People vary in which conflict orientation they use in different situations.

Groups of people with different primary conflict orientations present major challenges to someone responsible for managing or guiding the group. Look at the following combinations of orientations. What could happen in each?


Dominance, avoidance

Avoidance, avoidance

Collaborative, compromise, avoidance


In the first case, the avoidance person would succumb to the dominance. In the second case, likely nothing would happen. And in the third case, the collaborative person would try to find a root cause of the conflict while the compromise person would want to split the differences. The avoidance person likely would withdraw from the conflict episode.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 12.

achievement-oriented leader behavior

In path-goal theory, behavior that emphasizes excellence in subordinate performance and improvements in performance.

charismatic leadership theories

A set of leadership theories focused on understanding the role of charisma in leadership. Charismatic leaders attract devoted followers who energetically pursue the leader's vision.

consideration

The people-oriented dimension of leader behavior (in the Ohio State Leadership Studies).

contingency theory of leadership, Fiedler’s

Holds that individual and situation characteristics affect the choice of correct leader behavior; views such behavior as a disposition that is hard to change; match the leader to the situation or change the situation to a fit a leader's predispositions.

directive leader behavior

In path-goal theory, behavior that focuses on the task to be done, when it must be done, and how it must be done.

employee-centered behavior

Leadership behavior that focuses on the people in the work units, their personal success, and the quality of the social system that forms in the work units (in the University of Michigan Studies).

emergent leaders

Leaders that appear spontaneously within an organization; usually do not hold formally appointed management positions. Such leaders are often found within formal and informal groups.

enhancers

Processes or persons that strengthen the connection between leader behavior and subordinate satisfaction and performance.

implicit leadership theory

In leadership attributions, a standard of comparison for leadership qualities held by a person.

initiating structure

The task-oriented dimension of leader behavior (in the Ohio State Leadership Studies).

leader-member relations

In Fiedler's contingency theory, the dimension of leader subordinate situations that describes the quality of the relationship between subordinates and leader; include trust and whether the leader is respected.

leadership (II)

A social influence process involving two or more people: the leader and a follower (or a potential follower); tries to affect the behavior of other people and change organizations.

leadership attributions

A view of leadership perception that holds that to determine whether someone is a leader, people compare observed and inferred behavior to an implicit leadership theory.

leadership categorization

A view of leadership perception that holds that people observe behavior and then compare it to a cognitive category describing leaders and decide whether the observed person is a leader. The cognitive category is either a leadership prototype or a leadership exemplar.

leadership exemplar

A specific person people regard as a leader; e.g., Martin Luther King, Jr. or Indra K. Nooyi, Chairman and CEO of PepsiCo. One of two comparison objects in the leadership categorization view of leadership perceptions.

leadership mystique

In Jennings's theory, a set of ideas, values, and beliefs that are the essence of leadership; includes a sense of mission, a capacity for power, and a will to survive and to persevere.

sense of mission

In the leadership mystique; a vision of some future state for the organization.

capacity for power

In the leadership mystique; the ability to get and use power to pursue the leader’s mission.

will to survive and persevere

In the leadership mystique; persistence in pursuing the leader’s mission despite any opposition.

leadership prototype

Person’s cognitive image of characteristics, qualities, behaviors, and traits that make up a leader. One of two comparison objects in the leadership categorization view of leadership perceptions.

leadership traits

Qualities characteristic of successful leaders or that distinguish leaders from followers. Two sets of traits identified in the research: (1) intelligence, dominance, self-confidence, energy, and task-relevant knowledge; and (2) drive, the desire to lead, honesty/integrity, self-confidence, cognitive ability, and knowledge of the business.

managers

Distinguish from leaders who change organizations; managers sustain and control organizations.

leaders

Distinguish from managers who sustain and control organizations; leaders change organizations.

neutralizers

Processes or persons who break the connection between leader behavior and subordinate response, preventing leaders from having an effect.

participative leader behavior

In path-goal theory, behavior that emphasizes consultation with subordinates and serious consideration of their ideas before making decisions.

path-goal theory of leadership, House's

Holds that a leader's role is one of affecting a subordinate's motivation to reach desired goals; uses rewards and clears subordinates' paths to goals.

personal factors

In path-goal theory, one of two sets of contingency factors that are important in the choice of leader behavior; include subordinates' perception of their ability, their perception of the source of control over them (locus of control), and their views of people in authority positions (authoritarianism).

ability

A personal factor in path-goal theory; the ability of subordinate’s to do their tasks. The theory says people with low ability will respond positively to directive leader behavior. Those with high ability prefer less direction.

locus of control

A personal factor in path-goal theory; the extent to which a person views control as internal or external to the person. The theory says people who feel externally controlled will respond positively to directive leader behavior. Internally controlled people prefer less direction from a supervisor or manager.

external control

Part of the locus of control personal factor in the path-goal theory of leadership; external control personality types believe that luck, fate, or powerful external forces control their destiny. Path-goal theory says people who feel externally controlled will respond positively to directive leader behavior.

internal control

Part of the locus of control personal factor in the path-goal theory of leadership; internal control personality types believe they control what happens to them. Path-goal theory says people who feel internally controlled prefer less direction from a supervisor or manager.

authoritarianism

A personal factor in path-goal theory; high authoritarianism people defer to those in authority; low authoritarianism people tend not to defer to authority positions. The theory says that low authoritarianism people will prefer participative not directive leader behavior.

position power

In Fiedler's contingency theory, the dimension that describes the formal organization power of the leader.

production-centered behavior

Leader behavior that focuses on the task to be done with little concern for the people involved (in University of Michigan Studies).

relationship-oriented leaders

In Fiedler's contingency theory, leaders who focus on people, are considerate, and are not strongly directive.

substitutes

Persons or processes that can act in place of leaders, making the leaders unnecessary.

supportive leader behavior

In path-goal theory, behavior that emphasizes concern for subordinates and their needs.

task structure

In Fiedler's contingency theory, the dimension of leader subordinate situations that describes the extent to which the work is well defined and standardized.

task-oriented leaders

In Fiedler's contingency theory, leaders who focus on the work to be done, are directive, structure situations, set deadlines, and make task assignments.

transformational leadership

A type of leadership that emphasizes charisma individualized consideration, and intellectual stimulation.

charisma

In transformational leadership, one of three leader behaviors or characteristics; a leader’s personal qualities than can induce leader trust and confidence among subordinates. Charismatic leaders often have high self-confidence, self-esteem, and self-determination.

individualized consideration

In transformational leadership, one of three leader behaviors or characteristics; leader recognizes variations in subordinates’ skills, abilities, and desires for growth opportunities.

intellectual stimulation

In transformational leadership, one of three leader behaviors or characteristics; leader’s ability to build high awareness of problems and solutions. They stimulate subordinates to image new and different -future states for the group.

work environment factors

In path-goal theory, one of two sets of contingency factors that are important in the choice of leader behavior; includes tasks, formal authority, and the primary workgroup.

tasks

In path-goal theory, one of three work environment factors (contingency factor) that are important in the choice of leader behavior; affects the degree of work environment ambiguity. Tasks done according to standard operating procedures are less ambiguous than tasks done in a more fluid setting suggesting the use of supportive leader behavior.

formal authority

In path-goal theory, one of three work environment factors (contingency factor) that are important in the choice of leader behavior; affects the degree of work environment ambiguity. Well-defined authority in a leader’s role lets a leader define work roles and set clear goals (directive leader behavior), reducing work environment ambiguity.

primary workgroup

In path-goal theory, one of three work environment factors (contingency factor) that are important in the choice of leader behavior; affects the degree of work environment ambiguity. Primary workgroups consisting of people who are not strongly identified with each other will not develop well-defined procedures for doing the group’s work. This ambiguous work environment suggests using directive leader behavior.

self-leadership

focuses on the individual and moves the person toward intrinsically motivating tasks.

superleadership

form of empowerment that focuses on getting followers to lead themselves.

servant-leadership

combines serving and leading; focuses on the environment to harmoniously reach its goals.

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Leadership is a social influence process involving two or more people: the leader and a follower (or a potential follower)
    2. The influence process has two dimensions
      1. Leader’s intention to affect the behavior of at least one other person
      2. Target of the influence effort perceives the behavior as acceptable
    3. Leaders found in different places in organizations
      1. Formal organization positions such as a manager, supervisor, foreman, or vice-president
      2. Emergent leaders often found within formal and informal groups in organizations
  2. Management and Leadership
    1. Leaders
      1. Have a vision of a different condition for the organization. Inspires followers to pursue that vision. Willing to take risks if she perceives high payoffs to a course of action.
      2. Use power for influence. Pulls people along instead of using sanctions to coerce people into compliance.
      3. Find problems to solve
      4. Actively seek opposing views to identify options to a course of action
      5. Often brings chaos to an organization in pursuit of a vision
    2. Managers
      1. Go in the direction of the present vision for the organization; does not create a new one
      2. Solve problems and try to bring order to the work place while ensuring the commitment of people to the goals of the organization
      3. Takes less risk than a leader
      4. Uses available rewards and sanctions coupled with much of the knowledge of human motivation in earlier chapters
      5. Manage conflicting views by compromising among them
    3. Implications
      1. How much is required by the position?
      2. Different requirements for leadership in different positions
      3. Changes in requirements for leadership over time
  3. Trait Approaches to Leadership
    1. Leadership traits
      1. Description
      2. Some show up consistently
      3. Importance of the situation
  4. Behavioral Theories of Leadership
    1. Left the trait approach because of the inconsistent results. Began focusing on behavior of managers—what they do, not who they are. Two different research groups—one at the University of Michigan and the other at Ohio State University. Research identified two major classes of behavior that were consistently found in their studies.
    2. University of Michigan leadership studies: job-centered and employee-centered behavior.
    3. Ohio State University leadership studies: initiating structure and consideration. Two independent continua. Supervisor or manager could use various amounts of both sets of behavior at the same time.
    4. What the research found. Led to contingency research. Needed to consider various aspects of the situation in choosing leadership behavior
  5. Contingency Theories of Leadership
    1. Fiedler's contingency theory of leadership
      1. Description
        1. Individuals have a fixed set of personality-like traits that do not change much. Task versus relationship motivation. Similar to the behavioral dimensions discussed above. Fiedler views these as traits, not behaviors. Needs that the supervisor or manager is trying to satisfy.
        2. The situation in which the supervisor or manager is placed varies in degree of favorableness to the person. The situation allows or does not allow control or influence by the supervisor or manager.
        3. Characteristics of the situation that determine its favorableness, in order of importance, according to Fiedler
          1. Leader-member relations
          2. Task structure
          3. Position power
        4. Matching the leader to the situation. Examples
    2. House's path-goal leadership theory
      1. Description
        1. Introduction
          1. Viewing leadership as managing motivation. Strongly based on expectancy theory
          2. Leader behavior should enhance the expectancy that an employee's effort will lead to performance and a reward will follow the performance.
          3. Clearing a path for goal accomplishment and giving feedback and rewards for that accomplishment.
          4. Two major functions: enhance expectancies and reward behavior.
          5. Path-goal theory describes the leader behavior that is right for various situations. Not traits. Describes strong contingency relationships between situation characteristics and leader behavior
      2. Leader behavior
        1. Directive. Similar to job-centered, initiating structure, and task-motivated
        2. Supportive. Similar to employee-centered, consideration, and relationship-motivated.
        3. Participative
        4. Achievement-oriented
        5. Repertoire of behaviors from which a leader can choose. Flexibility
      3. Situation factors
        1. Individual factors
          1. Locus of control: internal versus external
          2. Perceived ability: low versus high. role of experience and esteem needs.
        2. Organization and task environment factors
          1. Task structure: structured versus unstructured. Role of task design.
          2. Authority system of the organization
          3. Work group: cohesive vs. not cohesive. Role of informal groups and their dynamics (see Chapter 10, “Groups and Intergroup Processes).
        3. The fit between leader behaviors and factors in the task and organizational environment. What are the conditions under which the various behaviors can be used? Use the model analytically and diagnostically.
          1. Redundancies
            1. Cohesive group and supportive behavior
            2. Structured task and directive behavior
          2. Congruency
  6. Alternative Views of Leadership
    1. The leadership mystique
      1. A sense of mission
      2. A capacity for power
      3. A will to survive and to persevere
    2. Transformational leadership
      1. Charisma
      2. Individualized consideration
      3. Intellectual stimulation
    3. Charismatic leadership theories. Many emerged in the mid 1970s.
      1. Look beyond the present
      2. Create and communicate an inspirational vision
      3. Build trust
      4. Empower others
    4. Leader-Member Exchange (LMX) Theory
      1. Based on an exchange relationship between the leader and each of her followers. Not based on the degree of unilateral influence that a leader has over a follower because of the leader’s organizational position.
      2. The relationship can mature into a partnership with each follower. The leader and follower shape the partnership according to the mutual desires of each party.
      3. High quality exchange relationships feature high levels of mutual respect, trust, and obligation. Job performance extends well beyond one’s job description. A strong bond develops between the leader and follower, helping to build high job performance.
      4. Low quality exchange relationships feature low levels of mutual respect, trust, and obligation. Job performance stays within one’s job description.
      5. Work groups could have variations among group members in the quality of their LMX relationship. Teams with large differences in LMX relationship quality can have reduced member satisfaction and higher interpersonal conflict. Less true for teams with independent tasks.
    5. Self-Leadership, SuperLeadership and Servant-Leadership
      1. Self-Leadership focuses on the individual and moves the person toward intrinsically motivating tasks.
      2. SuperLeadership is a form of empowerment that focuses on getting followers to lead themselves.
      3. Servant-Leadership combines serving and leading. It also focuses on the environment to harmoniously reach its goals
  7. Leadership and Self-Managing Teams
    1. Increasing use of such teams. Described in Chapter 10. Have had in Europe and some Scandinavian countries. Growing in U.S. and Canada since.
    2. Changes the traditional distribution of decision authority. Teams taking on much decision authority that had been in the roles of managers and supervisors. Such teams often decide work schedules, set performance goals, assess team member performance, purchase supplies, assess quality, interact with vendors, and interact with internal or external customers. Those activities typically had been done by managers and supervisors. Self-managing teams decide those matters along with doing their regular work of producing a product or providing a service.
      1. Changes the roles of managers and supervisors outside the team
      2. Defines new roles for some members of the team
    3. Each team typically has a team leader who is either selected by team members or appointed by a manager or supervisor outside the team. Some team leaders hold the job permanently. Others teams rotate members through the position. Some team members may not feel well prepared to take on such roles.
    4. Leadership issues
      1. Traits and behavior described earlier in this chapter apply to team leaders
      2. Benefit from viewing the team leader role from the different perspectives offered by various theories
  8. Substitutes, Neutralizers, and Enhancers of Leadership Behavior
    1. Substitutes act in place of the leadership
    2. Neutralizers prevent leader behavior from affecting subordinates
    3. Enhancers strengthen the effects of leader behavior on subordinates
  9. Leadership Perceptions: "We Know a Leader When We See One"
    1. Leadership categorization
      1. Leadership prototype
      2. Leadership exemplar
    2. Leadership attributions
  10. Women, Men, and Leadership
    1. Continuing debate about differences in leadership behavior of women and men.
    2. Held the view that the socialization of men built a competitive and aggressive leadership style while the socialization of women built a nurturing and caring leadership style.
    3. One study showed some difference but its research design restricts generalizations of its results. Sample drawn from members of the International Women's Forum and male leaders nominated by them. Had a 31 percent response rate. Findings: men more likely transactional; women more likely transformational.
    4. The empirical evidence, however, basically says there is no documented difference in leadership behavior of women and men in equivalent organization positions.
  11. International Aspects of Leadership and Management
    1. Wide variations in cultural values that are related to different approaches or styles of leadership and management
    2. Results of specific cross-cultural studies
    3. Global Leadership and Organizational Behavior Effectiveness Program (GLOBE)
  12. Ethical Issues in Leadership and Management
    1. Leadership uses social influence to deliberately affect the direction of another person's behavior. Such changes in a person's behavior can happen without a person consciously making the change. Leaders also can use much of the behavioral knowledge in this book to shape and direct the behavior of another person. An ethical issue focuses on whether such efforts are manipulation behavior.
    2. Changing attitudes, values, and beliefs. Without a conscious effort of an employee. For example, quality management as a transformation of an organization's values from only a profit or cost focus to one stressing customers, processes, and continuous improvement.
    3. Argument for an open system
    4. Ethical leadership
      1. An ethical leader confronts moral dilemmas, rewards ethical behavior, and builds an ethical organizational culture.
      2. At least one study felt ethical charismatic leaders behaved in many ways that were different from the behavior of unethical leaders.
      3. Ethical leader behavior
        1. Encouraged and developed critical thinking among followers. Actively sought different views. Examining critical issues from many perspectives.
        2. Helped followers develop in ways consistent with their needs, aspirations, and abilities.
        3. Invited negative and positive feedback without reprisal. Did not fear criticism
        4. Pursued the goals of the organization, not self-interest
        5. Developed a shared vision.
        6. Recognized the contributions of everyone to successfully reach that vision.
        7. Widely shared information with followers. Actively sought other peoples' views about critical issues.
        8. Had high moral standards that caused the leader to resolve ethical dilemmas
    5. The result is continuously growing and developing people who are major assets to the leader in jointly solving problems. Unethical leaders create followers who have disciple-like attachment to the leader but are unable to strike out alone.

Chapter Overview

Chapter 12 describes various approaches to leadership research and outlines the conclusions that one can draw from that research. The chapter contrasts leadership and management and shows the difference between the two concepts. It discusses the conditions under which an organization needs leadership, management, or both. The chapter uses modern examples of leaders and managers in several sectors to show the points.

This chapter develops current thinking about trait, behavioral, and contingency approaches to leadership. It then describes some alternative views of leadership in organizations: leadership mystique, transformational leadership,  charismatic leadership, and leader-member exchange theory. Two sections follow that describe substitutes, neutralizers, and enhancers of leadership behavior and how leadership perceptions define who is and who is not a leader. The chapter also addresses the special issues surrounding self-managing teams. A separate section discusses women, men, and leadership.

Learning Goals
After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Describe leadership as an influence process in organizations.
  • Discuss the differences between leadership and management.
  • Distinguish among the trait, behavioral, and contingency theories of leadership.
  • List the traits that distinguish leaders from nonleaders.
  • Compare some alternative views of leadership.
  • Analyze the effects of self-managing teams on leadership.
  • Explain the role of substitutes, neutralizers, and enhancers of leadership behavior.
  • Contrast some aspects of women, men, and leadership.
  • Describe how perceptual processes affect people’s conclusions about who is a leader and who is not a leader.
  • Appreciate some international and ethical issues that surround leadership and management

Personal and Management implications

Do you feel you have some traits associated with leadership? If you do, the chances are good you will find yourself in a leadership role in the future. If you are now involved in clubs or campus organizations, do you try to exercise leadership? Both your traits and your present behavior give you some clues about possible leadership roles you will play in the future.

What type of leadership behavior do you prefer? Do you prefer more people-centered behavior or more task-centered behavior? Do you want to work for someone who emphasizes achievement? Would you like to participate in decisions that are likely to have a strong effect on you? Knowing the type of leader behavior you like will help you assess new job situations in the future. The cross-cultural differences in preferences described in the international section imply that desirable leader behavior varies from culture to culture. If you work outside your home country, you can expect variations in leader behavior preferences.

Transformational leaders often get higher performance from subordinates than the subordinates ever expected to achieve. Do not be surprised by your behavior if you find yourself working for a transformational leader. Such leaders create genuine excitement in subordinates and persuade them to act in extraordinary ways.

The distinction drawn earlier between management and leadership is important for managers to consider. A supervisory or management position may need more management behavior than leadership behavior, although the position may require some leadership behavior. Analyze your situation. If it requires change, then leadership behavior in the different forms described in the text chapter is required. If the situation is stable, then it needs management behavior that maintains and cares for your part of the organization.

Managers responsible for hiring other managers or supervisors often unknowingly use personal traits in their selection decision. If you use traits in your hiring decisions, you should examine the situation to be sure the individual you are considering will be successful. Note also that two behaviors, people and task, persist throughout the leadership research. All leaders and managers use these basic behaviors.

The contingency theories of leadership advise you to analyze the situation you are managing. If you do not have the behavioral flexibility suggested by path-goal theory, Fiedler's theory guides you toward the situations suited to your predispositions. If your behavior is flexible, path-goal theory guides you in a joint analysis of your situation and the behavior required for success. Consider both contingency approaches when reviewing your situation and your behavioral predispositions. The contingency view can be important to you if the people reporting to you come from different cultures.

Both leadership mystique and transformational leadership emphasize the role that charisma and a vision of the future play in leadership success. Do you have those qualities? Can you infuse your subordinates with excitement about the future? Think about it! Those two qualities may be the keys for successful leadership performance.

The discussion of substitutes, neutralizers, and enhancers of leadership gave you guides to aspects of your situation that change your influence over subordinates. Many factors in your situation can affect your influence over those who work for you.


Chapter Summary

Leadership is an influence process involving two or more people. The person who is the target of the influence effort must attribute that effort to a specific person and consider it acceptable.

Leaders and managers play different roles in organizations. Leaders try to change organizations, while managers sustain and control them. Organizations also have different needs for those roles at different levels and at different times in their history.

Trait theories describe traits consistently associated with leadership, such as intelligence, dominance, self-confidence, energy, the desire to lead, honesty, and task-relevant knowledge. Behavioral theories of leadership describe task- and people-oriented behavior as stable dimensions of leader behavior. Two ­contingency theories give different views of how situations affect leader behavior. Fiedler’s contingency theory of leadership says that leaders have a predisposition to focus on people or on tasks. House’s path-goal theory of leadership says that leaders can choose from four behaviors and combine them according to the needs of the situation. Those behaviors are directive, supportive, participative, and achievement-­oriented.

The alternative leadership theories are the leadership mystique, transformational leadership, charismatic leadership, and LMX theory. Each of these theories emphasizes the role of charisma and vision in effective leadership. Self-Leadership, SuperLeadership, and Servant-Leadership were also part of the alternative theories.

The growing use of self-managing work teams in American and Canadian organizations is changing the role of leaders inside and outside the teams. Many observations in this chapter apply to such teams and can guide team leaders and those who coordinate ­activities of several teams.

Situations surrounding leaders have many factors that substitute for leader behavior, neutralize the behavior, or enhance the behavior. Understanding a situation’s characteristics is an important step in being an effective leader in an organization.

The core values that define the relationships between leaders and followers or managers and subordinates vary across cultures. People in countries with values that specify hierarchical relationships in organi-zations react more positively to directive approaches than to participative approaches.

An ethical leader confronts moral dilemmas, rewards ethical behavior, and builds an ethical organizational culture. Such qualities are especially important to consider for leaders who have strong effects on their followers.

Leadership and Management

Discuss the difference between leadership and management. What roles do leaders and managers play in organizations?

Leadership Traits

Review the leadership traits described in the chapter. Are there any people, living or dead, who have those traits? To which traits do you respond most positively?

Behavioral Theories of Leadership

Review the two behavioral approaches to leadership. What are the similarities and differences in the two approaches?

Fiedler’s Contingency Theory of Leadership

Discuss the three dimensions in Fiedler’s contingency theory of leadership. Try to identify an example from your experiences of one situation shown in textbook Figure 12.1. Did the leader in that ¬situation behave as predicted by the theory? If not, did you perceive the leader as effective or ineffective? Discuss how the theory explains why the leader was effective or ineffective.

House’s Path-Goal Theory of Leadership

The path-goal theory of leadership describes two sets of contingency factors—personal factors of subordinates and work environment factors. Discuss how these factors affect the choice of leader behavior. Give examples from your work experiences.

Alternative Views of Leadership

Review the alternative views of leadership. How do those views differ from the other theories of leadership? Why?

Substitutes, Neutralizers, and Enhancers of Leadership Behavior

Have you ever been in a situation where substitutes, neutralizers, or enhancers of leadership existed? What did the leader do in that situation? What was the effect of the substitutes, neutralizers, or enhancers?

The American President (1995)1

President Andrew Shepherd (Michael Douglas), a widower, decides to romantically pursue lobbyist Sydney Ellen Wade (Annette Bening). He does not realistically assess the political implications of his involvement with Wade, leading him to reassess his commitment to her and the country. The portrayal of the President as witty, handsome, honest, and decisive will both fit and not fit stereotypes of American presidents. This film ranked 75th in the American Film Institute's 2002 ranking of cinema love stories.2

These scenes start after the opening credits. They begin with a shot of a White House hallway with Secret Service Agent Cooper (Beau Billingslea) in the foreground (DVD Chapter 2, “Monday Morning”). He says into his microphone, “Liberty's moving.” President Andrew Shepherd enters the hallway in the background with his assistant, Janie Basdin (Samantha Mathis). The scenes end after President Shepherd leaves the room following his Monday morning staff meeting. He asks Janie what is next on his calendar. The film cuts to a street shot. DVD Chapter 2 fully contains these scenes.

Keep the following questions in mind while viewing this film sequence: Which leadership traits does the President show? Which leadership traits does Chief of Staff A. J. MacInerney (Martin Sheen) show? Which leadership traits does Lewis Rothschild (Michael J. Fox) show?

Notes

  1. From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resources, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc. Reproduced by permission. www.cengage.com/permissions
  2. Germain, D. 2002. ‘Casablanca’ Top Romance Film: Institute Picks 100 Best Love Stories. The Associated Press. As the story appeared in the Albuquerque Journal (12 June): C13.

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Norma Rae (1979)

The reluctant workers of a Southern textile mill move slowly toward union membership. Norma Rae's (Sally Field) leadership and dedication move them toward that goal. Encouragement and guidance come from labor organizer Reuben (Ron Leibman).

The scenes are completely contained within DVD Chapter 26, “A Woman Alone.” They begin with a shot of a sign on a door that reads “Transfer Traffic Only.” The scenes end after Sheriff Lamar Miller (Gregory Walcott) escorts Norma Rae out of the factory.

View the scene first and then answer the following questions: What are Norma Rae's leadership traits? Do the workers respond to her leadership efforts? Which leadership behaviors discussed in this chapter does Norma Rae show?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Leadership and Management

Managers and leaders typically differ in the traits, behaviors, and characteristics presented to you in the exercise. Managers can have most of the traits and behaviors listed. One exception is “desire to lead”. Although managers normally lack this trait, it is not a sign of weakness. Managers also can build trust and empower others.

Managers should behave in a steady, well-focused way, trying to reach already set goals for the organization or their work unit within the organization. They typically do not change the direction of work systems, preferring to move steadily forward, often with high efficiency. Managers are a critical part of any organization. They play a key role that differs from that of a leader.

Leaders can show many traits listed in the exercise, a mixture of the behaviors, and most of the characteristics. The pattern you noted for a leader should strongly differ from the pattern you noted for a manager. Leaders often change the direction of work systems, requiring characteristics such as inspirational vision, intellectual stimulation, and charisma. The latter usually distinguishes a leader from a manager. It should appear in your list describing the leader of your choice.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 13.

active listening

A form of listening in which the listener is responsible for hearing the speaker's message correctly; requires accurately hearing the facts in the message and a deliberate effort to understand the speaker's viewpoint.

American Sign Language (ASL)

Uses patterns of hand and finger movements to let deaf and hearing impaired people communicate; a form of verbal communication.

basic communication process

Involves a sender, receiver, and message flowing over a communication channel; also includes feedback to the sender from the receiver's response to the message; surrounded by noise that helps distort the message.

sender

A part of the basic communication process; creates messages from one or more symbols to which the person attaches meaning; converts the message to a signal and transmits the message over a communication channel to the receiver.

receiver

A part of the basic communication process; decodes the received message and interprets its meaning; responds to the message by acting consistently with that interpretation.

channel

A part of the basic communication process; a person’s voice, an electronic device, a written medium, or a video medium.

communication media

A part of the basic communication process; telephones, e-mail, letters or memoranda, videoconferencing, and face-to-face meetings.

feedback loop

A part of the basic communication process; interdependence between the sender and receiver during the communication process; sender interprets the receiver’s response and can send an additional message for clarification.

noise

A part of the basic communication process; surrounds the entire communication process in organizations and can make communication less effective.

centralized communication networks

Networks in which a single person is a key figure in sending and receiving messages; only one or a few parts of the network have the potential to get information.

communication effectiveness, improving

Methods include training, asking for feedback from a receiver, understanding cultural differences, avoiding complexity and jargon, and reducing noise.

communication network (II)

A ¬series of interconnected positions in an organization; formal as ¬defined by organizational positions and relationships among them; informal as defined by informal patterns of social interaction. Communication over the network goes in any direction: downward, upward, or horizontally.

communication roles

Five roles played by individuals in an organization’s communication process: initiators, relayers, liaisons, terminators, and isolates.

initiators

One of five communication roles in organizations; start communications and send more messages than they receive or pass on to someone else.

relayers

One of five communication roles in organizations; receive and pass on more messages than they start or end.

liaisons

One of five communication roles in organizations; connect two parts of an organization but are not a members of either part. A liaison helps coordinate organizational functions by getting messages from one part of an organization to another.

terminators

One of five communication roles in organizations; at the end of a communication network and mainly receive messages; infrequently send messages or relay information to others in the organization.

isolates

One of five communication roles in organizations; usually outside the normal communication process; send, receive, or relay few messages.One of five communication roles in organizations; usually outside the normal communication process; send, receive, or relay few messages.

decentralized communication networks

Networks in which communication flows freely with no one person playing a central or controlling role; all parts of the network have equal information status.

dysfunctions of organizational communication

Errors and problems that can occur in organizational communication; include selective perception, semantic problems, message distortion, information overload, poorly timed messages, and organizational silence.

selective perception

A dysfunction of organizational communication; receivers block out information they do not want to hear in a message.

semantic problems

A dysfunction of organizational communication; receiver’s interpretation of a message is different from the sender’s intended message.

message distortion

A dysfunction of organizational communication; occurs when the sender and receiver do not have the same frame of reference or otherwise distort a message.

message timing

A dysfunction of organizational communication; short deadlines do not leave enough time for accurate interpretation; messages sent well ahead of time for action may result in a receiver not remembering the messages.

organizational silence

A dysfunction of organizational communication; absence of communication; employees withhold their opinions about organizational matters because they believe it is futile or they will experience reprisal.

information overload

A dysfunction of organizational communication; happens when a person gets more information than the person can process effectively.

message filtration

A dysfunction of organizational communication; reduces a message’s information content, possibly leading to misinterpretation by the receiver.

electronic and video communication

Communication via modern technological devices such as electronic mail, computer networks, and videoconferencing.

functions of organizational communication

The good results of communication in organizations; include information sharing, performance feedback, integration and coordination, persuasion, emotion, and innovation.

share information

A function of organizational communication; with people both inside and outside the organization; includes descriptions of the organization’s mission, strategy, policies, and tasks.

performance feedback

A function of organizational communication; lets people know about the quality of their job performance.

integration and coordination

A function of organizational communication; helps link the many people and parts of an organization.

persuasion

A function of organizational communication; influence other people to behave in a way the communicator desires.

emotion (II)

A function of organizational communication; lets organizational members express their feelings of satisfaction or dissatisfaction with their tasks, supervision, and the context within which they work.

innovation

A function of organizational communication; communication process lets an organization gather information from its external environment and move it to key decision points within the organization. As managers make innovative decisions, they can move information about those decisions to people both inside and outside the organization.

large audience communication

Getting a message from one person or a few people to many people; e.g., department meetings, training programs, orientation meetings.

listening

The mental process of assigning meaning to the sounds a person hears.

listening process

An active combination of intrapersonal and interpersonal activities in which one person receives a message from another (interpersonal), tries to interpret it (intrapersonal), and responds to show meaning imputed to the message (interpersonal).

nonverbal communication

One of two main types of communication in organizations; includes eye movements, gestures, facial expressions, tone of voice, and the like.

oral communication

All forms of speech between a sender and receiver; can be face-to-face or by telephone, radio, television, voice mail, or other devices.

organizational communication

Includes the purpose, flow, and direction of messages and the media used for those messages; happens within organizations; view as "message behavior."

pair-wise communication

Any form of oral or written communication between two people.

small group communication

Communication that involves three or more people interacting directly; can be face-to face or conducted through an audio, video, or computer-based medium.

technology and communication

Fast changes will occur in communication due to developments in computers, satellites, video displays, fiber optics, optical data storage, distributed computing, and the like.

verbal communication

One of two types of communication in organizations; includes oral, written, and electronic communication.

written communication

Any form of handwriting, printed memo or report, or message sent over an electronic medium such as a computer network.

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Organizational communication includes the purpose, flow, and direction of messages and the media used for those messages.
    2. Communication processes in organizations
      1. Continuous and constantly changing
      2. Do not have a beginning or end, nor do they follow a strict sequence
      3. Sender creates messages from one or more symbols to which he attaches meaning
      4. Messages: oral, written, or nonverbal; also intentional or unintentional
      5. Go to people inside the organization or outside the organization
    3. Communication network
      1. Series of interconnected positions in an organization
      2. Formal as defined by organizational positions and relationships among them
      3. Informal as defined by informal patterns of social interaction and the informal groups described in Chapter 10, “Groups and Intergroup Processes”
      4. Communication direction: downward, upward, or horizontally
      5. Interdependent, interlocking, and overlapping systems of human interaction
  2. The Basic Communication Process
    1. Sender and receiver
    2. Encoding, transmission, decoding
    3. Communication channel
    4. Noise
    5. Feedback
  3. Types of Communication
    1. Verbal communication
      1. Oral communication
      2. Written communication
      3. Electronic and video communication
    2. Nonverbal communication
      1. Physical aspects of the person
      2. Physical environment of communication
      3. Time
      4. Communication with signs and signals
  4. Functions of Organizational Communication
    1. Information sharing
    2. Feedback
      1. Function of feedback
      2. Feedback-seeking behavior
    3. Coordination
    4. Persuasion
    5. Emotion
    6. Innovation
  5. Dysfunctions of Organizational Communication
    1. Selective perception
    2. Semantic problems
    3. Message distortion
    4. Filtering of messages
    5. Information overload
    6. Timing of messages
    7. Acceptance of message
    8. Organizational silence
  6. Listening
    1. Definition
    2. Different from hearing
    3. Active not passive
    4. Frequency of occurrence
    5. Role in communication process
  7. Active listening
    1. Listener does not passively take in messages coming his way. Active listening puts a major responsibility on the listener for hearing a speaker's message correctly. It involves accurately hearing the facts in a message and knowing the speaker's feelings about the message. Active listening features a deliberate effort to understand a message from the speaker's viewpoint.
    2. Active listening behaviors
      1. Listen for total meaning: content and feelings
      2. Note verbal and nonverbal cues
      3. Take responsibility for completeness. Ask questions. Rephrase your understanding of the speaker's meaning until the speaker is satisfied that you understand the intended message.
      4. Active listening can have positive effects on a speaker. It can let a speaker know that a listener cares about the message, respects the speaker's opinion, and that the listener truly wants to understand the speaker. Speakers can feel their message is important and heard sincerely when listeners listen actively.
  8. Improving Communication Effectiveness
    1. Sender
    2. Receiver
    3. Message
    4. Medium
  9. Technology and Communication
    1. Telephone. Still plays a major role. New technology includes the videophone, mobile or cellular phone, use on airplanes, and new airport telephones with connections for computers with modems. Effects on oral communication.
    2. Facsimile. Standalone devices, facsimile cards in personal computers, portable devices, cellular devices. Affects written communication.
    3. Video. Videoconferencing by satellite or high-speed compressed data links over cable fiber optic lines. Allows two-way video and audio interaction over almost any distance. Includes transmission by facsimile of graphics and other written documents. Coming to residential use which can affect working at home, remotely from employee's organization. Business presentations, including using animation for effects. Or, simple slide shows with transition effects such as flips and screen divides.
    4. Computer. Modem connections and network connections. Goes will beyond simple e-mail transmissions. Combines and manages all the above. For example, voice messages, facsimile transmissions. Also can link suppliers, customers, and different internal functions directly by personal computers and shared, integrated databases. Electronic Data Interchange software tools will let people inside and outside the organization quickly communicate and update data. Direct video interaction on personal computers, especially as used in concurrent engineering teams and other virtual teams (see Chapter 10).
  10. Communication Roles
    1. Each has a different function
    2. Managers may need to change some people's roles to improve an organization's communication processes.
    3. Roles
      1. Initiator
      2. Relayer
      3. Liaison
      4. Terminator
      5. Isolate
  11. Communication Networks
    1. Pair-wise communication
    2. Small group communication
      1. Centralized communication networks
      2. Decentralized communication networks
      3. Advantages and disadvantages of each network
  12. International Aspects of Communication
    1. More than a problem of different languages
    2. Nonverbal
      1. Interpersonal distance (proxemics)
      2. Time orientation
  13. Ethical Issues in Organizational Communication
    1. Presentation of an ethical image. What does the organization say and not say about ethical behavior and the role of ethics in its decision processes?
      1. Internally: newsletters, internal satellite television broadcasts, mass e-mail, postings on bulletin boards
      2. Externally: annual reports, press releases, public statements by senior executives
    2. Those communication forms present an image of the organization's value for ethical behavior. They also can play an important role in sustaining ethical values in the organization's culture. Socialization of new employees and continual reemphasis to veteran employees. Use organizational communication devices to maintain a value of ethical behavior in the organization's culture.
    3. Related to the above are organizational justifications, public statements following a protest or boycott. The justifications are part of an organization's impression management strategy.
    4. Full disclosure
      1. Employees. Especially of negative information such as layoffs, transfers, and large organizational change that could be disruptive.
      2. Customers. Product safety and testing programs.
      3. Full disclosure to suppliers. Ways of choosing among them, contracting, etc.
    5. A growing ethical issue surrounds communication privacy in organizations. Do employees have the right to private communications in the work setting that should not need be revealed to anyone without their consent? That ethical issue will grow in the future as more employees using personal computers become part of computer networks in organizations. Existing software lets network managers, and those at senior organizational levels read employee's voice mail, e-mail, and other computer files. The underlying ethical issue is whether people's rights to privacy extend to such surveillance.

Chapter Overview

Chapter 13 focuses on communication processes in organizations. The chapter first presents a well-known model of the basic communication process. It distinguishes verbal from nonverbal communication and describes different types of each form of communication. The chapter describes functions and dysfunctions of communication, the listening process, active listening, and ways of improving communication effectiveness. Separate sections discuss communication roles, communication networks, and the relationships between them. A distinctive feature of this chapter is a discussion of the effects of technology on communication and how it will change the way people interact over long distances.

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Define communication in organizations.
  • Explain the basic communication process.
  • Discuss the effects of noise in communication processes.
  • Describe verbal and nonverbal communication.
  • Analyze the effects of verbal and nonverbal communication.
  • Distinguish between the functions and dysfunctions of organizational communication.
  • Discuss the features of listening, especially active listening.
  • Compare ways to make communication processes more effective.
  • Explain the effects of new technology on communication.
  • Describe communication networks and the roles that can emerge within a network.
  • Appreciate some international and ethical issues that surround communication processes in organizations.

Personal and Management implications

Communication processes in organizations have several implications. One personal implication follows from your participation in various communication processes in your family, work setting, and college or university. By participating, you directly affect the quality of those processes. The text's discussions about how to improve communication effectiveness as a sender or a receiver are particularly important to your personal effectiveness in a communication process.

Communication in the future, whether in work organizations or our homes, will take different forms as new technology develops. You will be able to communicate with many different people at distant locations and engage in widespread interaction via electronic and video media. In short, you likely will not limit your communication activities in the future to face-to-face or written forms.

The discussion of communication roles implied that you play some of those roles in the communication processes in which you are involved. The isolate role could be a problem for you because it implies you are outside the mainstream communication process. If you want to reduce your isolation, you will need to actively increase the information flow to you from other parts of the process.

You undoubtedly display many forms of the nonverbal behavior described in the text chapter. Inappropriate nonverbal behavior can reduce your communication effectiveness. Take advantage of opportunities to have yourself videotaped while making a formal presentation. Such feedback can be especially revealing about aspects of your presentation you cannot easily see. Many elements of nonverbal behavior can negatively affect your communication effectiveness.

If you will be traveling to different countries or working for a multinational organization, the discussion of cultural differences in meanings of nonverbal behavior should be useful to you. Sensitivity to those differences will improve your effectiveness in different locations. You may want to review some citations in the international section as preparation for international travel.

Managers can easily experience information overload as demands for their time increase. You will see increasing use of electronic and video communication. Although these methods of communication will make communication easier, they can also make the flow of communication so fast that it overwhelms managers.


Chapter Summary

Communication processes in organizations involve a sender, a receiver, and a message flowing over a communication channel. The process includes feedback the sender gets from the receiver’s response to the message. Noise surrounds the entire process, distorting the messages.

Communication has both verbal and nonverbal forms. Verbal communication includes oral, written, electronic, and video communication. Nonverbal communication includes gestures, facial expressions, and the sender’s voice. Nonverbal communication can contradict, amplify, or complement verbal communication.

Organizational communication has several functions and dysfunctions. The functions include letting people share information and helping managers integrate or coordinate different parts of the organization. Dysfunctions include selective perception, semantic problems, and information overload. Communication effectiveness can be improved through training, asking for a receiver’s feedback, and understanding cultural differences in communication.

Listening is the mental process of assigning meaning to sounds. Active listening is accurately hearing the facts in a message and understanding the speaker’s feelings about the message. The active listener makes a deliberate effort to understand a message from the speaker’s viewpoint.

Technology forecasters predict major changes in organizational communication processes because of emerging technologies such as digital cellular phones, satellites, and videoconferencing.

Individuals in organizations can play different communication roles: initiator, relayer, liaison, terminator, and isolate. Communication in organizations occurs within different communication networks. Some communication is pair-wise, involving only two people. Small group communication uses either centralized or decentralized networks. Large audience communication features a single sender and multiple receivers.

Large cultural variations in nonverbal communication can make cross-cultural transitions especially difficult for some people. Nonverbal communication in the international environment adds to any difficulties a person has with a language he does not understand.

The central ethical issues in communication are image management, full disclosure, and communication privacy. Managers can deftly use external communication to present an ethical image. Whether to fully disclose product safety information and planned layoffs, for example, are ethical questions that managers must consider. Modern communication technology helps an organization monitor employee electronic communication such as e-mail. Do employee’s have privacy rights in such communications?

Basic Communication Process

Review the description of the basic communication process presented in textbook Chapter 13. Discuss the effect of noise on the process. What forms of noise have you experienced?

Communication Feedback

What is the role of the feedback loop in the basic communication process? How can the sender and receiver use it to improve communication effectiveness?

Verbal and Nonverbal Communication

Discuss the different types of communication. What is the role of nonverbal communication in the larger communication process?

Dysfunctions of Organizational Communication

Review the “Dysfunctions of Organizational Communication” section of textbook Chapter 13. Have you experienced any of those dysfunctions during your college education? Reflect on your work experiences. Discuss examples of communication dysfunction from those experiences.

Your Nonverbal Behvior

Ask some close friends to describe your nonverbal behavior when you talk. Ask them whether such behavior adds to or detracts from the meaning of what you say.

Active Listening

Review the “Active Listening” section of textbook Chapter 13. Have you experienced any of the recommendations in that section? If yes, did active listening improve the communication processes where it was used?

Technology and Communication

Review the technologies that forecasters expect will change communication processes in the future. Which technologies does your college or university use? Which technologies have you seen in your work experiences?

Milk Money (1994)

Frank Wheeler (Michael Patrick Carter) and his two friends pool their milk money until they have enough to hire a woman to show them her naked body. They get stranded in the city after they have their bicycles stolen. V (Melanie Griffith) drives them home. The car breaks down and Frank's dad, Tom Wheeler (Ed Harris), makes the repairs.

The selected scenes start at the beginning of DVD Chapter 5, “The Math Tutor.” They end after V walks away and Tom Wheeler dangles the jumper cables while looking bewildered (Stop: 0:32:46).

Use the following questions as guides to your viewing of the scene: Does any misperception occur between V and Tom? What is its basis? How does it affect the communication process? Did any nonverbal communication occur that could have improved communication between V and Tom?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

The Best of Bud Abbott and Lou Costello, Volume 2 (2004)1

Typical Abbott and Costello slapstick humor and verbal banter highlight this film. It focuses on the River Queen, a Mississippi River paddle wheel boat besieged by crooks. A major feature of this otherwise ordinary comedy is the first on-screen presentation of the duo's classic skit Who's On First?”2. The videocassette box for the Universal Studios Comedy Legends release (2000) of this film says, “Director Jean Yarbrough had such a problem keeping the crew quiet while filming Lou and Bud's famous routine ‘Who's on First?’ that if you listen closely — you can hear the cameramen and grips laughing in the background!”

The “Who's on First” comedy skit appeared for the first time in The Naughty Nineties (1945). The scene starts as Dexter Broadhurst (Bud Abbott) comes on stage with a baseball bat singing, “Take Me Out to the Ball Game (DVDChapter 12, “Who's on First?”). Sebastian Dinwiddle (Lou Costello) comes on stage selling peanuts, popcorn, and Cracker Jacks. The scene follows the collage of gambling scenes and the on deck discussion about gambling honesty between Caroline Jackson (Lois Collier) and dishonest gambler Crawford (Alan Curtis). The skit ends after Sebastian throws down his bat and leers at Dexter. The film cuts to the River Queen's gambling hall. Test your listening skills by trying to identify each player's name and position.

Consider the following questions while viewing this scene: Is this an example of functional or dysfunctional communication? Does either person listen to what the other says? Would active listening have helped their communication?

Notes

  1. From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resources, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc. Reproduced by permission. www.cengage.com/permissions
  2. Craddock, J., ed. 2009. VideoHound's Golden Movie Retriever. Farmington Hills, MI: Gale, Cengage Learning, p. 706

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

So, You Think You Understand American English

This communication exercise drew words and phrases from most regions of the United States. You likely recognized words or terms from the region where you now live. You also likely recognized words or terms from regions where you have lived in the past. Familiarity with the terms from any source would let you correctly identify all the words and phrases in the exercise. Some lucky guesses can work for some words, such as “Copcycles,” but not for others such as “frappe.”

The following lists the terms and their meaning. You can consult the source of these definitions for more detail.1


AMW: Actress, model, whatever. (Region: West Coast–Los Angeles)

Ash Report: Portland, Oregon’s equivalent of a smog alert; reports airborne volcanic ash. (Region: Northwest–Portland)

bang a left: Make a left turn; derived from the street term, “bust a move.” (Region: West Coast–Los Angeles)

Cadillac: Shopping cart reference by street people. (Region: Northwest–Portland)

caught kind of cornered: Used when one does not know the answer. (Region: Between the Coasts–Great Plains)

Copcycles: Police officers on bicycles; better crime control than officers in patrol cars. (Region: Northwest–Seattle)

couldn’t stop a hog in a ditch: Extremely bow-legged. (Region: Between the Coasts–Arkansas)

empties: Returnable bottles. (Region: Northeast–Maine)

Fake-n-stocks: Portland, Oregon residents prefer Birkenstocks for footwear. Less well-off Portland residents wear Fake-n-stocks. (Region: Northwest–Portland)

fegedaboutit: Forget about it. (Region: East Coast–New York)

Five and Tens: East Bay residents; their area code is 510. (Region: West Coast–San Francisco and Bay Area)

fix’n: An often-used term to say one is getting ready to do something; as in “I’m fix’n to cook supper.” (Region: Between the Coasts–Arkansas)

frappe: Milkshake. (Region: East Coast–Boston)

George: Good. See also Tom. (Region: Between the Coasts–Kentucky)

going formal: Wearing a clean flannel shirt. (Region: Northwest–Seattle)

going Richter: Getting extremely angry; refers to the Richter Scale for measuring earthquake intensity. (Region: West Coast–Los Angeles)

go to the packy: Go to the liquor store; go to buy alcoholic beverages. (Region: East Coast–Boston)

his elevator don’t go all the way to the top: He is not bright. (Region: Between the Coasts–Arkansas)

Long-Giland: Long Island. (Region: East Coast–New York)

monkey time: Let’s go with it; as in “It’s monkey time.” (Region: Between the Coasts–Kentucky)

NEMO: Bicycle messengers use this acronym to refer to New Montgomery Street. (Region: West Coast–San Francisco and Bay Area)

no doubt: Better than “uh huh” to express agreement when you either are not listening to someone or do not care about what the person says. (Region: West Coast–San Francisco and Bay Area)

on account of: Because; as in “We had to delay the harvest on account of the rain we been have’n.” (Region: Between the Coasts–Great Plains)

Partly Sunny: Partly cloudy. (Region: Northwest– Seattle)

reach’n out there: Stretching beyond what a person can grasp or do; a challenge. (Region: Between the Coasts–Great Plains)

skims his milk at both ends: Stingy. (Region: Northeast–Maine)

stoop: The steps leading to a porch in front of a door; favorite summer meeting place; preferred place for fast games of stoopball. (Region: East Coast–New York)

sub: A submarine sandwich; also known as a “grinder” in Western Massachusetts. (Region: East Coast–Boston)

Tom: Bad. See also George. (Region: Between the Coasts–Kentucky)

wicked: Awesome; as in “Wicked good,” Wicked fun,” and other such “wicked” moments. (Region: Northeast–Maine)


Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Notes

1C. Cotter, J. Crotty, E. W Turtle, and A. J. Schütz. 1995. USA Phrasebook: English, Native American Languages & Hawaiian. Hawthorn, Victoria, Australia: Lonely Planet Publications, pp. 68–119.

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 14.

alternative social processes for decision making

Five processes for decision making classed as authoritative, consultative, and group. See also the Vroom-Yetton Model.

authoritative

A class of alternative social processes for decision making. The “A” approaches where the decision maker alone makes the decision; includes the AI and AII approaches.

consultative

A class of alternative social processes for decision making. The “C” approaches where the decision maker gets information and advice from others before deciding; includes CI and CII approaches.

group (II)

A class of alternative social processes for decision making. The GII approaches where the decision maker uses group decision making and tries to get consensus among group members.

anchoring and adjustment

The tendency of decision makers to choose a starting point for a decision and then adjust beyond that point.

assets of group decision making

The benefits of group decision making; include increased information and knowledge, increased acceptance of the decision, greater job satisfaction, and personal development of the participants.

availability heuristic

The tendency for decision makers to recall and use easily retrievable information; e.g., vivid and recent events.

Bounded Rationality Model

A decision-making model that assumes decision makers face limitations that constrain rationality; limitations include incomplete information and time constraints.

brainstorming

The spontaneous generation of ideas while deferring critical evaluation of those ideas; used to create decision alternatives, not to select the final alternative.

electronic brainstorming

Links people by computers so they do not interact directly; participants behave anonymously in the process, letting them offer ideas without fear of social pressure.

Decision-making process

A multiple step process defines a decision problem, creates alternative courses of action, and chooses among them using decision criteria.

problem identification and diagnosis

A step in the decision-making process; starts the decision process; identify the problem and assess its causes.

identification of criteria

A step in the decision-making process; specifies the basis of choices among alternatives.

developing alternatives

A step in the decision-making process; develops different course of action for the decision problem; becomes part of the assessment phase of the decision process.

assess the alternatives

A step in the decision-making process; examines each alternative to see what desirable and undesirable results it is likely to have.

choose an alternative

A step in the decision-making process; the choice part of the decision-making process; often what people commonly associate with decision making.

carry out the decision

A step in the decision-making process; moves the decision into action.

assess the decision’s effects

A step in the decision-making process; monitor the decision’s effects against the criteria identified in the first phase.

decision strategies

Includes programmed decision strategies and unprogrammed strategies. Defined by three dimensions: routine-nonroutine, recurring-nonrecurring, and certainty-uncertainty.

programmed decision strategy

A decision strategy that applies to routine, recurring, and predictable decisions.

unprogrammed strategy

A decision strategy that applies to nonroutine, nonrecurring, and unpredictable decisions.

routine-nonroutine

A dimension that defines a decision strategy’s characteristics; describes whether the decision is common or unusual.

recurring-nonrecurring

A dimension that defines a decision strategy’s characteristics; describes whether the decision happens often or infrequently.

certainty-uncertainty

A dimension that defines a decision strategy’s characteristics; describes a decision’s degree of predictability.

decision support systems

Dynamic computer based systems that support an organization's decision making processes; are interactive and used to retrieve data and test alternatives.

Delphi method

A structured technique for making decisions surrounded by uncertainty; members interact through questionnaires or computer, but not face to face.

devil's advocate technique

A decision making technique in which one or more persons play the role of critic, finding fault with a proposed alternative and arguing for its rejection; helps ensure the alternative can withstand criticism.

dialectical inquiry (II)

A structured, analytical method of examining multiple decision alternatives; involves a structured debate about an alternative and a counter alternative, including the assumptions underlying the alternatives.

escalation of commitment

The process of adding more resources to a losing course of action in the hope of recovering past losses.

expert systems

Interactive computer based systems that support decision making by simulating the knowledge and decision process of an expert.

framing effect

Tendency for the presentation of a problem to affect a decision; e.g., whether an alternative is presented as a gain or a loss can affect the decision. Includes risk-averse (avoid risks) and risk-seeking (take risks) behavior.

risk-averse

A framing effect that introduces bias in the way a decision maker views a decision problem based on its presentation. People prefer to avoid risks (risk-averse behavior) when facing decisions involving gains.

risk-seeking

A framing effect that introduces bias in the way a decision maker views a decision problem based on its presentation. People prefer to take risks (risk-seeking behavior) when facing decisions involving losses.

Garbage Can Model

A decision model for high ambiguity situations; sees decision making as a time-sensitive process involving problem, solution, participant, and choice opportunity streams. The streams' confluence results in a decision.

problem streams

In the Garbage Can Model of decision making, the issues or problems facing the organization or part of the organization at a particular time.

solution streams

In the Garbage Can Model of, the solutions available to a decision maker, including solutions that might have no direct connection to the problems.

participant streams

In the Garbage Can Model of decision making, the decision makers and others who are available to decide.

choice opportunity streams

In the Garbage Can Model of decision making, the chances to decide.

groupthink (II)

Excessive conformity to a group norm that supports agreement among members of a decision-making group. Afflicted groups lose the ability to critically assess alternatives and lack ethical concern for the effects of their decisions.

heuristics

Guidelines that simplify information processing during decision making; include availability heuristic, representativeness heuristic, and anchoring and adjustment heuristic.

judgment biases

Tendencies that can lead to decision-making errors; include ease of recall bias, misconception of chance bias, overconfidence bias, and confirmation trap bias.

ease of recall bias

A judgment bias that can lead to decision-making errors; the tendency to recall recent, dramatic events more than older, less dramatic events.

misconception of chance bias

A judgment bias that can lead to decision-making errors; occurs when people judge the randomness of a sequence of events from its appearance, although the number of events is statistically too small for that conclusion.

overconfidence bias

A judgment bias that can lead to decision-making errors; can lead to inaccurate judgments when answering questions about which the person has little knowledge.

confirmation trap bias

A judgment bias that can lead to decision-making errors; can lead to behavior that avoids disconfirming and uncomfortable information.

liabilities of group decision making

The drawbacks of group decision making; include pressure for conformity, more time required to reach a decision, a tendency for one person to dominate, and the development of strong preferences for certain alternatives.

management information systems

Information processing systems used by organizations to support their daily operating activities and decision-making functions; can be manual or computer based.

nominal group technique (NGT)

A structured approach to decision making in which members first generate and record ideas without discussing them; then the ideas are discussed and members vote privately to arrive at a decision.

political decision-making models

Decision-making models that see decision making as conflict-based process involving bargaining and compromise; assume participants pursue their self-interest.

Problem solving (II)

Identifies problem, finds root causes, and creates options that go into a decision-making process.

Rational Model

A decision-making model that holds that the decision maker has a clear goal, knows all alternatives and their results, and applies a preference ordering function to the alternatives; sees decision making as proceeding sequentially from beginning to end.

representativeness heuristic

The tendency for decision makers to compare a current event to past events about which they have knowledge; can lead to stereotypes.

satisficing behavior

Choosing a satisfactory but not optimal alternative when making decisions.

unstructured decision making models

Models in which the decision making process does not follow an orderly progression; suitable for conditions of uncertainty and for complex, unprecedented, and ambiguous problems.

Vroom-Yetton Model

A decision-making model that uses a set of rules to select the approach that is best for a given problem, assesses problem attributes through diagnostic questions in decision tree form.

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. The decision-making process defines a decision problem, creates alternative courses of action, and chooses among them using decision criteria
    2. Decision making fits within the larger context of problem-solving activities in organizations
    3. The problem-solving process identifies the problem, tries to find root causes, and creates options that become input to a ¬decision-making process
    4. Decision making is the part of the problem-solving process that chooses a course of action
    5. Individuals do a good job with well-structured problems; groups do a better job with ill-defined problems
    6. Although decision making is a basic function of a manager’s role, nonmanagers also make decisions
    7. The term decision maker refers to a person at any organizational level who chooses a course of action
  2. Decision Strategies
    1. Programmed and unprogrammed decision strategies
    2. Three dimensions define each strategy
      1. Routine vs. nonroutine
      2. Recurring vs. nonrecurring
      3. Certainty vs. uncertainty
  3. The Decision-Making Process
    1. Problem identification
    2. Developing alternatives
    3. Evaluating alternatives
    4. Choose an alternative
    5. Carry out the decision
    6. Evaluation of implementation
  4. Decision-Making Models
    1. The Rational Model
    2. The Bounded Rationality Model (satisficing)
    3. Unstructured decision-making models
    4. The Garbage Can Model of decision making
    5. Political Decision-Making Models
      1. Brief description
      2. More detail in Chapter 15, “Power and Political Behavior”
  5. Assets and Liabilities of Group Decision Making
    1. Assets
      1. More information, knowledge, and skills to solve a decision problem
      2. Increased understanding from participation in the decision process
      3. Increased acceptance of decision from involvement
      4. Personal development of participants
    2. Liabilities
      1. Social pressure on participants to conform to an emerging norm
      2. Participants can develop strong preferences for a particular alternative
      3. Amount of time required to reach a decision
  6. Choosing between Individual and Group Decision Making
    1. Alternative social processes for decision making
      1. Individual problem defined
      2. Group problem defined
      3. Choices available
        1. Increased social interaction between the decision maker and others involved in making the decision
        2. Increasing involvement of subordinates which can lead to increased commitment to the decision
        3. Greater potential to affect a decision
        4. Increasing potential for conflict
        5. Increased understanding of the problem by those involved in making the decision
        6. More complex social processes for making a decision
        7. More time to make a decision
    2. The Vroom-Yetton Model
      1. Problem attributes
      2. Feasible set of alternatives
        1. Time-efficient solution
        2. Time-investment solution. Development orientation
  7. Judgment Biases
    1. Heuristics
      1. Availability heuristic
      2. Representativeness heuristic
      3. Anchoring and adjustment
    2. Some possible judgment biases
    3. Framing effects
      1. Framing as losses leads to risk seeking
      2. Framing as gains leads to risk aversion
      3. Using multiple frames
  8. Escalation of Commitment
    1. Looking backward when the decision should only consider future costs and benefits
    2. Effects of perception of sunk costs
    3. Some contributors including framing as loss effects
    4. Some remedies. Use a separate decision maker to avoid irrational escalation. Some research evidence
  9. Groupthink
    1. An ugly disease presumed to affect cohesive decision-making groups
    2. Remains an intuitive explanation despite the lack of strong research evidence
    3. Excessive conformity to a group norm that supports agreement among group members
    4. Lost the ability to assess alternatives critically and to assess the effects of past decisions
    5. Group leader’s efforts to resist groupthink
      1. Encourage critical appraisal of issues, ideas, and alternatives
      2. Deliberately stimulate conflict (see Chapter 11, “Conflict in Organizations”)
      3. Assign a group member the devil’s advocate role
      4. Invite knowledgeable outsiders to analyze the group’s processes
  10. Improving Decision Making in Organizations
    1. Human-based methods
      1. Brainstorming
      2. The nominal group technique (NGT)
      3. The Delphi Method
      4. Devil's advocate technique
      5. Dialectical inquiry
      6. Technology of Participation; appreciative management
    2. Computer-based Methods
      1. Management information systems (MIS). Early days had a more organization wide emphasis as data processing systems. Now moving to more support for individual decision makers.
      2. Decision support systems (DSS)
      3. Expert systems. Uses artificial intelligence (AI) technology from the computer sciences.
  11. International Aspects of Decision Making and Problem Solving
    1. The international environment of decision making
    2. Effects on the decision making process
    3. Legislated participation
  12. Ethical Issues in Decision Making and Problem Solving
    1. Two major issues: why unethical decisions happen and how can they be improved.
    2. One model of decision making and ethics tries to explain why unethical decisions happen.
    3. Do an ethical analysis as a specific step in the decision process. Can have one member of a decision group responsible for raising ethical issues and questions.
    4. Involve those affected by the decision throughout the decision process. Customers, special interest groups, community, etc.

Chapter Overview

Chapter 14 describes decision-making and problem-solving processes in organizations. It begins with a discussion of types of decision strategies (programmed and unprogrammed) and the nature of decision processes. The chapter discusses several decision-making models and shows the different perspectives each model brings to a decision problem. This chapter compares individual to group decision making, describes the assets and liabilities of group decision making, and discusses the decision problems for which each is best suited. It describes the Vroom-Yetton decision process model as a way of choosing from alternative social processes for decision making. Major sources of decision error are then developed, including framing effects, escalation of commitment, and groupthink. The chapter closes with a discussion of human- and computer-based methods of improving decision making in organizations.

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Describe decision-making and problem-solving processes in organizations.
  • Discuss the relationship between problem solving and decision making in organizations.
  • Compare the decision strategies that managers can use for decision making.
  • Analyze several decision-making models and the perspectives they bring to the decision process.
  • List the assets and liabilities of group decision making.
  • Distinguish between individual and group decision making and identify the situations for which they are best suited.
  • Discuss the sources of decision-making bias and error.
  • Describe the process of escalation of commitment to a losing course of action.
  • Recognize groupthink and how to avoid it during group decision making.
  • Explain several methods of improving decision processes in organizations.
  • Appreciate some international and ethical issues that surround decision making in organizations.

Personal and Management implications

A major personal implication is the effect of a decision on you. Someone may decide to assign you to a new project, move you to a new department, or add new people to your immediate work group. Your degree of involvement in such decisions will partly determine how readily you accept them.

Your involvement in the decision will depend on the predisposition of the decision maker to include you in the process and on your predisposition to enjoy the experience. Your personality characteristics will affect your predisposition. If you have a strongly affiliative personality, you should enjoy being involved in decision making. If you do not have such qualities, you will likely withdraw from the process.

Another personality characteristic that could affect your role in a decision process is your need for dominance. If you like to take charge, you might try to control the process. An important implication for you is whether you have the correct information when affecting a decision-process outcome. If you do not have the right information, then you directly contribute to a liability of group decision making.

Decision makers faced with ambiguous decisions do not always know all available alternatives. They make decisions using the less rational models described in the text. One possible implication for you is that such decisions may be remade later. You may have felt the first decision was final, you go about your work, and then the decision is remade with possible direct effects on you. A decision maker faced with an ambiguous problem may also delay making the decision. Although such actions may look like indecisiveness to you, they can be reasonable reactions of a decision maker facing an ambiguous problem.

Because many decision problems are ambiguous, you may need to decide not to decide. Such a decision may strike you as odd, but managers often need to do that when the problem is ill-defined. Such problems often require repeating the decision process and reexamining past decisions. You may think this approach is chaotic, but it is the reality of organizational decision making in complex environments.

Decision making by U.S. managers working in other countries has another dimension of complexity. People from different cultures vary in their approaches to decision making. Local people working for a U.S. manager will not always understand her approach to decisions. U.S. managers also will not always understand the decision approaches of local counterparts. Developing an understanding of cultural differences in decision making before going to another country should help your transition.

You will not escape the ethical context of decisions in organizations. Each organization will vary in its approach to ethical decisions. The approach of your employing organization will affect you in both manager and nonmanager roles.


Chapter Summary

Decision making is the process of choosing among different courses of action using decision criteria. The criteria for choosing among alternatives can include cost, profit, danger, or pleasure.

Some decision-making models describe a process for problems with well-known alternatives, results, and decision rules (Rational Model). Another model ­describes a process for conditions of uncertainty and ambiguity (Garbage Can Model). Each model gives different insights into organizational decision processes.

Managers can choose from different social processes for individual and group decisions. These approaches include processes involving a single individual, consultation with one or more people, or groups designed to reach consensus.

Decision makers use several heuristics or guidelines to simplify information processing during decision making. Such information processing strategies let decision makers move quickly through the process, but also limit the information they use, resulting in several judgment biases.

Decision makers can frame a decision in two different ways with different effects on their decision behavior. People prefer to avoid risks in decisions framed as gains; they prefer to take risks in decisions framed as losses.

Decision makers often face a common dilemma: abandon a losing course of action or increase commitment to it. Evidence supports that most decision makers are more likely to commit more resources, a process called escalation of commitment to a losing course of action.

Cohesive decision-making groups often develop groupthink, a phenomenon featuring excessive conformity to group norms that support agreement about decisions. Decision groups with groupthink are unable to critically assess alternative solutions to a problem.

Several human-based methods and computer- based methods exist for improving decision making in organizations. Human-based methods include brainstorming and techniques for increasing the information available to a decision maker (for example, the nominal group technique and the Delphi method). Computer-based methods include management information systems, decision support systems, and expert systems.

The international context of organizations adds complexities to organizational decision processes. Cultural variations in decision-making behavior and decision orientations suggest potential difficulties for multicultural decision-making groups.

An ethical decision maker has an open dialogue with all parties potentially affected by a decision and does not engage in deceptive behavior. A proposed model of decision making and ethics uses an explicit ethics decision rule.

Decision-Making Process

Review the decision-making process. Discuss each step in the process and the relationships among them.

Decision-Making Models

Review the decision-making models described in textbook Chapter 14. Which model do you think is closest to what managers do when they make decisions? Why?

Assets and Liabilities of Group Decision Making

Review the assets and liabilities of group decision making. Which methods of improving decision making in organizations help offset the liabilities? How? Why?

Groupthink

Have you experienced groupthink? Discuss the conditions under which it happened and how it could have been prevented.

Improving Decision Making in Organizations

Discuss the different methods of improving decision making in organizations. Which of these methods do you expect to find widely used in organizations? Discuss differences in how easy each method of improvement is to use.

International Aspects of Decision Making and Problem Solving

Discuss the culturally based differences in decision making and problem solving described in textbook Chapter 14 with students from countries other than your own or with students who have visited other countries. Have any students experienced the differences described? Discuss their reactions to those differences.

Ethical Issues in Decision Making and Problem Solving

Review the discussion of ethics in decision making and problem solving. Discuss the value of explicitly considering the ethics of a decision.

Horrible Bosses (2011)

Dale (Charlie Day) and Kurt (Jason Sudeikis) support the idea of eliminating their bosses. Nick (Jason Bateman) is undecided. Dale and Kurt push him to join their group which leads to the decision to eliminate their bosses. But, they know they cannot do it on their own which leads to a search for a suitable “hit man.” They recruit Dean “MF” Jones (Jamie Fox) as their hit man.

Types of Management Decision Processes

The following describes the reactions of many people to the two cases in the exercise. How do their reactions compare to yours?

People typically select all decision processes shown in the exercise table for Case I. Those who picked the “A” processes argued they had enough information to make the decision. Those who picked the “C” or “G” processes said they wanted to get more information for two reasons. First, they wanted the information so they could increase their decision accuracy. Second, they wanted to involve the workers affected by the decision because their bonuses were at stake.

The reaction to Case II was usually more uniform. More than 90 percent of people who completed the exercise chose the GII process. They typically cited the lack of some quality control information available to the decision maker. That information was in the five plants, requiring the involvement of the quality control supervisors in the decision-making process. People who completed the exercise also argued that involving those supervisors should help offset feelings of management interference.

When considering a social process for decision making, two questions need answers. The descriptive question asks, “Which social process do decision makers use and why?” Your exercise results showed your answer to this question. The second question is normative: “Which social process should a decision maker choose to decide about specific problems and issues in organizations?” Your text and instructor have the answer to that question.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 15.

actual power

The presence and use of power, whether that use is successful or not.

attribution of power

The process of ascribing power to another person based on personal characteristics and the contexts of the person.

personal characteristics

In the attribution of power; include formal position in the organization, technical knowledge, and position within a communication network.

contexts of the person

In the attribution of power; include membership in a powerful group, coalition, or social network.

bases of power

Sources of power for a leader; can come from both the person's formal management position and personal characteristics.

legitimate power

An organizational basis of power; derives from the manager’s position. The organization gives the manager decision authority that the manager uses to affect the behavior of subordinates.

reward power

An organizational basis of power; derives from the manager’s ability to tie positive outcomes to a subordinate’s behavior. A manager has high reward power if he or she can give positive outcomes for desirable behavior.

coercive power

An organizational basis of power; derives from efforts to affect the behavior of another person through fear of punishment. A manager has high coercive power if he or she has the authority to penalize subordinates.

information power

An organizational basis of power; derives from the control and distribution of information in an organization. Deliberately controlling the receipt and distribution of information increases a manager’s information power.

referent power

A personal basis of power; based on the personal liking a subordinate has for a manager. The more the subordinate identifies with the manager, the stronger the referent power.

expert power

A personal basis of power; derives from the manager’s technical knowledge and expertise. A manager with the knowledge and skills needed for group success has high expert power.

building power

The process of creating a power base; involves doing a diagnosis and then gathering power based on various power sources; includes an individual's knowledge, reputation, and professional credibility, work unit power, charisma, and the like.

knowledge, reputation, and professional credibility

In building power, one’s knowledge, reputation, and professional credibility are important power sources. Actions directed at improving each source can increase a person’s power.

political network

In building power, forming a political network becomes an important power source. Forming alliances with other peer leaders and managers adds to a person’s power base in an organization.

In a political diagnosis, identify an organization’s political networks; a set of alliances and affiliations within an organization that provides support and a common ideological view.

creating a perception of dependence

In building power, developing a perception of control of scarce resources on which others depend becomes an important power source.

power base of the work unit

In building power, a work unit that is central to an organization’s workflow or has unique functions is an important power source.

work activities

In building power, work activities that are extraordinary, visible, and appropriate to the organization’s goals are important power sources.

coalition

An alliance of individuals who share a common goal; identified and assessed in a political diagnosis.

deception

Behavior that tricks another party into reaching incorrect conclusions or choosing the wrong alternative in a decision process; aimed at building and holding power.

individuals

In a political diagnosis, the powerful and politically active people in the organization. Identified and assessed in a political diagnosis.

intimidation

The act of frightening or inducing a sense of inferiority in others as part of a power building process.

lying

The intentional misstatement of the truth to mislead another party; helps to build power by distorting information in favor of the liar.

organizational bases of power

Sources of power in a manager’s formal position; includes legitimate power, reward power, coercive power, and information power.

personal bases of power

Sources of power that reside in a manger’s personal characteristics; includes referent power and expert power.

political behavior

Focuses on getting, developing, and using power to achieve a desired result in situations of ambiguity, uncertainty, or conflict over choices; often happens outside accepted channels of authority.

political diagnosis

An examination of an organization to assess the location of power and the type of political behavior that is likely to occur.

political network

A set of alliances and affiliations within an organization that provides support and a common ideological view. Identified and assessed in a political diagnosis.

political strategy

A plan to reach a goal using specific political tactics; specifies the goal and the political means to reach it.

political tactics

Ways of building power or using it unobtrusively; include selectively emphasizing a favored decision alternative, using outside experts, controlling the decision-making agenda, building coalitions, co-optation, impression management, and influence tactics.

selectively emphasizing a favored decision alternative

A political tactic used during decision-making processes. A decision maker uses his or her power to emphasize an alternative that will increase the decision maker’s power or that of his or her work unit.

outside expert or consultant

A political tactic used during decision-making processes; when power within a decision-making process is about equally dispersed, a decision maker needs another lever to increase his or her power within the process.

control the decision-making agenda

A political tactic used during decision-making processes. By controlling the agenda, they can decide both whether an issue or problem is considered at all and, if considered, where it will appear on the agenda.

build coalitions

A political tactic used to build a power base; formed around people and groups inside or outside the organization.

co-optation

A political tactic aimed at potential opponents or people whose help can smooth the way to reaching a person’s goals. Placing a potential opponent or a task force can give the person information that persuades them that a particular issue or position is important.

impression management

A political tactic that controls the image a person projects to others; a strongly manipulative political tactic.

influence tactics

A repertoire of eight specific political tactics used to influence others’ behavior; include assertiveness, ingratiation, rationality, sanctions, exchange of benefits, upward appeal, inspirational appeal, and consultation.

assertiveness

An influence tactic used as a political tactic in political behavior; uses threats, demands, and intimidation to affect behavior, especially with someone of lower status and power.

ingratiation

An influence tactic used as a political tactic in political behavior; uses flattery and creates goodwill with another person to affect the person’s behavior.

rationality

An influence tactic used as a political tactic in political behavior; uses a logical oral or written argument to affect another person’s behavior.

sanctions

An influence tactic used as a political tactic in political behavior; uses organizationally based punishments to affect a person’s behavior.

exchange of benefits

An influence tactic used as a political tactic in political behavior; uses favors to influence another person especially a coworker.

upward appeal

An influence tactic used as a political tactic in political behavior; gets support for a cause from higher levels in the organization.

inspirational appeal

An influence tactic used as a political tactic in political behavior; focuses on a person’s values to arouse emotional support for a proposal.

consultation

An influence tactic used as a political tactic in political behavior; involves the person you want to influence in the decision process.

potential for power

The chance that individuals or groups have to build a power base with resources they control.

potential power

The condition that exists when one party perceives another party as having power and the ability to use it.

power

A person's ability to get something done the way the person wants it done; includes ability to affect other people's behavior and overcome opposition.

power relationship

Moments of social interaction where power shows itself in an organization; defined by three dimensions: relational, dependence, and sanctioning.

relational

A power relationship dimension; the social interaction part of power.

sanctioning

A power relationship dimension; refers to one party’s ability to affect the results of the other party by using rewards, penalties, or both.

dependence

A power relationship dimension; degree to which one party relies on the actions of another party.

political skill

A person’s ability to interact effectively in various social situations to affect the behavior of another person or group. Politically skilled people can work successfully within an organization’s political system, influence others in the desired direction, and gain positive results for self and the organization.

social astuteness

A political skill dimension; person has high self-awareness; accurately perceives varying social situations.

interpersonal influence

A political skill dimension; person flexibly adapts behavior in varying social situations to reach desired goals.

networking ability

A political skill dimension; person deliberately gains positions in alliances and coalitions; creates opportunities that help in social interactions.

apparent sincerity

A political skill dimension; person leaves an impression of openness and honesty (or the person is open and honest).

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. This chapter discusses the political processes of organizations.
    2. Politics and political behavior defined. As seen by political scientists, a social science discipline that seeks to understand and explain the role and development of political systems in a society. Draws from such knowledge to develop an understanding of the role and development of political behavior in organizations.
    3. Political scientists conceive of politics as having five parts.
      1. Government activities at all levels
      2. Use of power, authority, and influence
      3. Using such power, authority, and influence to define and spread the specific values in a society
      4. Competing for scarce resources
      5. Serves the important function of maintaining social order in a society
    4. Can find many of those functions in work organizations. Might be tempted to think of political behavior as only happening in a society or only appearing in the form of local, state, and national elections. Political behavior, though, is a pervasive part of organization life.
    5. This chapter focuses squarely on the development and use of power in organizations.
    6. You will see that political behavior often gives power to people who do not have it from their formal organization position
  2. Power
    1. Introduction
      1. Many people have a negative view of power
      2. Power is the ability to get things done the way the person wants them done. Power includes the ability to gather physical and human resources and put them to work to reach whatever goals the person wants to reach. Distinguished from authority.
      3. Some views of power in organizations. You can then decide whether all power is negative or a useful management tool. A view that sees power as positive for an organization and central to a manager's effectiveness. Some effects of powerlessness. Also, by empowering others, the total power of the organization and the managers who empower can increase.
      4. Direction of flows and uses of power: all directions.
      5. Power is dynamic, not static.
    2. Bases of power
      1. Behavior of leaders with power
      2. Behavior of powerless leaders
    3. Power, leadership, and management
      1. Behavior of leaders with power
      2. Behavior of powerless leaders
    4. Building power
    5. Attribution of power
      1. The attribution process at work
      2. See Chapter 5, "Perception, Attitudes, and Personality."
  3. Political Behavior
    1. Introduction
      1. Definition of political behavior
      2. Political behavior and power. A set of behaviors aimed at getting, keeping, and using power to reach one's goals
      3. Political behavior flows with the dynamics of power.
      4. People's need for power can be associated with their inclination to become involved in their organization's political processes.
      5. Perceptions of political behavior in organizations. Lower level people perceive more political behavior than higher level people.
      6. Political behavior is especially important in managing lateral relationships. Three types of lateral relationships
        1. Line-staff relationships
        2. Competing for resources
        3. Work-flow relationships
    2. Political strategies: plan for using various political tactics to increase one's power base or affect the decision results. Areas of use.
      1. Executive succession
      2. Organization design and redesign
      3. Budget negotiations
      4. Career within the organization and beyond
      5. Performance appraisals
      6. Pay increase decisions
    3. Political tactics. Political techniques used to reach some desired goal. Part of an overall political strategy or plan. Can use a mix of tactics within a political strategy.
      1. Decision-making processes
      2. Outside expert or consultant
      3. Control the decision-making agenda
      4. Build coalitions
      5. Co-optation
      6. Impression management
      7. Other political tactics
        1. Assertiveness: threats, demands, intimidation
        2. Ingratiation: use flattery and create goodwill with another person to affect their behavior
        3. Rationality: logical argument
        4. Sanctions: organizationally based sources of punishment
        5. Exchange of benefits: use favors and benefits to influence another person
        6. Upward appeal: get support for cause from higher levels
        7. Inspirational appeal: focus on person's values to arouse emotional support for a proposal
        8. Consultation: involve person in a decision process
    4. Political skill
      1. A person’s ability to interact effectively in various social situations to influence the behavior of another person or group.
      2. Social situations can occur inside or outside an organization
      3. Dimensions of political skill
        1. Social astuteness
        2. Interpersonal influence
        3. Networking ability
        4. Apparent sincerity
      4. Current research suggests that political skill is a personality-level quality and can be learned by almost anyone.
    5. Political diagnosis
      1. Individuals
      2. Coalitions
      3. Political networks
    6. The dark side of organizational politics: deception, lying, and intimidation
      1. Quote from Machiavelli: be a lion and a fox
      2. Deception
      3. Lying
      4. Intimidation
  4. International Aspects of Power and Political Behavior in Organizations
    1. Cultural differences in beliefs about the proper relationship between those with power and those without power: directive versus consultative
    2. Cultural variations in uncertainty orientation
    3. Individualistic versus collectivistic cultures
    4. Manager’s behavior with respect to these cultural differences affects attribution of power to the manager
  5. Ethical Issues about Power and Political Behavior in Organizations
    1. Unethical political behavior
      1. Political strategy and associated tactics that do not serve the organization’s goals or the goals of a larger group of people than the single political actor
      2. Using power and political behavior that violates another person’s rights
      3. A sense of justice strongly argues for fair treatment, fair pay, and the fair administration of rules and procedures.
    2. Guidelines for ethical political behavior
      1. Behavior should serve people beyond the single political actor
      2. Individuals affected should know intent and give their consent
      3. Do not violate rights of due process
      4. Policy administration should allow fair treatment of all people

Chapter Overview

Chapter 15 discusses power and political behavior in organizations. It fully develops the concept of power and its organizational and individual bases. The chapter then moves to power relationships, the direction of power flows, ways of building power, and power attribution. A discussion of political strategies, political tactics, political skill, and how to do a political diagnosis follows. It also examines the dark side of organizational politics—deception, lying, and intimidation.

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Describe the nature of power in organizations.
  • Discuss the relationship between power and politics in organizations.
  • Analyze bases of power and ways of building power in organizations.
  • Describe political behavior in organizations.
  • Discuss political strategies and their role in organizations.
  • Compare the political tactics a manager can use in a political strategy.
  • Do a political diagnosis.
  • Discuss each element of the dark side of organizational politics—lying, deception, and intimidation.
  • Analyze international differences in political behavior in organizations.
  • Distinguish the ethical issues surrounding organizational politics.

Personal and Management implications

Several personal and management implications follow from the three facets of power. You should easily see actual power because this is power in use. Potential power and potential for power are less obvious, but no less important. Think of potential power as latent power ready to spring into use when conditions call for actual power. Knowing who has potential power, including yourself, helps you navigate your organization's political system.

Potential power and potential for power strongly suggest doing a political diagnosis of your organization. That diagnosis will help you find power potentials. For example, potential for power exists when a person has scarce resources needed by others in the organization. You may have knowledge or information not commonly available. Recognizing that you have such a scarce resource is a first step in building a power base. Potential for power suggests you should examine what you do in the organization to see whether any latent conditions exist to build power. You can then develop appropriate political strategies from the results of the diagnosis.

Potential for power suggests caution when using your power in an interaction with someone in the organization. The other party may react to you by discovering his power potential and begin building a power base. He could then oppose you in ways you did not expect.

Political behavior is a pervasive part of organizational life. Such behavior is not restricted to those in management or supervisory positions. The text sections describing political strategies and political tactics apply to both nonmanagers and managers. You can use those strategies and tactics to pursue desired goals in your organization.

Power attribution, unfortunately, is a two-edged sword. You may attribute power to others in the organization and act accordingly, but your attribution may not be correct. Also, you may believe you have power over someone else, but the other party may not attribute power to you. Part of the political intrigue of organizations has its roots in the attribution process.

The process of power attribution implies caution when you perceive another person has high power over you. You might unknowingly attribute high power to a peer because of his association with a powerful project. Yet the peer and others in the organization may not share your perception of his power. Your attribution of power can lead you to unnecessarily defer to the peer and be influenced more than is justified by the situation.

Managing lateral relationships in an organization can test any manager's political skills. Because you have no direct authority over others in such relationships, you must use a political approach to these interactions. The political tactics need not be any of the villainous ones described in the text's section on the dark side of organizational politics. Managing these relationships, however, can require a careful political diagnosis.

The section describing some international aspects of organizational politics clearly implied caution for you if you work as a manager in different countries. Orientations to power and organizational politics vary from country to country. Cross-cultural differences point to developing an understanding of those differences before using any political tactics.


Chapter Summary

Power is a person’s ability to get something done the way the person wants it done, including the ability to gather physical and human resources and use them to reach the person’s goals. Power has three facets: potential power, actual power, and potential for power. The power people have in organizations also has individual and organizational bases and comes from different sources.

Political behavior in organizations focuses on getting, developing, and using power to reach a desired result. Power and political behavior play key roles in lateral relationships in organizations.

Political strategies are broad plans for reaching some goal using political tactics. Political strategies usually focus on resource-allocation decisions, career development, management succession, and the redesign of organizations.

Political tactics are political behaviors that become part of a political strategy. Five major political tactics exist: (1) selectively emphasize decision criteria, (2) use outside experts, (3) control the agenda, (4) build coalitions, and (5) co-optation. Other tactics include impression management, sanctions, and ingratiation.

Political skill is a person’s ability to interact effectively in various social situations, intending to influence the behavior of another person or group. A person high in political skill gives the impression of sincerity. Four dimensions define political skill: social astuteness, interpersonal influence, networking ability, and apparent sincerity. Political skill is a personality-level quality that almost anyone can learn.

A political diagnosis helps explain the location of power in an organization and the type of political behavior that is likely to happen. A political diagnosis focuses on individuals, coalitions, and political networks.

People from different cultures hold different beliefs about the proper relationship between those who have power and those who do not. Some cultures see a directive and autocratic use of power as correct. Other cultures view a consultative or democratic approach as correct.

“Ethical Issues about Political Behavior in Orga-nizations” took a distinctly normative position about political behavior. Using power and political behavior in an organization to serve only self-interest is unethical. Using political behavior and power to violate a person’s rights is also unethical.

Power in Organizations

Review the discussion of power at the beginning of textbook Chapter 15. Does power serve positive or negative functions for an organization? Discuss your experiences with power.

Three Power Facets

Power has the three facets of actual power, potential power, and potential for power. Discuss the implications of the three facets for all employees of an organization.

Building Power

Review the ways managers can build power in organizations. Discuss your experiences with managers who build a power base.

Leadership and Management

Review the discussion of the difference between leadership and management in textbook Chapter 12. ¬Discuss the role of power in effective leader or manager behavior.

Political Strategies and Tactics

Discuss using political strategies and tactics in organizations. Are the strategies and tactics realistic parts of modern organizational life? What were your reactions to the descriptions of political strategy and tactics?

The Dark Side of Organizational Politics

This chapter argued that organizational politics has a dark side. Discuss your experiences with the dark side of organizational politics.

Ethical Issues and Political Behavior

Review the description of the ethical issues surrounding political behavior in organizations. Do you accept or reject the normative positions taken from the various ethics theories? Why or why not?

Working Girl (1988)

Ambitious Tess McGill (Melanie Griffith) wants to move to a management position from her present secretary position. She gets her chance after her boss, Katharine Parker (Sigourney Weaver), has a skiing accident. Investment banker Jack Trainer (Harrison Ford) guides Tess through a proposal presentation to Trask Industries, which helps her to move into a management position.

These scenes start in DVD Chapter 18, “Taking a Stand,” and end in DVD Chapter 19, “Another Chance,” 1:45:08. They begin as Tess leaves the elevator while carrying a box. The scenes end after accepting Mr. Trask's job offer.

Consider the following questions while viewing these scenes: Which bases of power discussed in this chapter most likely apply to Tess McGill? Does power shift among the characters in the scenes? If so, who gains or loses power?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Shark Tale (2004)

Devious Oscar (voiced by Will Smith) works as a Whale Wash tongue-scrubber but presents himself as a Sharkslayer. Oscar develops a powerful following in the underwater world based on his Sharkslayer representation. All these events follow the accidental death of Frankie (voiced by Michael Imperioli), Lenny's (voiced by Jack Black) brother. Frankie and Lenny are Mafia boss Don Lino's (voiced by Robert De Niro) sons.

This sequence opens with a long shot of Don Lino's “people” sitting around a long table (DVD Chapter 17). Lenny, Oscar, and Sykes (voiced by Martin Scorsese) gulp. Stop at 1:12:18 after Don Lino says, “You're gonna regret the day you became the Sharkslayer.” A shrimp (voiced by David Soren) comes out of another porthole while saying, “Well, well, well. Look who's stuck in the porthole.”

Consider the following questions while viewing these scenes: Does Oscar quickly learn that he has more power than he originally thought? At what point does it appear that power shifts in favor of Don Lino? What event shifts power back to Oscar, at least for a short time?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Bases of Power

Everyone who completes the “Bases of Power” eExercise should have legitimate power. This power comes from a person’s organizational position and his decision authority. Variations occur on the next two forms of organizational bases of power: reward and coercive power. These sources of power depend on organizational policies and the rewards and punishments individual position holders have available for use. Many positions have little reward and coercive power to add to the position’s legitimate power.

Information power depends on the information that flows through a position and how the person in the position chooses to manage the information distribution. Holding a central position in a communication network can increase that person’s information power. Restricting the information flow can increase dependency on the person in the position. Reflect on how you rated this type of power. Perhaps these observations apply to you.

The personal bases of power—referent and expert power—depend on personal qualities. People who complete this exercise often find it hard to exercise the introspection required for such a personal assessment. If you rated yourself as low on the personal bases of power, you might want to ask some people who know you well about each power base. Their answers can surprise you because of the difficulty people have in assessing themselves.

The “Amount of Power I Would Like to Have” section of the exercise elicits many varying responses. Some people dislike having power and rate each item lower than in the first section of the exercise. Others see having more power as a way to improve their job effectiveness and advancing their career. These people typically rate the power desired in this section much higher than in the first section. They also want to use that power to reach personal and organizational goals.

People who complete this exercise usually want to build power by focusing on power bases they can most easily control. Typically, they pick information power and expert power, two closely related bases of power. Getting more education and training can help build expert power. Increasing knowledge of the information required for a person’s position can help build information power. People tend to focus less on increasing referent power because it depends heavily on personal qualities such as charisma that are hard to change in a short time.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 16.

alarm

The first stage in the stress response in the General Adjustment Syndrome model; heart rate, respiration, muscle tension, and blood sugar increase as the body prepares to fight, adjust to, or flee from the stressor.

behavioral response

The action a person takes in the presence of a stressor; can lead to distress or eustress.

burnout

A special type of work-related distress characterized by a chronic state of emotional exhaustion.

coping responses

Change the stressor or how the person interprets the stressor; includes problem-focused coping and emotion-focused coping. Eight specific responses such as distancing (forget the situation) and positive reappraisal (feelings of growth from the situation).

confrontive coping

One of eight specific coping responses. The person makes aggressive efforts to change a situation, often with anger.

distancing

One of eight specific coping responses. The person psychologically detaches from or adds positive meaning to a situation.

self-control

One of eight specific coping responses. The person takes steps to manage her or his actions and feelings.

seeking social support

One of eight specific coping responses. The person goes to other people for emotional support or more information about the situation.

accepting responsibility

One of eight specific coping responses. The person highlights her or his role in creating the situation and tries to make it better.

escape-avoidance

One of eight specific coping responses. The person tries to get away from the stressor, coupled with wishful thinking.

planful problem solving

One of eight specific coping responses. The person analyzes the situation and takes steps to improve it.

positive reappraisal

One of eight specific coping responses. The person focuses on personal improvements from addressing the situation.

distress

The dysfunctional result of stress that occurs when the person does not adapt successfully to the stressor or remove it from her environment.

emotion-focused coping

Changes one's perception or interpretation of a stressor; e.g., attributing a coworker's negative comments to that person's experienced stress.

eustress

The positive result of stress; occurs when a person has successfully adapted to a stressor or when the degree of stress does not exceed the person's ability to adapt.

exhaustion

The final stress response stage in the General Adjustment Syndrome model; the body begins to wear down after long exposure to a stressor.

general adaptation syndrome

An early stress model that emphasized the physiological aspects of the stress response; views the response as having three stages: alarm, resistance, and exhaustion.

hardy personality

Low hardiness personalities assess stressors pessimistically; view stressful life events as unchangeable disruptions to the normal course of their behavior. High hardiness personalities assess stressors optimistically; view stressful life events as challenges to overcome.

individual stress management

The process of maintaining stress at an optimal level for a particular person by using strategies for stress reduction, stress resilience, and stress recuperation.

integrated model of stress

A detailed model that combines pieces of earlier models. Includes a description of stressors as occurring during work, nonwork activities, and life transitions; the role of perception in filtering stressors; moderators of the stress response; and the results of both distress and eustress.

psychological demands and decision latitude model

A model that uses two constructs to explain the stress effects of people’s jobs: job demands and job decision latitude. Stress results when a job is high in demands and low in decision latitude. Also known as the demand/control model.

job demands

In the psychological demands and decision latitude model, include work pace, amount of work, and conflicting work requirements.

job decision latitude

In the psychological demands and decision latitude model, consists of a worker’s decision authority and the different skills used on the job.

medical results

Linked to distress; include heart disease, stroke, ulcers, backaches, and headaches;

moderators of stress

Personal characteristics that can cause a person to experience varying degrees of stress; e.g., physical fitness, personality characteristics, and family health history.

Type A personality (II)

A moderator of stress; aggressive, can quickly become hostile, focuses excessively on achievement, and has a keen sense of time urgency.

Type B personality (II)

A moderator of stress; even tempered and not bothered by everyday events; feels little time urgency, often stopping to ponder their achievements and reflect on where they are headed.

skills, abilities, and experience

A moderator of stress; a person experienced with similar stressors will have less distress than a person for whom a stressor is new.

family health history

A moderator of stress; can suggest whether a person is predisposed to the negative health effects of distress. Medical histories of hypertension, high serum cholesterol levels, and ulcers point to a chance of experiencing the ill effects of stress.

demographics

A moderator of stress; point to a greater likelihood of experiencing certain stressors or experiencing distress. For example, working people with family responsibilities often feel many work and nonwork stressors simultaneously.

diet

A moderator of stress; can affect the long-term results of stress. Excessive sodium intake contributes to high blood pressure; excessive saturated fat adds to serum cholesterol levels.

physical fitness

A moderator of stress; can increase a person’s resilience to stressors. A physically fit person is less likely to feel the harmful effects of distress than a person who is less fit.

organizational stress management

The process of reaching the optimal level of stress required by the goals of the organization by using stress reduction, stress resilience, and stress recuperation strategies.

problem-focused coping

Changes the reason the stressor exists; change lighting in a work area to reduce glare.

resistance

The second stage in the stress response in the General Adjustment Syndrome model; the body tries to return to normal by adapting to the stressor.

results of distress

Behavioral, psychological, and medical consequences that occur when a person does not choose the right behavior to manage a stress response, is predisposed to stress, or has not built resilience to common stressors; e.g., appetite disorders, disturbed sleep, and anxiety.

behavioral results of distress

Include high levels of smoking, drug use, appetite disorders, proneness to accidents, violence, a decreased job performance.

psychological results of distress

Include severe anxiety, alienation, depression, and psychosomatic effects such as speech difficulties.

medical results of distress

Include increases in smoking and drug and related heart problems or a stroke; possible negative effects on the immune system.

results of eustress

The positive effects that occur when a person successfully adapts to a stressor; e.g., exhilaration and excitement.

stress

Experienced when an event in a person’s environment presents a constraint, an opportunity, or an excessive physical or psychological demand; results in the stress response.

stress management

Has the goal of maintaining stress at an optimal level for the individual and the organization; includes strategies of stress reduction, stress resilience, and stress recuperation.

stress recuperation

The process of recovering from exposure to stressors. Strategies include relaxation training, exercise, and meditation.

stress reduction

A decrease in the number of stressors a person experiences. Strategies include avoiding situations that cause distress and planning ahead; organizational strategies include training programs and job redesign.

stress resilience

An increase in a person's ability to endure stressors without experiencing dysfunctional results. Strategies include exercise, diet, and weight control.

stress response

The physical and psychological changes that a person undergoes when experiencing stress; the changes prepare the person to either fight the stressor or run from it.

physiological stress response

An integrated set of responses of the sympathetic nervous system, the parasympathetic nervous system, and the endocrine system. Heart rate, blood pressure, and breathing rate increases as the body gets ready to face the stressor.

psychological stress response

Includes increased apprehension and alertness; either a positive or negative response. A positive response includes feelings of exhilaration, excitement, challenge, and opportunity. A negative response includes feelings of anxiety, fear, and threat.

work stressors

Include deadlines, work overload, shift work, job security, and the physical environment.

nonwork stressors

Include financial problems, relocation, and dual careers.

life transition stressors

Include death of a loved one, divorce, or children leaving home.

stressors

Objects or events in a person's physical and social environment that can induce a stress response.

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Stress is the result of a person's unusually high physical or psychological response to some attribute, event, demand, or action in that person's environment. Sources of stress are called stressors. They come from both positive and negative sources.
    2. Develop a better understanding of stress so you can recognize it and better manage it for self and those who report to you, if you are a manager.
    3. Why concerned about stress?
      1. Individual reasons: increased cardiac risk, abuse of alcohol and other drugs
      2. Organizational reasons: absenteeism, turnover, reduced productivity, poor decisions
      3. Societal reasons: costs of cardiovascular disease and drug abuse
  2. The General Adaptation Syndrome: "Fight or Flight"
    1. Alarm: body prepares to fight or adjust to the stressor by increasing heart rate, blood sugar, respiration, muscle tension
    2. Resistance: body tries to return to a normal state by adapting to the stressor
    3. Exhaustion: comes from repeatedly experiencing a stressor or constantly resisting a stressor
  3. The Psychological Demands and Decision Latitude Model
    1. Uses two constructs to explain stress effects of people’s jobs
      1. Job demands
        1. Pace and amount of work
        2. Psychological demands not physical demands
        3. Anxiety leads to stress response
      2. Job decision latitude
        1. Decision authority
        2. Skill requirements
    2. Stress occurs when job is high in demands and low in decision latitude
      1. High stress job: customer service representative
      2. Low stress job: forester
  4. An Integrated Model of Stress
    1. Introduction
      1. Developed and pursued in the stress research literature by several investigators
      2. Useful to you as an individual and as a manager. A way of analyzing sources of stress and the effects of stress
      3. Overview of model
      4. Role of perceptual processes
    2. Stressors: sources of stress. Antecedents of a stress response. Not all apply to you. Role of perception.
      1. Work stressors
        1. Job-based stressors
          1. Level of difficulty
          2. Overload
          3. Underload
          4. Physical demands
          5. Work pace
          6. Requirements for social interaction
          7. Political behavior
          8. Routine jobs
        2. Role-based stressors
          1. Role conflict
          2. Role ambiguity
          3. Role overload
        3. Career-based stress. Not related to the presence or absence of stress from the person's present job.
        4. Physical environment. Crowding, understaffing, layout, decor (including colors), temperature, odors, lighting, noise. Working with hazardous material, radiation.
        5. Social environment
          1. Relationships with coworkers
          2. Group pressures. The Chapter 10, “Groups and Intergroup Processes,” discussion of groups and group dynamics should help you better understand groups and have them be less stressful for you.
        6. Leadership and management behavior. Relationships with supervisors.
        7. Organizational conflict. Chapter 11, “Conflict in Organizations,” discussion of conflict should help you better understand it and have it be less stressful for you.
        8. Organizational factors. Physical moves of an entire organization or part of one. Technological changes. Organizational culture.
      2. Nonwork stressors
        1. Dual-career relationships
        2. Nonwork organizations. Clubs, community organizations, and religious organizations. Have many of the stressors described above.
        3. Spillover from work: stress contagion
      3. Life transition stressors
        1. Family life cycle—birth to death
        2. Divorce
        3. Children leaving home
    3. Stress response
      1. Behavioral
      2. Psychological
      3. Medical
      4. Distress or eustress result, depending on the perception of the stressor, choice of behavioral response, and resilience of the person to stress.
    4. Behavioral response
      1. Acting on the perceived source of stress
      2. Importance of properly targeting behavioral response to be effective in responding to the stressor
    5. Distress and eustress results
      1. Distress: individual results
        1. Physiological
        2. Psychological
        3. Behavioral
      2. Distress: organizational results
        1. Job performance
        2. Withdrawal, both temporary and permanent. Reduced commitment and satisfaction
      3. Eustress results
        1. Individual results
        2. Organizational results
    6. Moderators. Modify the relationships among the model's parts. Perception of stressors and choices of behavioral responses. Predisposed to a stress response or able to successfully adapt to the stressor.
      1. Coping responses
        1. Person's response to a stressor: change it or how the person interprets the stressor
        2. Problem-focused coping: change the reason the stressor exists. Example: change lighting in a work area to reduce glare.
        3. Emotion-focused coping: change one's perception or interpretation of a stressor. Example: attribute a co-worker's negative comments to that person's experienced stress.
        4. Specific types of coping responses
          1. Confrontive coping
          2. Distancing
          3. Self-controlling
          4. Seeking social support
          5. Accepting responsibility
          6. Escape-avoidance
          7. Planful problem-solving
          8. Positive reappraisal
      2. Personality
        1. Hardiness
        2. Type A and B
      3. Skills, abilities, experience
      4. Family health history
      5. Demographics
        1. Gender
        2. Ethnicity
        3. Age
      6. Diet
      7. Physical fitness
  5. Burnout
    1. Chronic state of emotional exhaustion stemming from an unrelenting series of on-the-job pressures with few moments of positive experience.
    2. Three part process: emotional exhaustion, depersonalization of relationships with clients as a coping response, and reduced personal achievement.
    3. Jobs that are high, moderate, and low in burnout potential. Not restricted to the helping occupations that have been customarily associated with burnout.
    4. Individual and organizational results. Effects both at work and away from work.
  6. Stress Management: Individual and Organizational Strategies.
    1. See it as stress management because many stressors are unavoidable and some amount of stress is not bad. Learn how to recognize and avoid stressors, increase your resilience to such stressors and reduce their harmful effects. Because a person cannot avoid some stressors, one needs to develop resilience or recuperate. Managing toward an optimal level of stress for both individuals and the organization.
    2. Individual strategies: what you can do for yourself. Gaining control over stress in your life. This section describes many stress management strategies. It tells you what they are, what they do, and why. But, it does not give you step-by-step descriptions of each strategy. The associated citations give you those details.
      1. Stress reduction
        1. Know yourself and stay away from known stressors. Planning and avoidance. Getting to know about a new job. Includes chemical and food sources.
        2. Managing stress perception. Psychological withdrawal and forms of perceptual distortion. Some things are inevitable.
        3. Role and time management. Learning how to say no. Avoiding role overload.
        4. Social support
        5. Change situation: quit
      2. Stress resilience
        1. Exercise program
          1. Increases stress resilience
          2. Decreases harmful distress effects
          3. Aerobic exercise. Outdoors (jogging, walking, cycling, swimming, hiking). Indoors, including at home (aerobics, Jazzercise, fencing, stationary bicycle, rowing machine, swimming, ski machine, treadmill, step climber).
          4. Other exercise. Self image. Weight lifting. Weight machines, free weights, and isometrics: muscle tone, shaping.
        2. Diet and weight control
      3. Stress recuperation
        1. Exercise
        2. Relaxation training
          1. Induces the relaxation response, an adaptive antistress bodily response. Decreases heart rate, muscle tension, and breathing rate.
          2. How to get the relaxation response: quiet environment, closed eyes, comfortable position, repeating a word or phrase, blocking out other thoughts.
        3. Meditation
          1. Clinically Standardized Meditation
          2. Other forms of meditation of eastern origin and usually with religious roots
        4. Emotional release: talking it out, writing it out, acting it out
        5. Vacation. Enough rest. Three-day weekends. Outside interests. Balance of work and non-work. Finding eustress outside work if it is not available at work.
    3. Organizational strategies. Infer much of this section from the observations for individuals above. Both prevention and recovery. Trying to reach an optimal balance between too much and too little stress. The latter varies according to individual differences and organizational needs. Organizations can offer many of the methods of relaxation described above.
      1. Stress reduction
        1. Training programs. Directly related to job, time management, stress management.
        2. Selection, placement, career development. Person-job fit. Includes moving or removing people from situations that are dysfunctional for them. Self-assessment and career planning workshops. Counseling.
        3. Job design. Person-job fit. Role demands. Role analysis. See Chapter 9, “Intrinsic Rewards and Job Design.”
        4. Organizational design. Decentralization and self-managing work teams.
        5. Organizational culture
        6. Physical work conditions. Noise, heat, cold, noxious odors, and so on. Physical layout to help social interaction. Can help build social support.
        7. Work schedules, especially for dual-career couples, people with school-age children, or people caring for an elderly relative. Flexible work schedules. Day care.
      2. Stress resilience
        1. Wellness centers. Exercise programs with trained instructors to help design an exercise program for stress resilience.
        2. Company cafeteria and the food served.
      3. Stress recuperation
        1. Wellness centers. See above.
        2. Some training programs described earlier for stress reduction also apply.
          1. Relaxation training
          2. Meditation
        3. Employee assistance programs
  7. International Aspects of Stress in Organizations
    1. Business traveling and time changes. Language and value differences not likely to create as severe stress as culture shock because it is temporary. Visiting a new culture for the first time.
    2. Expatriate. Working in another country for an extended period. Stress from culture shock sets in at about the second or third month. Usually over within six months. Especially difficult for a spouse or partner. Increases nonwork stressors.
    3. Working in another country. Organizational culture shock. Observations from several earlier chapters. Perception, communication. Functioning of multicultural teams for decision-making and problem-solving. Approaches to decision-making (See Chapter 14, “Decision-Making and Problem-Solving Processes”) and orientation to uncertainty (Hofstede's Uncertainty Avoidance Index results.) Political behavior.
    4. The repatriate. Returning to home culture. Both societal and organizational culture.
  8. Ethical Issues about Stress in Organizations
    1. Observations on each class of stressors
    2. Changes in the work environment (technology organizational design) can change the person-environment fit. Managers in an organization make such decisions. Do they have an ethical obligation to their employees to properly prepare them for such changes to reduce potential stress from poor person-environment fit?
    3. All aspects of the physical environment. Adhering to Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards: noxious fumes, radiation, workplace safety. Issue of exposing workers to known hazards with the goal of reducing operating costs.
    4. Selection and placement. Should organizations tell potential new hires about the need satisfying qualities of jobs and the likely career path they could have in their organizations?
    5. If apparent harmful stress results from a present poor person-environment fit, are organizations required to give career counseling or help a person find a better-fitting job within or outside the organization?
    6. Required to deal with nonwork stressors because of their effects on work performance and the combination effects between nonwork and work stressors. Organizational wellness programs.
    7. Where things are in the United States now. In the courts, and so forth. What is being emphasized as required behavior of businesses?

Chapter Overview

Chapter 16 discusses stress in organizations. It describes the stress response, types of stressors (stress sources), and ways of managing stress. The chapter describes three models of the stress response: (1) Selye's classic general adaptation syndrome, (2) the psychological demands and decision latitude model, and (3) an integrated model of stress. Descriptions of sources of stress away from work, and how these stressors interact with stress experienced at work, are unusual chapter features. It also has sections describing stress diagnosis and stress management strategies. The latter are grouped under the headings "Stress Reduction," "Stress Resilience," and "Stress Recuperation."

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Describe the body's natural responses to stressful events.
  • Discuss some stress response models.
  • Assess why stress is not always bad for people.
  • Describe the sources of stress in modern living.
  • Identify burnout as a special case of stress.
  • Compare individual and organizational strategies of stress management.
  • Assess why working in another country presents unique sources of stress.
  • Debate the ethical issues raised by stress in organizations.

Personal and Management implications

The text's discussion of stress response models gave different views of the human stress response. The models describe the natural character of the response, its unavoidable quality, and how it varies from person to person. The integrated model of stress includes several moderators that emphasize the importance of interactions between the person and the environment.

One main implication is the need to learn and understand your individual stress response. What experiences do you consider stressful? How do you react to those experiences? What characteristics of yourself either strengthen or weaken your response to unavoidable stressors? For example, Type A personalities approach experiences with impatience, often adding to the natural stressors they meet daily.

The discussion of stress management offered many observations on individual ways of reducing stress, increasing stress resilience, and recovering from stress. Pay special attention to your diet and physical condition as ways of increasing your stress resilience. Examine the role of exercise in your lifestyle. As the text explained, exercise not only increases one's resilience to stress, but plays a role in recovering from stress. If you do not regularly exercise now, you might want to add physical activity to your lifestyle.

The section on stress recuperation described many methods available to help people recover from stress. If you feel you do not know how to recover from stress in healthy ways, you might want to learn more about methods of relaxation. You should also find out whether your employing organization sponsors workshops on stress management or offers counseling. If you feel you are not coping with stressors effectively, follow these suggestions to find out more about effective and healthy stress recuperation for you.

All these personal implications also apply to you as a manager. Other implications follow from that role as well. The earlier case describing managers as stressors had several implications for you in that role.

Reflect on your behavior toward those who work for you. Do you demand more than they can deliver? Do you set deadlines that are almost impossible to meet? In short, as a manager, are you a stressor in your subordinates' environment? You will find it revealing, informative, and possibly frightening to learn that your subordinates perceive you as a stressor. Ask them and listen carefully to their observations. Compare their comments to the text chapter's observations about stress. Of course, it is always possible you are not behaving as a stressor.

Reflect upon your organization. Does it have any organizational strategies that reduce stress, increase stress resilience, or help people recover from stressors. If it does not, are you able to encourage their development? You can easily learn what is now being done by consulting with your Human Resources Department.

The jobs of managers have their own set of stressors not always found in other types of jobs. Many management jobs require repeated travel, exposing those managers to the natural stressors of traveling. The stressors have a different quality if the travel is international. The implications for managers in jobs requiring travel center on ways of avoiding stress, having high resilience to those stressors, and recuperating quickly in healthy ways from unavoidable stressors.

Management jobs often also carry more responsibility than nonmanagement jobs. Those responsibilities can be significant stressors for many people. One implication asks whether you have been trained for your management position. If you have not had the right training, you may not be ready to handle your position's responsibilities. The second implication asks whether you are in a job suited to your personal characteristics. The latter implies reducing stress by leaving the position.


Chapter Summary

Stress is an unavoidable aspect of modern living. People experience stress when an event in their environment presents a constraint, an opportunity, or an excessive physical or psychological demand. Not all stress is bad. Some stress can energize a person to behave in desired ways.

Different theories of stress can give you varying insights about the stress response. The general adaptation syndrome proposes a “fight or flight” response. Varying types of job qualities as stressors are the central feature of the psychological demands and decision latitude model. The integrated model of stress is the most comprehensive of the three models discussed in this chapter. It describes stressors as occurring in work experiences, in nonwork experiences, and during major life transitions. The model includes the role of perception in filtering stressors. A stressor can be exciting to one person and a source of harm to another. The model describes moderators of the stress response such as personality, skills, family health history, demographics, diet, and physical fitness. The integrated model also describes the results of both distress and eustress.

Burnout is a chronic state of emotional exhaustion stemming from an unrelenting series of on-the-job pressures with few moments of positive experience. Burnout is work-related distress usually experienced by people in jobs that require helping other people.

Stress management includes individual and organization strategies to manage stress. Different strategies aim to reduce stress, increase stress resilience, and help people recuperate from stress.

Stressors can arise from the international activi-ties of organizations. Three areas in particular contribute to stress: (1) business trips to other countries, (2) relocation to another country for an extended time, and (3) returning home.

Many ethical issues surround stress in organizations. This section emphasized the roles of managers, nonmanagers, and organizational policies in dealing with sources of stress. The ethical issues often pivot on the amount of knowledge people have about stressors in their work environments.

Stressors in Your Life

Review the stressors described in textbook Chapter 16. Which stressors play the biggest role in your life now? Which stressors do you expect to play big roles in the future?

Eustress

Not all stress is bad for people. Eustress is possible and exhilarating for many. Discuss the conditions under which you believe you experience eustress. Compare those conditions to the conditions of eustress for some of your friends.

Perception and the Stress Response

Discuss the role of perception in the stress response. You may find it useful to review the perception portion of textbook Chapter 5 and discuss its implications for understanding the stress response.

Moderators of the Stress Response

What are the moderators of the stress response? What portions of the integrated model of stress do the moderators affect? How? Discuss each moderator and relate it to yourself.

Stress Management and You

Review the stress management section of textbook Chapter 16. Which methods are easiest for you to follow now? Which methods should you consider in the future? As a manager, which methods can you put into effect for others?

International Aspects of Stress in Organizations

Travel and transfer to foreign locations are potential stressors for many people. Discuss your experiences with foreign travel or foreign assignments. Which parts of those experiences were the most recurring stressors?

Ethical Issues and Stress in Organizations

Discuss the ethical issues about stress in organizations. Are these real issues to which modern managers should attend? Why or why not?

Broadcast News (1987)

Three sharply different personalities interact to produce the evening televised news. Jane Craig (Holly Hunter) is the compulsive news producer. Tom Grunick (William Hurt) is the smooth news anchor. Aaron Altman (Albert Brooks) is a veteran news reporter. A romantic triangle develops among them, adding to the film's comedic flavor.

These scenes start in DVD Chapter 5, “Insecurity and Desperation,” 0:20:28 and continue into DVD Chapter 6, “Bill Smiled!” (Stop 0:24:46). They begin in the television editing room with a sound of a tape rewinding. The scenes end after Aaron Altman says, “He did smile.”

Consider the following questions and observations while viewing the scenes: Which characters experience distress? Which characters experience eustress? Do they have functional or dysfunctional responses to their stress experiences?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Falling Down (1993)1

Bill ‘D-Fens’ Foster (Michael Douglas), a law-abiding white-collar worker, snaps while stuck in a Los Angeles freeway traffic jam on a hot day. Facing the stressors of divorce and unemployment, he leaves his car and goes on a violent rage — lashing at anyone who gets in his way. This film has many harrowing moments as Foster tries, by force, to return to the happy, normal life he never really had. His pursuer, Detective Prendergast (Robert Duvall), has one day before retirement but sets out to capture him.

This scene starts at the film's beginning after the title screen, “A Joel Schumacher Film” (DVD Chapter 1, “Heavy Traffic [Credits]”). The camera slowly pulls back from a close-up of Foster's face. It ends after Foster runs off into shrubs under the freeway (Stop: 0:04:54). The film cuts to Detective Prendergast sitting in his patrol car.

Consider the following questions while viewing this scene: What stressors affect Bill Foster? What are his physiological and psychological stress responses? Does Foster experience eustress (positive result) or distress (negative result)?

Notes

1. From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Stressors in Your Life

The number and pattern of stressors that people check in each part of the exercise depend on different factors. Work stressors heavily depend on the industry within which a person works, the type of job a person has within a specific company, and a person’s career stage. Some jobs feature exposure to heat, dust, and fumes. Other jobs feature high levels of responsibility. All jobs have some form of the social relationships noted as potential work stressors: relationships with supervisors, coworkers, and subordinates. The number and pattern of work stressors varies from one person to another.

Nonwork stressors depend on a person’s situation. Marital status, financial status, family status, and health all contribute as nonwork stressors. The number and pattern of nonwork stressors also varies among people who complete the exercise.

Life transition stressors have close ties to a person’s age and period of life. Young or unmarried people should have fewer life transition stressors than older people with a spouse and children. Other life transitions do not vary with age, such as the death of a close friend or a pet. Highly varied patterns of life transition stressors occur for people who complete this exercise.

The summary often gives those who complete the exercise a small scare about the number of stressors in their lives. Typically, people do not do this type of systematic stress assessment. Stop and carefully consider the number and pattern of stressors in your life. This reflection should raise some major questions about how effectively you manage stress to reduce its negative effects.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 17.

analyzer

A generic organizational form that emphasizes efficiency in producing stable products or services and scans the environment for new products that it can adapt to produce its own version; combines centralized, formal elements in part of the organization with decentralized, less formal elements in other parts.

closed system

A self-contained system that operates independently of its environment; not affected by changes in external environment.

contingency factors of organizational design

Factors considered by managers before deciding to design or redesign an organization; include external environment, strategy, technical process, and organizational size.

defender

A generic organizational form with well-defined functions, centralization, and formal procedures; has a committed customer base that lets it provide a predictable flow of products or services; suited to stable environments.

divisional organizational design

An organizational form with decentralized divisions; typically, the organization produces several different products or services and emphasizes customer satisfaction.

environmental uncertainty

Predictability of an organization’s environment; low predictability, high uncertainty. Two environmental dimensions contribute to uncertainty: simple to complex and static to dynamic.

simple to complex

An environmental dimension that contributes to uncertainty; a simple environment has a few similar elements; a complex environment has many different elements that managers must monitor.

static to dynamic

An environmental dimension that contributes to uncertainty; a static external environment is unchanging or slowly changing; a dynamic external environment is filled with quickly moving events that could conflict with each other.

evolving forms of organizational design

Several new ways of designing organizations; includes self-managing teams, process organizational design, and the virtual organization.

external environment

Persons and institutions outside an organization that affect it; e.g., the organization's competitors, customers, suppliers, government regulators, and labor unions; a contingency factor affecting organizational design.

functional organizational design

Groups an organization's tasks into separate units or departments; typically, the organization produces a few standardized products or services in a stable external environment.

generic forms of organizational design

Broad organizational forms from which managers can choose to configure an organization; includes mechanistic and organic organizations and defender, prospector, analyzer, and reactor organizational forms.

organizational design’s goals

Consist of getting information to the right people for effective decision making and coordinating the interdependent parts of the organization.

hybrid organizational design

A configuration that combines elements of functional and divisional designs, the organization typically has many different products or services, a complex external environment, and both routine and nonroutine technical processes.

matrix organizational design

A grid-like configuration in which many people report to at least two supervisors (e.g., one in a functional area, one in a project); used where two separate sectors of the external environment demand management attention.

mechanistic organization

A generic organizational form characterized by clearly specified tasks, precise definition of member's rights and obligations, a hierarchical structure, and a tendency toward vertical interaction and communication; fits a highly certain environment.

open system

A concept describing the relationship between an organization and its external environment in which the organization can act on, be affected by, and have transactions and exchanges with that environment.

organic organization

A generic organizational form characterized by roles that are not highly defined, continual task redefinition as members interact, little reliance on authority, decentralized control and decision making, and communication that is both lateral and vertical; fits an uncertain external environment.

organizational design

The way managers structure their organization to reach the organization's goals; allocation of duties, tasks, and responsibilities among departments and individuals.

process organizational design

An evolving form of organizational design. Views the organization as a series of interconnected processes that weave across functions; people use multiple skills to perform all or part of a process rather than doing repetitive tasks focused on only a small part of the process.

prospector

A generic organizational form that focuses on developing new products or services and watching for new markets; typically has little centralization or task specialization; suited to dynamic, fast-changing environments.

reactor

A generic organization form that has an unbalanced configuration of external environment, organizational design, strategy, and technical process.

self-managing teams

An evolving form of organizational design. Features work units that have the authority to make decisions about product design, process design, and customer service; also known as self-managing workgroups.

size

The magnitude of an organization; a contingency factor affecting organizational design. Larger organizations have more formal rules and procedures, more management levels, and more structured work activities than smaller organizations.

strategy

An organization's long-term goals and the way its managers plan to reach those goals; a contingency factor that affects organizational design.

technical process

The system an organization uses to produce its products or services; a contingency factor affecting organizational design.

virtual organization

An evolving form of organizational design. A temporary network of organizations or individuals that focus on reaching a specific target or responding to new opportunities; all members of the network are linked by information technology.

Chapter Outline

  1. Develops two major views of organizational design. The contingency view argues that a manager's choice of organizational design is driven and constrained by several factors inside and outside the organization. The configuration view says specific collections of context, technical, and design factors are more effective designs for an organization than others. The chapter develops both views as analytical tools for assessing an existing organizational design or choosing a new one.
  2. Introduction
    1. Definition
    2. An organization chart can show the formal structure. It usually cannot show all communication links, integrating mechanisms, and aspects of informal arrangements within the organization. Often shows management’s preferred or expected reporting relationships.
    3. Goals
      1. Information flow for managing the decision-making process
      2. Required coordination of activities
    4. Symptoms when organizational design is not right
    5. Organizational design affects many aspects of behavior in organizations described in the earlier chapters.
    6. Chapter goals: develop some conceptual frameworks that will let you answer the questions below and analyze the structural requirements of an organization. The chapter also describes widely used alternative forms of organization. Develop an analytical framework that you can use to examine existing and potential organizational design. Will develop a general framework and then show you specific approaches to organizational design.
      1. New organization. What should the organizational design look like?
      2. Existing organization. Is the current design correct for the organization? If not, what should it look like?
      3. Existing organization. Have there been changes in the external environment that require a change in the design of the organization, its technical process, or both?
  3. The Contingency Factors of Organizational Design
    1. The major contingency factors of organizational design: strategy, external environment, technical process, and size. Those factors can affect each other in several ways.
    2. A systems view of organizations
      1. Open versus closed systems
      2. Effects of the external environment on the organization
        1. Permeable boundary
        2. Monitoring the external environment. Predicting the effects of changes in the external environment.
        3. Affecting the external environment: lobbying, litigation
    3. How the contingency factors can be related (general). Major changes in any of them may require changes in organizational design.
    4. Each may be a constraint or an opportunity.
    5. Conceive of as tools (organizational design and technical process) to accomplish the strategy.
    6. Develop a proactive instead of reactive orientation to organizational design. Actively examine and reexamine the existing organizational design to be sure it is congruent with what the organization is trying to do.
    7. Strategy
      1. Strategy and strategic planning
        1. Vision of a future state of the organization
        2. Desired state and how to get there
      2. Assess existing organizational design
      3. Assess existing technical process
    8. External environment
      1. Stable – changeable
      2. Certainty – uncertainty
      3. Static – Dynamic
      4. Simple – Complex
    9. Technical process. Can help or constrain the design of the organization. The technical process may require a specific type of organizational design to be effectively used. The technical process may also prescribe certain behavior patterns.
      1. Characteristics of each technical process
        1. Interdependence
        2. Complexity
        3. Cost
        4. Consequences
        5. Speed (affects decision-making)
      2. Technical process and organizational design
        1. Requirements the technical process puts on organizational design. Can see again how organizational design is a tool to do the organization's work.
        2. Changes in technical process may require a change in organizational design.
    10. Organization Size
      1. General structural tendencies of small versus large organizations
      2. Tendency for large organizations to resemble bureaucracies
  4. Generic Forms of Organizational Design
    1. Mechanistic and organic organizations
      1. Characteristics
      2. Can have a mixture of mechanistic and organic designs within the same organization. Presents integration problems to managers.
      3. Such a mixture may be resisted by senior managers.
      4. The mixture may be required by the different environments the various subsystems of the organization face.
      5. Alignment of organizational design with the requirements of the external environment. Can be misaligned in either direction; e.g., overly structured or under structured.
    2. Defender, prospector, analyzer, and reactor organizations
      1. Defender organizations succeed in stable environments. Their competitive advantage comes from specialization, repeated use of well understood and standardized technical processes, and low costs of product manufacture or service delivery. The defender's organizational design features well-defined functions, centralization, and formal procedures. They also can use a long-range planning process because their external environments change slowly.
      2. Prospector organizations succeed in dynamic environments that feature unpredictable and fast change. They prosper by continually monitoring their external environment to find new markets. They also focus on developing new products or services that fit fast changing customer needs, desires, and expectations. Prospector organizations have high decentralization, little task specialization, few levels of management, and high interdependence among people and work units. Their technical processes feature flexibility to let them quickly introduce new products.
      3. Analyzer organizations have some features of both prospector and defender organizations. They strive for efficiency in their technical processes to keep costs low. They also develop new products and services to maintain a competitive edge in changing markets. Analyzer organizations likely have more internal interdependence because they press for both technical innovation and process efficiency.
      4. Reactor organizations have an unbalanced configuration of context, design, strategy, and process factors. They do not have a well-defined and stable strategy. Reactor organizations fluctuate in levels of product and service development, because their managers interpret the external environment as changing fast. They also do not use a long-range planning process because of their belief in the unpredictability of the organization's environment.
  5. Specific Forms of Organizational Design
    1. Functional, divisional, and matrix forms of organizational design. Also combine functional and divisional into a hybrid design.
    2. Managers can use more than one alternative form in an organizational design.
    3. Evolving forms
    4. Each alternative form has different behavioral demands. Will describe them for each of the major forms.
    5. Organizational design by function
      1. Description
      2. Strengths and weaknesses
      3. Behavioral demands of a functional organization
    6. Organizational design by division
      1. General description
        1. Evolve over time from a functional organization
        2. These are examples of decentralized organizations, at least in part.
        3. Example: The Colgate-Palmolive Company
        4. Other forms of organizational design by division. Customer, location, process
      2. Strengths and weaknesses
      3. Behavioral demands of a divisional organization
    7. Hybrid organizational design
      1. Description
      2. Strengths and weaknesses
      3. Behavioral demands of a hybrid design
      4. Example: Unilever de Argentina S.A.
    8. Matrix organizational design
      1. Description
      2. Strengths and weaknesses
      3. Behavioral demands of a matrix organization.
  6. Evolving forms of organizational design
    1. Self-managing teams
    2. Process organizational design
    3. The virtual organization
  7. International Aspects of Organizational Design
    1. The international context of organizations increases the complexity of external environments. The parts of the external environment described earlier multiply when an organization moves into the global arena. Countries vary in labor laws, consumer preferences, buying and selling traditions, and economics. Multiple-country operations increase the environmental complexity of multinational organizations.
    2. Organizational forms and cultural differences. Function and division designs more congruent with the values of some cultures than a matrix or the alternative designs. Uncertainty avoidance and power distance issues. Many cultures like the hierarchical relationships' lack of ambiguity.
    3. Cultures vary in successful use of self-managing teams.
    4. The virtual corporation can use communications and computer technology to link organizations around the world. Each member of such alliances can use an organizational design that is consistent with local culture values. Sony and Apple teamed to manufacture the low-end model of its PowerBook™ notebook computers. Apple did not have the manufacturing capacity to do it and Sony had much experience in manufacturing miniaturized parts.
  8. Ethical Issues in Organizational Design
    1. Affecting the external environment by lobbying and bribes. The latter was alleged about Teledyne.
    2. Changing technical processes. Effects on employment and stress from needing to learn new ways of working. A requirement to train people?
    3. Strategic responses to environmental demands. Making organizations smaller. Layoffs.
    4. Matrix organizations, conflict, and stress.

Chapter Overview

Chapter 17 introduces organizational design by describing its goals. It describes the contingency factors of organizational design: the external environment, the organization's strategy, its technical process, and its size. Different combinations of these factors contribute to the choice of an organization's design. This part of the chapter describes various ways of viewing the external environment and the nature of different technical processes.

The chapter describes two generic forms of organizational design. Mechanistic and organic organizations fit different organizational environments. The second set of generic forms are defender, prospector, analyzer, and reactor organizational types.

The chapter describes specific alternative forms of organization (functional, division, hybrid, and matrix) and gives examples of each. The sections describing the alternative forms include discussions of each form’s behavioral demands. This chapter also includes descriptions of some evolving forms of organizational design: self-managing teams, process organizational design, and the virtual organization.

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Analyze how an organization’s design coordinates its activities and gets information to decision makers.
  • Discuss the contingency factors of organizational design.
  • Distinguish among the organizational design effects of strategy, external environment, technical process, and size.
  • Discuss some generic forms of organizational design.
  • Explain the design features of functional, divisional, hybrid, and matrix organizational forms.
  • Compare the characteristics of several organizational forms that are likely to evolve in the future.
  • Appreciate some international and ethical issues that surround the design of organizations.

Personal and Management implications

The contingency factors of organizational design can change over time, requiring management to respond with a new design. A new organizational design can introduce many changes for you. Established relationships with others in the organization may be disrupted. Old, and possibly comfortable, ways of behaving will be altered. Only you know how well you cope with change. A significant source of change for you in the future will be the redesign of your employing organization.

Managers must continually watch the external environment for changes that require a change in strategy. If managers change strategy, they should reexamine organizational design and the technical process. If the environment becomes turbulent, managers should consider moving to an organic form of organization. Any changes required are not always easy to make. Resistance to change by people in the organization is common.

Staying competitive in a fast-changing external environment often requires managers to change the technical process of their organization. The existing technical process or organizational design can constrain such change1. Managers must be aware of when their organization needs a new technical process. As organizations change their technical processes, managers must also be aware of needed changes in organizational design. Some research evidence described in the text chapter points to specific changes in organizational design required by different characteristics of the technical process.

Functional organizations present you with less ambiguity than other organization forms. Reporting relationships, duties, and tasks are well defined. Such organizations give you a clear career path. Grouping technical specialists together will let you sharply hone your technical skills.

Divisional organizations carry similar implications. Divisions focus their members on the division's major goals. Members within a division can easily lose sight of the organization's goals. Isolation of technical specialists within divisions means you may not benefit from interaction with similar specialists in other divisions.

Matrix organizations let technical specialists work on different projects, sharpening their technical skills by application to varied problems. Matrix organizations have the distinct feature of exposing you to many different experiences.

The degree of ambiguity varies among the different organization forms. Functional organizations are the least ambiguous. Matrix organizations are often filled with ambiguity. You will need to decide how much ambiguity you can tolerate. The basic issue you face is the type of organization form best suited to you. When you select a future employer, consider not only the type of job you may get, but also the type of organization form in which you will work.

The potential for conflict and the bases of conflict also differ from one organization form to another. Narrow views that often develop within groups in a functional organization can lead to interpersonal conflict between group members. Similarly, the divisional focus of the division form of organization can also lead to conflict. Lastly, matrix organizations have the highest conflict potential of any of the forms. Knowing why conflict happens in organizations is important for you to do your job successfully.

Each form of organization puts different demands on managers. The need for management, interpersonal, and conflict management skills increases with the complexity of organizational design. Matrix organizations make the biggest demand on such skills.

Managers in both functional and divisional organizations must be constantly alert for the development of shortsighted views about the organization's business. The tendency to focus only on the goals of a function or a division must be offset by management. Managers play key integrating roles in such organizations, pulling people toward broader organizational goals.

Organizations that combine functional and divisional forms tend to encourage autonomy among division managers. Headquarters staff, though, may try to control the managers. When the division managers resist the control, conflict between line and staff can develop.

Managers who work outside their home country should develop an understanding of the organization forms that are consistent with local values. Applying what works in their home country to an assignment in another country could lead to dysfunctional results. Such cautions especially apply to matrix organizations and the evolving organizational forms.

Notes

1. Collins, P. D., J. Hage, and F. M. Hull. 1988. Organizational and Technological Predictors of Change in Automaticity. Academy of Management Journal 31: 512–43.


Chapter Summary

Organizational design refers to the way managers structure organizations by assigning tasks and responsibilities to departments and individuals and by defining reporting relationships among them. The design of an organization helps get information to the right places for effective decision-making and helps coordinate the interdependent parts of the organization.

The contingency factors of organizational design are strategy, external environment, technical process, and size. An organization’s external environment can change, requiring managers to form a new strategy. That new strategy is then carried out by changing the technical process, organizational design, or both. Routine technologies centralize decision-making and use written rules and procedures to guide decisions. Complex, nonroutine technologies can have more complex organizational forms with more departments or divisions than routine technologies.

Several generic organizational forms add to our understanding of organizational design. Mechanistic organizational forms work well in a static environment; organic forms work well in a dynamic environment. Other generic forms are defender, prospector, analyzer, and reactor organizations. The first three work well in different external environments. Reactor organizations have an unbalanced configuration of external environment, organizational design, strategy, and technical process.

Functional organizational design puts specialists together and separates them from other specialists. Such organizations emphasize developing and using technical skills, an emphasis that can distract members from the larger goals of the organization.

Organizations designed by divisions stress a particular set of products, markets, services, technologies, and the like. Such organizations are decentralized, with authority for decisions dispersed throughout the organization. Divisional organizations can be flexible and responsive to a changing environment. The emphasis on the division’s work, however, can divert ­attention from the total organization’s goals.

Matrix organizations are the most complex form of organization described in this chapter. Dual-­authority relationships in many parts of the orga-nization are their most distinctive feature. Matrix ­organizations are flexible and often constantly changing. Evidence suggests that the matrix form does not fit the values of all cultures, implying that multinational organizations should use it with caution.

Evolving organizational forms feature self-­managing teams and organizations designed around processes. A third form, the virtual organization, uses technology to connect far-flung parts of the organization. Managers are using these new designs to build organizations that respond faster and more effectively to shifting constraints and opportunities.

An organization’s international context can greatly increase the external environment’s complexity. ­Op­erations in multiple countries further increase that complexity. Different organizational forms will best fit different country cultures.

Ethical issues center on management’s shifts in strategic focus and the positive and negative effects on present employees. Moving to the evolving organizational forms also raises ethical questions about the people effects of such changes.

Contingency Factors of Organizational Design

What are the major contingency factors of organizational design? How are they related to each other? Discuss modern examples of each contingency factor.

Mechanstic and Organic Organizations

Why are mechanistic organizations right for a static environment? Why do organic organizations fit well with a dynamic environment? Which organization form likely will be dominant in the future?

Hybrid Organizational Design

Why do organizations often combine organization by function and organization by division? What advantages do organizations get from this more complex hybrid form?

Generic Forms of Organizational Design

What are the characteristics of defender, prospector, analyzer, and reactor organizations? What types of environments does each organizational form best fit? What are the unique qualities of a reactor organization?

Matrix Organizations

Discuss the characteristics of matrix organizations. What environmental conditions contribute to choosing this complex organizational design? What skills do people need to successfully work in and manage a matrix organization?

Evolving Forms of Organizational Design

Review the section describing the evolving forms of organizational design. Which forms appear especially appealing, challenging, and motivating. Why?

International and Ethics Issues

Review the chapter’s international and ethics ¬sections. Discuss the ethical issues that surround organizational design questions in different countries. Should managers choose a design according to the local culture or according to their home culture?

Casino (1995)

Martin Scorsese's Casino is his complex and beautifully photographed study of 1970s Las Vegas gambling casinos. They have organized crime connections which combine with ambition, sex, greed, and drugs to destroy a gambling empire. The film includes strong performances by Sharon Stone, Robert De Niro, and Joe Pesci.

These scenes appear within DVD Chapter 2, “The Truth About Las Vegas,” starting at 0:21:03 and playing to the chapter's end. It begins with a close-up shot of casino executive Sam “Ace” Rothstein (Robert De Niro). His voiceover says, “In Vegas, everybody's gotta watch everybody else.” The scenes end after Rothstein describes the surveillance people as ex-cheats who know every trick in the house.

When viewing these scenes, watch for the organizational design concepts discussed in this chapter. Ask yourself: Which organizational design forms do these scenes show? Do this scenes show the organizational design processes of differentiation and integration?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

W. (2008)

Director Oliver Stone has created a strong film that outlines the life of George W. Bush. He traces Bush's college activities, football mania, religious faith, and decision to invade Iraq. Bush's strong personality, conservative values, and contentious manner come across clearly in the film.

DVD Chapter 16, “Armed and Dangerous,” has a fully self-contained and extensive discussion about a new Iraq invasion. It shows President Bush (Josh Brolin) leading a meeting of his senior war advisers. The film cuts to a football field in 1990 with George W. Bush talking to his father, the current president.

When viewing this sequence, watch for some organizational design definitions and concepts discussed in this chapter. What organizational design goals does the sequence show? Which specific form of organizational design best fits what the sequence shows?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Assessing Organizational Design

The elements of an organization’s strategy that often appear in an organization chart include customers, products, or services. These items can show as divisions of an organization if it has used a divisional form, or as functional areas such as “Customer Service” or “Product Support.” When customers, products, or services are a key part of an organization’s strategy, managers typically use a divisional form or an organizational design that emphasizes those areas.

Small organizations often rely on a simple functional organizational form that emphasizes functional areas such as manufacturing, accounting, finance, and marketing. Larger organizations often develop into divisional forms, with divisions that emphasize major strategic areas as noted previously. Organizations that have geographically dispersed operations can have divisions formed around locations. This is especially true for organizations with international operations. Some divisions might represent entire countries or major world regions.

The matrix organizational design is a common form in engineering or scientific organizations and organizations with high-technology products or services. Your organization chart might refer to projects and not use the term matrix. The emphasis usually is the same: a dual focus on a project (customer) and a functional (technical) area of the organization.

The evolving forms of organizational design can appear at almost any time. Self-managing teams and virtual organizations (or virtual teams) are becoming increasingly common. If you did not notice either of these forms on an organizational chart, you can inquire about their presence within the operating units shown on a chart. Process-oriented divisions are not yet common. They can appear in organizations that have changed to a strong quality and process orientation, or in organizations that require heavy use of processes such as insurance companies.

Mechanistic and organic organizational forms can appear almost anywhere. They can characterize an entire organization or, in large organizations, divisions and operating locations.

The four generic forms of organizational design—defender, prospector, analyzer, and reactor—can show in the same way as the mechanistic and organic forms. Do they characterize your entire organization or different parts of it?

You might have had difficulty assessing an organization design’s effectiveness. Reflect on the profitability of the organization and your feelings about working there. You can broadly assess an organizational design’s effectiveness by the levels of conflict you and others experience, and whether customers are satisfied with the organization’s products or services.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Here you can find all releveant resources for Chapter 18.

deep structures

In the revolutionary model of organizational change, the enduring features of an organization's design, processes, and relationships with its external environment that help the organization succeed.

entry

The first phase of organizational development; the consultant and manager have their first direct contact and establish a working relationship.

equilibrium periods

In the revolutionary model of organizational change, the periods of stability when the organization moves steadily toward its mission and goals.

evaluation

The seventh phase of organizational development; the activities focus on whether the development effort has had the effect the client wanted.

evolutionary model

A model of organizational change that views change as happening in small steps or increments.

forces against change

Resistance to change from groups inside or outside the organization; hold back organizational change; e.g., quality management move resisted by quality control department (inside force) and special interest groups (outside force).

forces for change

Pressures on managers from inside or outside and organization; pushing managers to change the organization; e.g., dysfunctionally high conflict (inside force) and threat of acquisition (outside force).

human process interventions

Organizational development interventions that focus on interpersonal, intragroup, and intergroup processes; goals include reducing dysfunctional conflict and enhancing fulfillment of human values.

human resource management interventions

Organizational development interventions that use goal setting and rewards to shape individuals' behavior in the direction desired by the organization.

move toward the change state

The second phase of the evolutionary model of organizational change; the change agent tries to move the organization or part of it to a new state.

need for change

The first phase of the evolutionary model of organizational change; the manager or other change agent develops a need for change among those affected.

organizational change

Movement from the organization's present state to some future or target state; includes new strategy, new technology, and changes in organizational culture.

organizational development

A long-term, systematic, prescriptive approach to planned organizational change.

organizational development phases

Organizational development unfolds in a series of phases; each phase flows into the next phase. These are phases, not steps, because no clear boundaries exist between them.

entry

An organizational development phase. The point at which the consultant has the first client contact. The client usually begins the contact, especially if working with an external consultant.

contracting

An organizational development phase. Contract can range from an oral agreement to a document that legally binds both parties. The contract describes each party’s expectations and outlines what each party will do during the organizational development program.

diagnosis

An organizational development phase; consultant gets information about the client system and diagnoses its current state. Can involve observing the client’s behavior and reactions, the client system’s physical characteristics, and collecting data using interviews, surveys, and company records.

feedback

An organizational development phase; consultant reports a preliminary diagnosis to client system members. The consultant and the client system members work together to arrive at a final diagnosis of the client system’s current state.

planning the change

An organizational development phase; a collaborative activity of the consultant and client that follows the diagnosis and feedback phases; results in the design of the organizational development intervention.

intervention

An organizational development phase; a set of activities collaboratively chosen by the client and consultant to move the client system to the desired future state.

evaluation

An organizational development phase; focuses on whether the organizational development effort had the effect the client wanted.

termination

An organizational development phase; ends the client-consultant relationship; some contact between the client system and the consultant can remain, especially for an internal consultant.

planned change

Systematic efforts to move an organization or a subsystem to a new state; includes changing the organization's design, technology, tasks, people, information systems and the like.

planning the change

The fifth phase of organizational development; the consultant and client identify different courses of action and select change alternatives.

resistance to change

Antagonism toward change among people in an organization; reasons for resistance include misunderstanding the goal of the change, having a low tolerance for change, and perceiving that something of value will be lost.

revolutionary model

A model of organizational change that sees change coming in bursts that punctuate long periods of stability; after the changes, the organization settles into another stable period.

revolutionary periods

In the revolutionary model of organizational change, the times of change activities aimed at changing the strategic direction of the organization.

stabilize the change

The last phase of the evolutionary model of organizational change; the change agent makes the change an ongoing part of the organization.

strategy interventions

Organizational development interventions that focus on an organization's response to shifts in its external environment.

structural and technological interventions

Organizational development interventions that focus on the design of the organization, the jobs within it, and the addition of new technology; goal is to improve individual productivity and organizational effectiveness.

targets of planned organizational change

Chosen during the early phases of planned change; include organization culture, decision processes, communication process and the like.

termination

The last stage of organizational development; the consultant's involvement with a specific intervention ends.

unplanned change

Occurs when pressures for change overwhelm efforts to resist change; often unexpected.

Chapter Outline

  1. Introduction
    1. Organizations change because forces inside and outside the organization compel the change. Pressures on an organization, or a subsystem, to change.
    2. Process of change involves unlearning old behavior patterns and learning new ones. Letting go of the old way can be especially painful.
    3. Sources of pressure for organizations to change. Observed earlier in this book that organizations should be viewed as open systems (see Chapter 17, “Organizational Design”). Also noted that a major role of managers was to monitor internal processes and the external environment of their organizations.
    4. Understanding organizational change. What does it do to people in organizations? How does change take place in an organization?
    5. Effects on you as a member of the changing system. You will experience organizational change. Coping with organizational change. Understand it, know how to adapt to it ,or cope with it.
    6. Organizational change. Your future role as a manager. Effective organizational change. What can managers do to manage change and bring about change?
    7. Resistance reactions to the pressures for change. Understanding these and ways of reducing resistance tell us how organizations can be changed.
    8. Discussed organizational change at many places in earlier chapters.
      1. Earlier chapters described many areas of organizational behavior that can be affected by organizational change and development. Areas include organizational design, organizational culture, motivation and changes in individual behavior, job redesign, conflict, and leadership.
      2. Clues about the areas where we can intervene to change an organization.
      3. Tools to understand reactions and resistance to change.
  2. Forces For and Against Change
    1. External forces pressing for change.
      1. Markets and competitors
      2. Threats of acquisition
      3. Government action
      4. Workforce diversity
      5. Technological change
      6. International aspects
    2. Internal forces pressing for change. Dissatisfaction, discontent, felt stress, loss of control over internal processes, dysfunctionally high conflict, and so forth.
      1. Poor communication
      2. Decision-making processes dysfunctionally slow
      3. High absenteeism and turnover
    3. Manager's possible responses to pressures for change
      1. Denial of need for change
      2. Accept the need for change. Deliberately change the organization. Planned organization change.
  3. Unplanned and Planned Organizational Change
    1. Unplanned change happens because the pressures for change overwhelm any resistance to change.
    2. Planned change is a systematic effort by managers to move an organization or some subsystem to a new state.
    3. Managers deliberately change aspects of the organization such as its design, technology, tasks, people themselves, information systems, and so forth.
    4. This chapter describes systematic approaches to doing and managing planned change in organizations.
  4. Targets of Planned Organizational Change
    1. Strategy
    2. Organizational design
    3. Technology
    4. Culture
    5. Task
    6. People, workgroups, intergroup processes
    7. Communication and decision-making processes
    8. Information systems
  5. Models of Planned Organizational Change.
    1. Introduction
      1. Planned change is a deliberate act by managers to move an organization, or some part of it, to a new state.
      2. There must be motivation to change. If it is not there, then managers must develop it.
      3. Key people in the organization must feel the need for change. Identifying those key figures is an important step in the change process.
      4. Without the commitment of those key people to change, planned organizational change is not likely to happen. Unplanned change could happen, though, if the pressures on the organization for change are sufficiently strong.
    2. Evolutionary model of organizational change. Dominant view of organizational change for many years. Change happens incrementally over time. Many small changes add up to overall large-scale change.
    3. Revolutionary model of organizational change. Increasingly clear that organizational change often happens in big leaps followed by periods of stability and then followed again by big leaps.
  6. Resistance to Change
    1. Reasons for resistance to change
    2. Targets of resistance to change
      1. To the change
      2. To the change strategy
      3. To the change agent
    3. Managers' orientations to resistance to change
      1. Problem to overcome
      2. Signal to get more information which will improve the change program
      3. Watch for no resistance to change
    4. Managing the change process to reduce resistance
      1. Change agent attributes and characteristics of the target of change
      2. Disengagement with the past. Using symbols and ceremony.
      3. Communicate information about the change. Explain the change in understandable terms..
      4. Involve the key people who will be affected by the proposed change. Involve them early in the change effort, especially in diagnosing the system to see whether change is needed. Not participation for the sake of participation. Need their information to design an effective change effort..
      5. Supporting the change. Committing resources to the change effort. Especially important if the change involves introducing new technology.
      6. Negotiations. Often necessary where a powerful person or group is a potential source of resistance
      7. Political approaches
      8. Coercion: often used when speed is needed
  7. Leadership and Organizational Change
    1. Leaders can bring change to organizations
    2. Importance of vision to guide the organization through the change
      1. Powerful imagery of the future
      2. Recall the Chapter 12, “Leadership and Management,” discussion of leadership and vision: An effective vision is "future oriented, compelling, bold, aspiring, and inspiriting, yet believable and achievable."
      3. Types of leaders and organizational change. Characteristics they share and effects on change
        1. Leadership Mystique
        2. Transformational leadership
        3. Charismatic leadership
  8. Organizational Development
    1. Long-term, systematic, and prescriptive approach to planned organizational change
    2. Self-renewing quality
    3. Phases of organizational development
    4. Organizational development interventions
      1. Systematic behavioral science based techniques for bringing planned change to an organization
      2. Human process interventions focus on interpersonal, intra-group, and intergroup processes, such as conflict, communication, and decision-making
      3. Structural and technological interventions focus on the design of the organization, the jobs within it, and the addition of new technology to the organization
      4. Human resource management interventions draw on the personnel practices used by organizations. These include aspects of motivation and rewards, career planning and development, and the management of stress.
      5. Strategy interventions focus on an organization's responses to shifts in its external environment.
      6. Combinations of interventions
      7. Effects of the interventions
  9. International Aspects of Organizational Change and Development
    1. Assumptions and values of organizational development reflect the values of its countries of origin: United States, England, northern Europe, and Scandinavia
    2. Workers in countries with less egalitarian social values view directive management behavior as acceptable and desirable
    3. Cultural variations exist in viewing organizations as strongly hierarchical systems
    4. Cultures vary in their conflict orientations and degree of uncertainty they find tolerable
  10. Ethical Issues about Organizational Change and Development
    1. Misrepresentation by consultant or client system managers
    2. Confidentiality and voluntarism in data collection activities
    3. Informing participants of potential effects of an organizational development intervention
    4. Both forced participation and failure to inform participants about potential effects of an intervention are breaches of ethics.

Chapter Overview

Chapter 18 describes organizational change and development. It begins with a description of the forces for and against change. These forces are cast within Lewin's force field analysis to show how it can be used as a tool to understand the pressures managers face in the change process. The chapter describes the difference between unplanned and planned change. Planned organizational change is then described from the perspective of the evolutionary model of change (gradual) and the revolutionary model of change (explosive). A major section focuses on resistance to change and how managers can manage the change process to reduce resistance. The chapter separately describes organizational development and various organizational development interventions.

Learning Goals

After reading this chapter, you should be able to

  • Analyze the pressures on managers to change their organizations.
  • Compare unplanned and planned organizational change.
  • Describe the forces for and against change as a force field around the organization’s present state.
  • Explain the phases and targets of planned change in organizations.
  • Compare the evolutionary and revolutionary models of planned change.
  • Describe reasons for resistance to organizational change.
  • Discuss the role of leadership in planned organizational change.
  • Explain the organizational development techniques managers can use to change their organizations.
  • List the phases of organizational development.
  • Identify some international aspects of organizational change and development.
  • Discuss some ethical issues that surround organizational change and development.

Personal and Management implications

The discussions about organizational change and development throughout the text chapter suggest three personal implications. The first deals with change, the second focuses on your values, and the third follows from whether you will be fully informed of an intervention's effects.

Because many organizations are finding they must change to adapt to their changing environment, you are likely to feel the effects of organizational change in the future. Reflect on what you have learned in this chapter. Are you likely to resist change or accept it? Do not forget, resistance can be helpful to an organization. Your resistance reactions can also mean dysfunctional adaptation to much needed change in an organization.

All data collected during the early phases of a planned change or organizational development effort must be treated confidentially. Further, organizational development interventions often will have direct effects on your behavior within the organization. Will you be informed about the effects of interventions? Will the data you give to an organizational development consultant be handled confidentially? You should think about these issues because you are likely to meet them in the future.

Recall the discussion earlier about the different orientations managers can have to resistance to change. If you now view resistance as a problem to overcome, you will find it useful to reflect on the discussion about using resistance reactions diagnostically. They can be an important source of information to managers about the state of the system. Such information can help effect organizational change in a more functional way.

Your assessment of an organizational development consultant, whether internal or external, is an important first step in developing a relationship with that consultant. Be sure you fully know the consultant's skills and abilities. Also, a complete discussion of values and assumptions will tell you whether you can work effectively with the consultant. Modern organizational development efforts are based on full collaboration between the client and consultant. Such collaboration will not go smoothly if there is conflict between the basic values and assumptions of the parties.

Managers are increasingly carrying out organizational development directly, often with the help of an internal or external organizational development consultant.1 As you develop your skills, and those of others in your organization, you might begin organizational development without a consultant. You may then face the value and ethical dilemmas described earlier. Managing the organizational change and development effort can become a key part of your role as a manager. Many topics discussed in text Chapter 18, “Organizational Change and Development,” and more fully developed in the sources cited, should serve you well in that activity.

Before beginning organizational change and development efforts at locations outside your home country, you will need to understand the orientation to change of people from the local culture. Cultures vary in their orientation to authority and to uncertainty. Such cultural differences imply the need for different intervention and change strategies for the parts of the organization that are in different cultures.


1. Beer, M., and A. E. Walton. 1987. Organizational Change and Development. In Annual Review of Psychology, eds. M. R. Rosenzweig, and L. W. Porter, Vol. 38, pp. 339–67. Palo Alto, Calif.: Annual Reviews.


Chapter Summary

Organizational change includes both unplanned and planned change. Unplanned change happens when forces for change overwhelm the organization. Planned organizational change is deliberate and unfolds in a series of phases that are not always distinct from each other. Planned change efforts can have different targets, including the organization’s culture, decision processes, task design, and organizational design. It can proceed in incremental steps (evolutionary change) or at a fast pace (revolutionary change).

People resist change for many reasons. Managers may view resistance to change as a problem to overcome or as a new source of information about the organization. The chapter described some ways to manage the change process to reduce resistance.

Organizational development is a systematic approach to planned change using social and behavioral science theories and concepts. Organizational development occurs in a series of phases. It often uses data to assess the organization’s current state and to diagnose the organization to identify needed changes.

Managers and consultants can choose from four classes of organizational development interventions: (1) human process interventions, (2) structural and technological interventions, (3) human resource management interventions, and (4) strategy interventions.

Organizational development has its intellectual roots mainly in the United States with some branches in England, northern Europe, and Scandinavia. The consultants’ assumptions and values, and the nature of many interventions, reflect the values of those cultures. Those assumptions and values can differ from the assumptions and values found in many other nations.

Several ethics issues emerged from the discussion of organizational change and development. They center on misrepresentation by a client or consultant, data confidentiality, and full awareness and consent to behavioral changes by people who will experience the changes.

Planned and Unplanned Organizational Change

Discuss the nature of planned and unplanned organizational change. What are the characteristics of each? What are some targets of planned change?

Models of Planned Organizational Change

Planned organizational change can follow either the evolutionary model or the revolutionary model of change. Discuss the main features of each model. When would a manager follow one model instead of the other? Which of these have you experienced?

Manager's Orientations to Resistance to Change

Textbook Chapter 18 described the different orientations managers can have to resistance to change. Which orientation do you personally hold? Which orientations have you seen in your work experiences?

Leadership and Organizational Change

Discuss the role of leadership in organizational change. You might want to review part of textbook Chapter 12 to refresh your views of leadership. Are there any current examples of leadership and ¬organizational change in the business press? Discuss your experiences with leadership, or lack of leadership, and organizational change.

Phases of Organizational Development

Review the phases of organizational development. What are the major issues faced by both the client system and the organizational development consultant in each phase? Which ethical dilemmas most likely appear in each phase?

Organizational Development Interventions

Discuss the major classes of organizational development interventions. What are the goals of each? Which interventions are likely to have the most lasting effects?

International Aspects of Organizational Change and Development

Review the textbook Chapter 18 section describing the international aspects of organizational change and development. Discuss the constraints different cultures put on an organizational development consultant. What opportunities also might exist because of culture differences?

Along Came Polly (2004)

Meet Reuben Feffer (Ben Stiller), a highly focused senior risk assessment analyst. Also meet Polly Prince (Jennifer Aniston), who is not highly focused. Romantic interactions develop between them, as Reuben stretches himself into new behavioral areas.

You view parts of DVD Chapter 11, “Salsa!,” and DVD Chapter 13, “Pillow Talk.” The portion from Chapter 11 begins at 0:44:19. Reuben says, “OK, it's just I'm just really, truthfully not the kind of guy …” It ends as Polly nods her head. The second film sequence is DVD Chapter 13. It begins with Reuben saying, “OK, so throw pillows go in this cabinet here.” This sequence ends after Reuben sticks the knife into the mattress (Stop: 0:50:18).

Keep the following questions in mind while viewing these film sequences: Who is the change target in these sequences? Are there any examples of resistance to change? Which model of organizational change discussed in this chapter best fits the dynamics shown in the film sequences?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Up in the Air (2009)

Ryan Bingham (George Clooney) specializes in firing people in his work role with Career Transition Consulting. He travels over 300 days a year, living out of a suitcase (only one), and loving the experience. Young Natalie Keener (Anna Kendrick) joins the company and presses for a computer-based system for firing people. Ryan wants to show her the realities for firing people by taking her on a cross-country tour which affects them both dramatically.

The scenes begin as Ryan enters Craig Gregory's (Jason Bateman) office while saying, “Tell me you are not taking this seriously” (Start DVD Chapter 4, 0:23:11). These scenes follow Natalie Keener's briefing on the new employee termination system. The scenes end after Ryan clears airport security and goes to the gate (Stop DVD Chapter 5, 0:29:43). The film cuts to a close-up of Natalie loudly typing on her laptop computer. These scenes have some R-rated language.

Use the following questions as guides to your viewing of the scene: Identify the target or targets of change in these scenes. What is the desired future state for the target? Which model of planned organizational change applies to this change process: evolutionary or revolutionary? Is there any evidence of resistance to change?

From CHAMPOUX ICO. Instructor's Teaching Resource, 1E. © 2001 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning, Inc.Reproduced by permission.www.cengage.com/permissions

Organizational Development: Some Scenarios

Scenario I: Unplanned and Planned Organizational Change

KC Laboratory is a rare example of unplanned change that had positive effects on an organization. Although the pace of the change appeared chaotic to many people inside and outside the organization, CEO Dr. Helen Tennant’s natural leadership skills kept people’s energies well focused. The company’s venture capital funding meant it had time to develop successful products. As often happens in an innovative environment, the discovery of how a simple beetle detects heat from a long distance fueled the researcher’s efforts to duplicate the jewel beetle’s heat sensing system.1

Explosive growth of KC Laboratory followed the introduction of the KC Firefly heat sensor. Worldwide high demand for the product forced expansion of its workforce, taking the organization into areas such as marketing and manufacturing for which it was not well prepared.

Dr. Tennant wisely sought outside help after hearing about successful planned change efforts from several colleagues. Her careful choice of an external consultant who had strong technical knowledge outside the behavioral sciences created a good fit between the organization’s change requirements and the consultant’s abilities. Dr. Joan Sisneros, the consultant, acted as the change agent to focus KC Laboratory on its next phase of development—worldwide success in marketing its heat sensor and new products under development.


Scenario II: Resistance to Change

Scenario II of the eExercise showed most sources of resistance discussed earlier in Chapter 18. The employees who lost their jobs clearly lost something they valued, a point not lost on the friends and coworkers they left behind. Although the workers who stayed at the U.S. call center had jobs, the change disrupted their previously valued social interactions during shift changes. This might look like a minor issue, but it often is at the heart of resistance to change.

Other reasons for resistance included misunderstanding the goal of the change and not seeing the value of the change. To these workers, the effects of the change were simple: many friends lost their jobs. Management of the call center did not do an adequate job of explaining the change. They also could have substituted something of value such as a bonus to the remaining workers based on customer satisfaction with the call center.


Scenario III: Organizational Development Consultant

Dr. Janet Henry made a fatal mistake that can doom an outside consultant’s efforts as a change agent. The alignment of the consultant’s values with those of an organization’s CEO who is considering an organizational development effort is a major factor in the success of a change program. Both parties in the transaction made mistakes. Dr. Henry should not have accepted the position with clear knowledge that she would not fit well with the organization. CEO Magdelena Bustos erred by not carefully assessing Dr. Henry by contacting her earlier clients. This scenario emphasizes the importance of consultant-client fit that must emerge in the earliest phases of an organizational development effort.


Scenario IV: Organizational Development

This scenario showed you each organizational development phase as it unfolded at Rio Pharmaceuticals, Inc. The following list identifies each phase and briefly describes the key examples of the phase that appeared in the scenario.

  • Entry: Dr. Griego contacted Dr. O’Connor by telephone and arranged a meeting with herself and her senior managers. She followed up with several telephone conversations and e-mail discussions.
  • Contracting: The parties entered a formal written contract to protect each side’s interests. This contract included the consultant’s fees, reimbursable expenses, and termination and renewal provisions.
  • Diagnosis: Dr. O’Connor made many observations about the organization, its culture as shown by physical characteristics, and management behavior during the entry phase. He noted these privately in his journal. The more formal part of the diagnosis phase occurred with 1.5-hour interviews with senior managers and a survey of the entire Research Division.
  • Feedback: The size of the Research Division required several feedback meetings. Dr. O’Connor was especially skilled at getting reactions to his preliminary diagnosis. Note the strongly collaborative quality of the feedback meetings—a major characteristic of organizational development efforts.
  • Planning the Change: The planning meetings happened after the feedback meetings because of the division’s size. These meetings had a strongly collaborative quality to them, with the client system deciding the interventions.
  • Intervention: Research Division personnel chose brainstorming training followed by several brainstorming efforts as the human process intervention within the division. The survey results showed many positive aspects of the division’s culture, suggesting to all those involved that the culture strongly supported innovation. Other aspects of the diagnosis and feedback phases suggested an open-systems planning intervention with the senior executive team. New ideas coming from the Research Division needed a clear plan for product development and marketing.
  • Evaluation: Senior executives and the external consultant began to develop a plan for assessment of the interventions six months and twelve months later.
  • Termination: All parties involved agreed to continue with the client-consultant relationship until after the twelve-month assessment.

Developed by Joseph E. Champoux, Ph.D. © 2016 Routledge, Taylor and Francis

Download Exercise

Notes

1. Loosely based on the research developments of Schmitz, H. and M. Müller of the University of Bonn, Germany. Beetle Drive: A Biologically Inspired Heat Detector. Economist, August 7, 2004, p. 66.